Home

ZyXEL Communications GS-4012 Switch User Manual

1. LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority The priority you assign to the interface is used in router elections to decide which router is going to be the Designated Router DR or the Backup Designated Router BDR You can assign a number between 0 and 255 A priority of O means that the router will not participate in router elections Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number for an interface Network This field displays the IP interface information Area ID This field displays the area ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface to that area Authentication This field displays the authentication method used Same as Area None Simple or MD5 Key ID When the Authentication field displays MD5 this field displays the identification number of the key used Cost This field displays the interface cost used for calculating the routing table Priority This field displays the priority for this OSPF interface Delete Click Delete to remove the selected ent
2. 69 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statisties iouis reis risa eb iE EYE PAT IARE IAE DU FE quK A pin kaiia dannandi 71 Go CORSE ENTE N E A Premi pod c eoe boa EE ERIv PM FEL ANH eda ERR v E LEE IU a ENEN 71 CEPE aN OUA aaan 71 6219 08 Port DEISIS xudisbvwentintiee tbe aaa a 72 Chapter 7 Bse SEHR A E E E N E E E T E wad A E GEEFN ON CA VER EK 77 POOO N aa NEE TT 3 2 Systom Infor srasni aia ti adipi iras E E El Rua E Ul MM REE eda y T ENDS Jibxeiesdi sp E Heal E pde ERR N E v basa avete e fiii addu 79 RE production to imn Mr 81 TO SIGN Eel Fee 81 12 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table of Contents Bog ec e 83 FA MP VCS NT TIR 83 PED c I eh a a a n A O 85 Parn IE o 0 c 89 Chapter 8 VEAN Pc 91 8 1 Iiniroducton to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANS ssec ond s REM HL SER dS rt tin 91 8 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames eeeeeeeucsseeseeeee etna nna ta nana 91 5 2 Automatic VLAN FOSISIEIIOIE asucccseiemccttiiece ctt tli eeuazk nia eol dd iuce cbr iaaa 92 BRILON Loue peau dn EE M D 92 Boc IMP asocio ique iudu divitum ERES cuiu ut Up eM ei DNE 92 Bod POR V TRUNKING 93 Bd ISO Ib VLAN TYPE 1cnsqestaed korka dani dia EAM EIU ea dad onan nadie dsb EA AQUA RUM DDR SER AM PHIL LEM Tei seni 93 Co oae VLAN c N ee a 93 LSE VLERN SIUS a 94 ats VLAN DEG MT 94 8 5 9 Conf
3. Figure 142 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker D 2 Rate 3 ColorMarker Diffserv Active 1 color blind C color aware Port Active Commit Rate Peak Rate OSE green yellow red H Kbps Kbps 1 ri jo Kbps Kbps 26 28 30 2 r f Kbps Kbps 26 28 30 3 m rw Dh ws be pe Do 4 O j0 Kbps Kbps 26 28 30 5 D p Kbps 0 Kbps 26 28 30 6 r qp Kops n bs Reo 7 n 0 Kbps 0 Kbps 26 28 30 ee 0 Kbps re 28 30 RIAL Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate TRTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker on the Switch The Switch evaluates and marks the packets based on the TRTCM settings Note You must also activate DiffServ on the Switch and the individual ports for the Switch to drop red high loss priority colored packets Mode Select color blind to have the Switch treat all incoming packets as uncolored All incoming packets are evaluated against the CIR and PIR Select color aware to treat the packets as marked by some preceding entity Incoming packets are evaluated based on their existing color Incoming packets that are not marked proceed through the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch s Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to m
4. Table 95 IP Multicast LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This read only field displays the port number a Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them IP The Switch removes the VLAN tag from IP multicast packets belonging to the specified Multicast VLAN before transmission on this port Egress Enter a VLAN group ID in this field Enter 0 to set the Switch not to remove any VLAN tags Untag from the packets Vlan ID Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Differentiated Services This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ on the Switch 32 1 DiffServ Overview Quality of Service QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ is a class of serv
5. enaeseteenesaenlaeenaleeenen 171 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 15 Table of Contents Ze IOMP spun e aims 172 PEA a EE CUR A E E NOREN AAA A IEE AEN ETTO 172 yodssqurunrie ii pn ainia aa ai iai R A A 172 22 4 GMF OnO rs VLAN NP 174 22 0 GIF Pligg PONG ESTE 176 22 6 tldqe pr s 177 ZAD 1 AE Or MYR PONE sisirin T TE IET 177 ra WI Id ac mer 178 cb Now MYR VOUS sus dco to ae bin pe o LB oU RU DE DRE RA os EE E Ld 178 22 1 General MYR Configuration MEE TIE o m 178 22 6 MYR Group CONTGUIEIION e 180 229 T MYR Configuraton EXOITIG sssaaa E 181 Chapter 23 Authentication amp ACCOUMENG sisciscisiscscsscsscnsssencssascessssracecnesioecssancscsstanseeuasianationnissacssansandonnee 185 23 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting sss 185 LRMET CHI 185 chs We RADIUS and TACACDE DES 186 23 2 Authentication and Accounting Screens ecsesiissiseses etia areae ba eani iba 3 da ua 186 232 TRADUS SO Se dGnibeiiettetiid petere mr e WR e D d t dps 186 23 2 2 DAGACOT GBVer SIMD acisesiidzesesitetm nt bI I I EM RR M REP eR Ida NE M AME 188 23 2 3 Authentication and Accounting Setup 22neieceieeeecetea tnmen titia dece t dine idd 190 2324 Vendor Speo AIDE uiae e tiet Eg RECO d blabla PEL aa oaa Ma iE
6. where T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Enables the trunk T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Places ports in the trunk interface port list T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 lacp Enables LACP in the trunk An example is shown next Create trunk 1 on the Switch Place ports 5 8 in trunk 1 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 47 Configuration Mode Commands Enable dynamic link aggregation LACP on trunk 1 sysname config trunk t1 sysname config trunk t1 lacp sysname config trunk tl interface 5 8 47 9 Enabling Port Authentication To enable a port authentication you need to specify your RADIUS server details and select the ports which require external authentication You can set up multiple RADIUS servers and specify how the Switch will process authentication requests 47 9 1 RADIUS Server Settings Configuring multiple RADIUS servers is only available via the command interpreter mode Use the radius server command to set up your RADIUS server settings Syntax radius server host lt index gt lt ip gt radius server host index ip acct port lt socket number gt key lt key string gt radius server timeout 1 1000 radius server mode lt priority round robin gt where radius server host index ip acct port lt socket number gt key lt key string gt Specifies the IP address of the RADIUS server Changes the UDP po
7. OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION ping pingProbeFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails pingTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 2 This trap is sent when a ping test consisting of a series of ping probes fails pingTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed traceroute traceRouteTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails traceRouteTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Table 117 SNMP Switch Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION stp STPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes MRSTPNewRoot GS 4012F This trap is sent when the MRSTP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 43 2 1 root switch changes GS 4024 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 43 2 1 MSTPNewRoot GS 4012F This trap is sent when the MSTP root 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 107 7 switch changes 0 1 GS 4024 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 107 7 0 1 STPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes MRSTPTopologyChange GS 4012F This trap is sent when the MRSTP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 43 2 2 topology changes GS 4024 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 43 2 2 MSTPTopologyChange GS 4012F This trap is sent when the MSTP root 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 107
8. STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 826 Address Resolution Protocol ARP RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 894 Ethernet II Encapsulation RFC 1058 RIP 1 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1155 SMI RFC 1157 SNMPv1 Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 RFC 1213 SNMP MIB II RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1723 RIP 2 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1757 RMON RFC 1901 SNMPv2c Simple Network Management Protocol version 2c RFC 2131 RFC 2132 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP RFC 2138 RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2139 RADIUS Accounting RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2338 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP RFC 2698 Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM RFC 2865 RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2674 P BRIDGE MIB Q BRIDGE MIB RFC 3046 DHCP Relay GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Table 150 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 3164 Syslog RFC 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 3 RFC 3414 User based Security Model USM for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP v3 RFC 3580 RADIUS Tunnel Protocol Attribute IEEE 802 1x Port Based Network
9. Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single service provider s VLAN using the outer VLAN tag defined by SP VID BS Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose Tunnel Port GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 21 3 VLAN Tag Format A VLAN tag service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802 1Q consists of the following three fields Table 49 VLAN Tag Format Type Priority VID Type is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier is the service provider VLAN stacking tag type Many vendors use 0x8100 or 0x9 100 TPID Tag Protocol Identifier is the customer IEEE 802 1Q tag If the VLAN stacking port role is Access Port then the Switch adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure Ifthe VLAN stacking port role is Tunnel Port then the Switch only adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure that have an SP TPID different to the one configured on the Switch If an incoming frame s SP TPID is the same as the one configur
10. Table 104 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings apply DHCP Status Select whether the Switch should function as a DHCP Server or Relay for the specified VID If you select Server then fields related to DHCP relay configuration are grayed out and vice versa Server Use this section if you want to configure the Switch to function as a DHCP server for this VLAN Client IP Specify the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Pool Starting Address Size of Specify the size or count of the IP address pool The Switch can issue from 1 to 253 Client IP IP addresses to DHCP clients Pool IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for the client IP pool Mask Default Enter the IP address of the default gateway device Gateway Primary Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to the RS da DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask Server Relay Use this section if you want to configure the Switch to function as a DHCP relay for this VLAN Remote Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation DHCP Server 1 3 Relay Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number Agent port number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information Information This read only field displays the sys
11. 33 4 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same broadcast domain During the initial IP address leasing the Switch helps to relay network information such as the IP address and subnet mask between a DHCP client and a DHCP server Once the DHCP client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network network information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP requests from all domains to the same DHCP server You can also configure the Switch to relay DHCP information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients 33 4 1 DHCP Relay Agent Information The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server by adding Relay Agent Information This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 33 DHCP The DHCP Relay Agent Information feature adds an Agent Information field to the Option 82 field The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the Switch relays to a DHCP server Relay Agent Information can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this o
12. 8 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 10 VLAN aware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed A broadcast frame or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system is confining the broadcast to a specific domain GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID except the ingress port itself thus Chapter 8 VLAN 8 2 Automatic VLAN Registration 8 2 1 GARP 8 2 1 1 GARP Timers 8 2 2 GVRP GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network switches to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn b
13. Enter a port number and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port or select Any to clear statistics for all ports 6 2 1 Status Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Figure 27 Status gt Port Details Port Info TX Packet RX Packet TX Collision Error Packet Distribution OLA ESD Port NO Name Link Status LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KBs s Rx KBs s Up Time TX Packets Multicast Broadcast Pause Tagged RX Packets Multicast Broadcast Pause Control Single Multiple Excessive Late RX CRC Length Runt 64 65 to 127 128 to 255 256 to 511 512 to 1023 1024 to 1518 Giant Port Status 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 c o o o o oN o ommmo o o The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Status Port Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Port NO This field displays the port number you are viewing Name This field displays the name of the port Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half duplex It also shows the ca
14. Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 22 on page 110 for more information Add Click Add to save this MST instance to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this change if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance VLAN This field displays the VID or VID ranges to which the MST instance is mapped Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to di
15. sssssessseeeeeeneree 255 Figure 143 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting 4 easet tuba kun turpia iia hdi 256 Figure 144 IF Application DHCP SIJU ood dre DOR Ete DER RE Tb ih gual obs opta a santas Eo PDA nada 260 Figure 145 IP Application gt DHCP gt DHCP Server Status Detail sssssssssssssssss 260 Figure 146 IP Application DHCP S Goal csicscrsenttaatiseesccacrsada raed EPIS ppt de EY ERI iae caa L eeu ep AIL EIE 262 Figure 147 Global DHCP Relay Network Example eeeieeeeeeiieene ne htt anth Etha ku tha 263 Figure 146 DHCP Relay Configuration Example 2 tetaatet reitera he pra te seirinin A eae brR TAY hanes 263 Figure 149 IF Applicaton DHCP gt WLAN unu nett e e o EE SRI o ds PE Ha Send testa 264 Figure 150 DHCP Relay for Two VLANS censos lieben ipte bere Eb kerx Fbdtetn indi hd Fate bn adt ded 266 Figure 151 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example ecce 266 Figure 152 WAR BEONE T Laussssetecsdaaptta pec y COGO ROO ERCRAT UO BRUDER AL Rad 267 Figure 150 WEIS T tina ANA 268 Figure 154 VRRP Cont dgura on IP nterface 2a caet char re danaanecsteatsacciadsascenirtienaqwons cenniaues ven 269 Figure 155 VRRP Configuration VRRP Parameters ccccccccceeseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeecaeaeeneeeaeeaeeneeeseeaeneees 271 Figure 155 VRRP Configuration SUMMA iere pee p bd ceto triasaccitvigncecstaniaancabusaeaeedtemetearmeamies 272 Figure 157 VRRP Configuration Example One Virtual
16. Static if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group LACP if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP 15 4 Link Aggregation Setting Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting to display the screen shown next See Section 15 1 on page 133 for more information on link aggregation Figure 62 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting ED Link Aggregation Setting d Status LACP Group ID Active T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T5 EE EERE Port Group 1 None None None None None None None co sy Ch Cn 4 CO Nh None i ten itae dine CU d p GP Me Apply Cancel sapand GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 135 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Link Aggregation Setting This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static link aggregation Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group Port This field displays the port number Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time m
17. Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide lt gt Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device BS Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The GS 4024 and GS 4012F models may be referred to as the Switch the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e g is a Shorthand for for instance
18. GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 52 Troubleshooting 52 2 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default BES Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary 52 2 1 1 Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address 52 2 1 1 1 Disable pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 203 Pop up Blocker Mail and News bj Pop up Blocker Turn Off Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Pop up Blocker Settings Synchronize oe ot I Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 52 Troubleshooting Figure 204 Internet Option
19. Password Each cluster member s password is its web configurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon amp appears in the member summary list below If multiple devices have the same password then hold SHIFT and click those switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cluster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch
20. Startup failures This field displays the number of times the Switch could not create or read the DHCP snooping database when the Switch started up or a new URL is configured for the DHCP snooping database Successful transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from or updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from or update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Successful reads This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed reads This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from the DHCP snooping database GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 70 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Successful writes This field displays the number of times the Switch updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed writes This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Database detail First successful access This field displays the first time the Switch accessed the DHCP snooping database for any reason Last ignored bindings counters This section displays the number of times and the reaso
21. Table 138 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE renew dhcp snooping database tftp host filename Loads dynamic bindings from the specified DHCP snooping database 13 show aaa authentication Displays whether authentication and privilege checking is enabled on the Switch and what methods are used for authentication authentication enable Displays the authentication method s for checking privilege level of admnistrators authentication login Displays the authentication methods for administrator login accounts accounting Displays accounting settings configured on the Switch accounting commands Displays accounting settings for recording command events accounting dotlx Displays accounting settings for recording IEEE 802 1x session events accounting exec Displays accounting settings for recording administrative sessions via SSH Telnet or the console port accounting system Displays accounting settings for recording system events for example system shut down start up accounting enabled or accounting disabled accounting update Display the update period setting on the Switch for accounting sessions alarm status Displays alarm status and configuration arp inspection Displays ARP inspection configuration details filter Displays the current list of MAC address
22. Chapter 41 IP Table 41 2 Viewing the IP Table Click Management IP Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 198 IP Table OLAF Sort by j VID Port Index IP Address VID Port Type 1 192 168 1 5 1 B dynamic 2 192 168 1 10 0 CPU static 3 192 168 1 255 0 CPU static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 132 IP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Sort by Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type The information is then displayed in the summary table below IP Click this button to display and arrange the data according to IP address VID Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number Index This field displays the index number IP Address This is the IP address of the device from which the incoming packets came VID This is the VLAN group to which the packet belongs Port This is the port from which the above IP address was learned This field displays CPU to indicate the IP address belongs to the Switch Type This shows whether the IP address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static belonging to the Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide ARP Table This chapter introduces ARP Table 42 1 ARP Table Overview Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping
23. Figure 148 DHCP Relay Configuration Example ED DHCP Relay d Active Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Information Status Vv 192 168 1100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Iv Option 82 M GS 4012F Apply Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 33 DHCP 33 5 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings BS Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel then click the VLAN link In the DHCP Status screen that displays You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN that you want to configure DHCP settings for on the Switch See Section 7 6 on page 83 for information on how to do this Figure 149 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN ORTNER Status VID Server DHCP Status C Relay Server Client IP Pool Starting Address noon Size of Client IP Pool IP Subnet Mask booo Default Gateway booo Primary DNS Server booo Secondary DNS Server booo Relay Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information E Option 82 Information Fl as 4012F Add Cancel Clear Remote DHCP Server 2 VID Type DHCP Status Delete 2 Server 192 168 2 100 66 O Delete Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 33 DHCP The following table describes the labels in this screen
24. Ifthere is already a DHCP server on your network then you can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent When the Switch receives a request from a computer on your network it contacts the DHCP server for the necessary IP information and then relays the assigned information back to the computer 33 1 2 DHCP Configuration Options The DHCP configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens The screen you should use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on your network Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria Global The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server VLAN The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis The Switch can be configured as a DHCP server for one VLAN and at the same time the Switch can be configured to relay DHCP requests for clients in another VLAN GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 33 DHCP 33 2 DHCP Status Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel The DHCP Status screen displays Figure 144 P Application gt DHCP Status ED DHCP Status d Server Status index VID 1 2 Server Status 192 168 2 100 56 Relay Status Relay Mode VLAN 1 3 IP Pool Size VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 100 IP Application gt DHCP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Status This section displays configuration settin
25. Packet Format Specify the format of the packet Choices are All 802 3 tagged 802 3 untagged Ethernet Il tagged and Ethernet Il untagged A value of 802 3 indicates that the packets are formatted according to the IEEE 802 3 standards A value of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to RFC 894 Ethernet I encapsulation Layer 2 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 2 classifier VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source VLAN ID in the field provided Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a priority level in the field provided GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 18 Classifier Table 42 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Ethernet Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in Type hexadecimal value Refer to Table 44 on page 154 for information Source MAC Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses Address To specify a source select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Port Type the port number to which the rule should be applied You may choose one port only or all ports Any Destination MAC Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses Address To speci
26. Port This field displays the port number d Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Broadcast pkt s Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per second Multicast pkt s Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second DLF pkt s Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure DLF packets the port receives per second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Mirroring This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens 14 1 Port Mirroring Setup Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port the port you copy the traffic to in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference Click Advanced Application gt Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen Use this screen to select a mo
27. Priority Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames Select Set the packet s 802 1 priority to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the Priority field Select Send the packet to priority queue to put the packets in the designated queue Select Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the TOS field Diffserv Select No change to keep the TOS and or DSCP fields in the packets Select Set the packet s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in the TOS field Select Replace the IP TOS with the 802 1 priority value to replace the TOS field with the value you configure in the Priority field Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the DSCP field GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule Table 46 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Outgoing Select Send the packet to the mirror port to send the packet to the mirror port Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port Select Send the matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping or to be sent to the CPU to the egress port to send the broadcast multicast DLF marked to drop or CPU frames to the egress port Select Set the packet s VLAN ID to set
28. pute wee eee PPP rrr Tt 1 Connect your computer to the MGMT port that is used only for management Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the MGMT port GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 2 Open your web browser and enter 192 168 0 1 the default MGMT port IP address in the address bar to access the web configurator See Section 4 2 on page 55 for more information 3 Click Basic Setting and IP Setup e onum in the navigation panel Default Gateway 00 4 Configure the related fields in the Endet Hine nd aaa Default Management in band C Outofband IP Setup screen For the Sales network enter pA ELLA 192 168 2 1 as the IP address and paaien pe 255 255 255 0 as the subnet d adus ae Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 mask 5 Inthe VID field enter the ID of Apply Cancel the VLAN group to which you want this IP interface to belong P Interface IP Address 192 168 2 1 This is the same as the VLAN ID R se E you configure in the Static us p VLAN screen 6 Click Add to save the settings to Add Cancel the run time memory Settings in Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Delete the run time memory are lost 1 192 168 1 12 255 255 255 0 1 m when the Switch s power is turned off Delete Cancel 5 1 2 Configuring DHCP Server Settings You can set the Switch to assign network information such as the IP address DNS server etc to DHCP clients on th
29. Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 257 Chapter 32 Differentiated Services GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide DHCP This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature 33 1 DHCP Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Switch as a DHCP server or a DHCP relay agent When configured as a server the Switch provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you configure the Switch as a relay agent then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network If you don t configure the Switch as a DHCP server or relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast domain of the client computers or else the client computers must be configured manually 33 1 1 DHCP Modes The Switch can be configured as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent If you configure the Switch as a DHCP server it will maintain the pool of IP addresses along with subnet masks DNS server and default gateway information and distribute them to your LAN computers
30. Figure 55 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP a panning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP IC Tree Protocol MRSTP Tree 1 7 Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 8000 001349000002 8000 001349000002 Hello Time second 2 2 Max Age second 20 20 Forwarding Delay second 15 15 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MRSTP to edit MRSTP settings on the Switch Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfi
31. INTERNAL EXTERNAL FILE TYPE NAME NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration File config This is the configuration filename on the Switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your Switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware ras bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the Switch 35 8 1 1 Example FTP Commands ftp gt put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Switch ftp gt get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes config and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use gt Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device 35 8 2 FTP Command Line Procedure 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 35 Maintenance 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to bin
32. Sets the IP address of the Switch in the VLAN and allow remote management to this IP address 13 default gateway lt ip address Sets the default gateway IP address in this VLAN 13 name lt name str gt Specifies a name for identification purposes 13 no fixed lt port list gt Sets fixed port s to normal port s 13 forbidden port list Sets forbidden port s to normal port s 13 inactive Enables the specified VLAN 13 ip address ip address mask Deletes the IP address and subnet mask from this VLAN 13 ip address default gateway Deletes the default gateway from this VLAN 13 untagged port list Specifies the port s you want to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID 13 normal port list Specifies the port s to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP 13 untagged port list Specifies the port s you don t want to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 375 Chapter 45 Introducing Commands 45 13 mvr Commands The following table lists the mvr commands in configuration mode Table 143 Command Summary myr Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEG E mvr lt vlan id gt Enters the MVR Multicast VLAN Registration configuration mode 13 exit Exist fr
33. contact system Sets the geographic location and 13 contact the name of the person in charge location system of this Switch location gt get community Sets the get community 13 lt property gt set community Sets the set community 13 property trap community Sets the trap community 13 lt property gt trap destination Sets the IP addresses of up to 13 lt ip gt four stations to send your SNMP traps to trap destination udp port Sets the IP address of an SNMP 13 lt ip gt lt socket manager You can configure up number gt to four managers to send your version SNMP traps to lt vlv2cv3 usern ame lt name gt trap destination Enables sending SNMP traps to 13 lt ip gt enable traps a manager aaa Enables sending all AAA type 13 traps to a manager aaa lt options gt Enables sending specific AAA 13 traps to a manager The options are authentication or accounting help Displays help information for 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE interface Enables sending all interface type traps to a manager 13 interface lt options gt Enables sending all interface type traps to a manager The options are linkup linkdown and autonegotiation 13 ip Enables sending all IP type traps to a manager 13 ip options En
34. i Em IE H IER IE IE 3 eaaet inicie ie Pic B EOS ES ooo The following table describes the port labels on the front panel Table 1 Front Panel PORT DESCRIPTION MGMT Connect to a computer using an RJ 45 Ethernet cable for local configuration of the Switch CONSOLE Only connect this port if you want to configure the Switch using the command line interface CLI via the console port GS 4024 Model 20 100 1000 Connect these ports to a computer a hub an Ethernet switch or router Mbps RJ 45 Gigabit Ethernet Ports GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Table 1 Front Panel continued PORT DESCRIPTION Four Dual Each interface has one 1000 Base T copper RJ 45 port and one Small Form Factor Personality Pluggable SFP fiber port with one port active at a time eane 4 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 Gigabit Ports Connect these Gigabit Ethernet ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches 4 Mini GBIC Ports Use mini GBIC transceivers in these slots for fiber optic connections to backbone Ethernet switches see Section 3 1 3 on page 47 for instructions GS 4012F Model 8 Mini GBIC Use mini GBIC transceivers in these slots for fiber optic connections to backbone Slots Ethernet switches see Section 3 1 3 on page 47 for instructions Four Dual Each interface has one 1000 Base T copper RJ 45 port and one Small Form Factor Personality Pluggable
35. public keys private keys 297 HTTPS example 298 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Index humidity 425 IANA 438 IEEE 802 1p priority 83 IEEE 802 1x activate 143 144 188 190 reauthentication 144 IEEE 802 1x port authentication 141 IGMP 241 245 how it works 242 port based 243 setup 243 version 171 242 version 3 243 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol 171 IGMP filtering 171 profile 176 profiles 173 IGMP snooping 171 and VLANs 172 MVR 177 setup 174 ingress port 102 ingress rate and bandwidth control 128 installation freestanding 41 precautions 42 rack mounting 42 interface 232 and OSPF 236 interface commands 395 interface and OSPF 230 Internal Router IR 229 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA 438 introduction 37 IP capability 429 interface 83 269 routing domain 83 services 429 setup 83 IP multicast 241 IP source guard 199 ARP inspection 199 201 DHCP snooping 199 static bindings 199 IP table 317 how it works 317 L LACP 133 system priority 137 timeout 138 layer 2 features 428 layer 3 features 429 LEDs 50 limit MAC address learning 148 Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP 133 link aggregation 133 dynamic 133 ID information 134 setup 135 136 status 134 link state database 230 232 lockout 61 log 303 login 55 password 61 login account Administrator 294 non administrator 295 login accounts 294 configuring via web configurator 294 multiple 294 number of 294 login pass
36. tule lt vlan id gt drop src dst both inactive name name mac Disables the specified MAC filter 13 mac addr vlan rule vlan id drop src dst both mac forward name name mac Removes the specified MAC 13 mac addr vlan forwarding entry belonging to a vlan id VLAN group if any forwarded datavfac through an interface s lt interface id gt name name mac Enables the specified MAC 13 mac addr vlan address belonging to a VLAN vlan id group if any forwarded through interface an interface s lt interface id gt inactive mirror port Disables port mirroring on the 13 Switch mrstp lt treeIndex gt Disables the specified STP 13 configuration mrstp interface Disables the STP assignment 13 lt port list gt from the specified port s mstp Disables MSTP on the Switch 13 lt instance gt lt 0 Disables the specified MST 13 16 gt instance on the Switch lt instance gt lt 0 Disables the assignment of 13 16 gt vlan 1 4094 gt specific VLANs from an MST instance GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued lt ip address gt lt mask bits gt vr id 1 7 COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE instance 0 16 Disables the assignment of 13 interface port specific ports from an M
37. 127 Common and Internal Spanning Tree See CIST 114 config mode 328 examples 383 configuration 226 change running config 281 saving 331 configuration file 62 332 and commands 332 backup 282 restore 62 282 saving 280 configuration saving 61 console port commands 325 settings 46 325 contact information 449 copying port settings See port cloning copyright 445 CPU management port 101 current date 80 current time 80 customer support 449 D Database Description DD 230 daylight saving time 80 default gateway 265 Designated Router DR and OSPF 230 DHCP 259 client IP pool 265 configuration options 259 modes 259 relay agent 259 relay example 263 server 259 setup 264 VLAN settings 264 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 259 DHCP relay option 82 201 DHCP snooping 199 configuring 201 DHCP relay option 82 201 trusted ports 200 untrusted ports 200 DHCP snooping database 200 diagnostics 303 Ethernet port test 303 ping 303 system log 303 Differentiated Service DiffServ 251 DiffServ 251 activate 254 and TRTCM 254 DS field 251 DSCP 251 DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 256 network example 252 PHB 251 dimensions 425 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Index disclaimer 445 double tagged frames 165 DR Designated Router 230 DS Differentiated Services 251 DSCP DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 256 service level 251 what it does 251 DSCP DiffServ Code Point 251 DVMRP Autonomous System 245 default timer se
38. 13 vrrp network Deletes VRRP settings 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE service control ftp Disables FTP access to the 13 Switch http Disables web browser control to 13 the Switch https Disables secure web browser 13 access to the Switch icmp Disables ICMP access to the 13 Switch such as pinging and tracerouting snmp Disables SNMP management 13 ssh Disables SSH Secure Shell 13 Server access to the Switch telnet Disables telnet access to the 13 Switch snmp server trap Disables sending of SNMP traps 13 destination to a station ip enable traps Disables all SNMP traps from 13 being sent to a manager enable traps aaa Disables sending all AAA type 13 traps to a manager enable traps aaa Disables sending specific AAA 13 options traps to a manager The options are authentication or accounting enable traps Disables sending all interface 13 interface type traps to a manager enable traps Disables sending all interface 13 interface type traps to a manager The options options are linkup linkdown and autonegotiation enable traps ip Disables sending all IP type traps 13 to a manager enable traps ip Disables sending all IP type traps 13 options to a manager The option
39. 192 168 10 1 database txt Timeout interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Write delay interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database the first time the current bindings change after an update Once the next update is scheduled additional changes in current bindings are automatically included in the next update Renew DHCP Snooping URL Enter the location of a DHCP snooping database and click Renew if you want the Switch to load it You can use this to load dynamic bindings from a different DHCP snooping database than the one specified in Agent URL When the Switch loads dynamic bindings from a DHCP snooping database it does not discard the current dynamic bindings first If there is a conflict the Switch keeps the dynamic binding in volatile memory and updates the Binding collisions counter in the DHCP Snooping screen Section 24 4 on page 205 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 24 5 1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure Use this screen to specify whe
40. 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch sseseee 42 2 20 Mounting THE Switeh on a RACK ue sE 43 Chapter 3 Hardware COV ORV IOW rnor eaaa an e E AE aE KA EEE AERA aaa RAEN 45 ca Front Pale l Conecto osiadania aAa a ia aAa aaa Rd 45 LIC oS POM annas EE ie eee e 46 i le IGRI ERGEL FONG srren ira 46 APOLO E rr AE OII IESTI Tp TEES 47 LN allo qe 48 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide LE Table of Contents 221 Powa COnNECIOF I Aa 49 3 2 2 External Backup Power Supply Connector 49 CXII mE 50 Part ik Basic Cri Or E S 53 Chapter 4 The Web Confinrator iuis epe bi cbr e aa A aAa UNA EO ERR 55 zm GUI s 55 LMdco ci iis pr 55 SEM IECuI foc o 0t RT 56 23 1 ee YOU Poss dios duele Rat eod tiad tk lpia b For cn td Rens 61 uis uml segui M acre nic scene Gan eR 61 AS SWEN LOCKOUT e 61 VSS A a Tc 62 45 1 Reload the Configuration Fle sessesensenkcmnrrandnt annA 62 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator aos ogni a prt Ida do er i te a a op s dux 63 EVI ies aed asst tut a s Lupa cpl acti tal chispa Deb Cc Eau 63 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Dd te M 65 CHRD I0 eem 65 5 11 Configuring an IP internace 12s exer etna oda opa ida x PAR RU RED EI ED 65 5 1 2 Configuring DHCP Server Selings uasa kteteiadskbeem AS ERO a 66 Bd LPI T VLAN sina E 67 aPC eM EA TON VID sesan SEE E AEEA 68 ESI Dali
41. 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 161 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO T SIRROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 437 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 161 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning continued NO BORROWED NO HOSTS PER HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS SUBNET 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a sing
42. 4 and 6 are the destination ports e 2 6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports Basic Setting Select which port settings you configured in the Basic Setting menus should be copied to the destination port s Advanced Select which port settings you configured in the Advanced Application menus Application should be copied to the destination ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Introducing Commands This chapter introduces commands and gives a summary of commands available 45 1 Overview In addition to the web configurator you can use commands to configure the Switch Use commands for advanced Switch diagnosis and troubleshooting If you have problems with your Switch customer support may request that you issue some of these commands to assist them in troubleshooting BS See the web configurator parts of this User s Guide for background information on features configurable by the web configurator 45 2 Accessing the CLI You can use a direct console connection or Telnet to access the command interpreter on the Switch LES The Switch automatic
43. 5 r os M ns 6 a fize am zl 7 E LN M fix 8 a 128 ao 7 prom Eon EIS UNI OO lm Am lo Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen see Figure 53 on page 118 Tree This is a read only index number of the STP trees Active a this check box to activate an STP tree Clear this checkbox to disable an ree Note You must also activate Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MRSTP on the Switch Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter
44. Active Server Address Log Level Index Active A Syslog Server Setup 0 0 0 0 Level 0 Syslog Setup r Add Cancel Clear IP Address Delete Cancel Log Level Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 126 Syslog Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it you can edit the entry later Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server Log Level Select the severity level s of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server The lower the number the more critical the logs are Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry Click this number to edit the entry Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server IP Address This field displays the
45. Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Delete 1 192 168 1 12 255 255 255 0 1 O 192 168 0 1 Apply Cancel 0 0 0 0 Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Basic Setting gt IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 254 Domain Name Server DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address Default Management Specify which traffic flow In Band or Out of band the Switch is to send packets originating from itself such as SNMP traps or packets with unknown source Select Out of band to have the Switch send the packets to the management port labelled MGMT This means that device s connected to the other port s do not receive these packets Select In Band to have the Switch send the packets to all ports except the management port labelled MGMT to which connected device s do not receive these packets Management IP Use these fields Address to set the settings for the out of band management port IP Address Enter the out of band management IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation For example 192 168 0 1 IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted de
46. MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2 on switch A To set up MRSTP activate MRSTP on the Switch and specify which port s belong to which spanning tree BS Each port can belong to one STP tree only Figure 45 MRSTP Network Example GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 1 5 Multiple STP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s is backward compatible with STP RSTP and addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols STP and RSTP in networks to include the following features One Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST that represents the entire network s connectivity Grouping of multiple bridges or switching devices into regions that appear as one single bridge on the network A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI MSTI allows multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree Load balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region 11 1 5 1 MSTP Network Example The following figure shows a network example where two VLANS are configured on the two switches If the switches are using STP or RSTP the link for VLAN 2 will be blocked as STP and RSTP allow only one link in the network and block the redundant link Figure 46 STP RSTP Network Example With MSTP VLANs and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network Thus traffic from the two VLANs travel on different paths The following
47. Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch The Switch can learn up to 16K MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 16K For maximum port security enable this feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address es for a port It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts By default MAC address learning is still enabled even though the port security is not activated 17 2 Port Security Setup Click Advanced Application gt Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 17 Port Security Figure 71 Advanced Application gt Port Security Port 4 0 ON 4 60 IND OLED Active Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Active 1 v S Xl s u Hu HuHu HuHu HuHu S x Xx 4 I Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Advanced Application gt Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable port security on the Switch Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all por
48. RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M send the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting 27 2 Configuring RIP Click IP Application RIP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown You cannot manually configure a new entry Each entry in the table is automatically created when you configure a new IP domain in the IP Setup screen refer to Section 7 6 on page 83 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 227 Chapter 27 RIP Figure 118 RIP Active C Index Network Direction Version None Apply Cancel RPT s 1 192 168 1 1 24 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 RIP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable RIP on the Switch Index This field displays the index number of an IP interface Network This field displays the IP interface configured on the Switch Refer to the section on IP Setup for more information on configuring IP domains Direction Select the RIP direction from the drop down list box Choices are Outgoing Incoming Both and None Version Select the RIP version from the drop down list box Choices are RIP 1 RIP 2B and RIP 2M Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these change
49. SFP fiber port with one port active at a time menang 4 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 Gigabit Ports Connect these Gigabit Ethernet ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches 4 Mini GBIC Ports Use mini GBIC transceivers in these slots for fiber optic connections to backbone Ethernet switches see Section 3 1 3 on page 47 for instructions 3 1 1 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the console cable to the console port of the Switch Connect the female end to a serial port COM1 COM or other COM port of your computer 3 1 2 Gigabit Ethernet Ports The Switch has 10 100 1000 Mbps auto negotiating auto crossover Gigabit Ethernet ports In 10 100 1000 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet the speed can be 10 Mbps 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex for 100 Mbps or full duplex An auto negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed and duplex mode full duplex or half duplex of the connected device An auto crossover auto MDI MDI X port automatically works with a straight through or crossover Ethernet cable 3 1 2 1 Default Ethernet Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the Switch are Speed Auto Dup
50. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 112 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control 36 3 1 SNMP v3 and Security SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management SNMP managers can be required to authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages When the contents of the SNMP messages are encrypted only the intended recipients can read them 36 3 2 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance The Switch supports the following MIBs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 e RFC 1157 SNMP v1 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs e RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1155 SMI RFC 2674 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 1757 RMON SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later v
51. Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines In the example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 Figure 25 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID 1 Click Advanced Applications and VLAN in the navigation panel Then click the VLAN Port Setting link 2 Enter2 in the PVID field for port 1 and click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off i Internet Y GVRP Port isolation Port Ingress Check ED VLAN Port Settna NEN r r 3 n 1 D All r 4 n ho r All 7 E z 1 o All x r 6 rH h r All 7 o r _ r m z r VLAN Status GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 5 1 5 Enabling RIP To exchange routing information with other routing devices across different routing domains enable RIP Routing Information Protocol in the RIP screen 1 Click IP Application gt RIP in the navigation panel 2 Select Both in the Direction field to set the Switch to broadcast and receive routing information 3 Inthe Version field select RIP 1 for the RIP packet format that is universally supported 4 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run t
52. config 4 8 reauth period 1800 port access authenticator GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Interface Commands These are some commonly used configuration commands that belong to the interface group of commands 48 1 Overview The interface commands allow you to configure the Switch on a port by port basis 48 2 Interface Command Examples This section provides examples of some frequently used interface commands 48 2 1 interface port channel Use this command to enable the specified ports for configuration Indicate multiple non sequential ports separated by a comma Use a dash to specify a port range Syntax interface port channel lt port list gt An example is shown next Enter the configuration mode Enable ports 1 3 4 and 5 for configuration Begin configuring for those ports sysname config sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface 48 2 2 bpdu control Syntax bpdu control lt peer tunnel discard network gt GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 48 Interface Commands where lt peer tunnel discard Type peer to process any BPDUs received on these ports network gt Type tunnel to forward BPDUs received on these ports Type discard to drop any BPDUs received on these ports Type network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU An example is shown next Enable ports 1 3 4 and 5 for configurati
53. config Displays MAC authentication settings on a port by port basis with authentication statistics for each port mac count Displays the count of MAC addresses learnt mrstp tree index Displays multiple rapid spanning tree configuration for the specified tree mstp Displays MSTP configuration for the Switch instance 0 16 Displays MSTP instance configuration multicast Displays multicast status including the port number vlan ID and multicast group number of multicast group members on the Switch vlan Displays multicast VLAN status multi login Displays multi login information mvr Displays all MVR settings GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 138 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE lt vlan id gt Displays the specified MVR group settings 3 policy Displays all policy related information name Displays the specified policy related information porbt access authenticator Displays all port authentication settings port list Displays port authentication settings on the specified port s port security Displays all port security settings port list Displays port security settings on the specified port s radius accounting Displays RADIUS accounting server settings radius serv
54. continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE log buffer logs Resets the maximum number of 13 syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog server in one batch to the default value 4 vlan lt vlan Disables ARP inspection on the 13 list gt specified VLAN s vlan lt vlan Disables logging of messages 13 list gt logging generated by ARP inspection for the specified VLAN s bandwidth control Disable bandwidth control on the 13 Switch bcp transparency Disables Bridge Control Protocol 13 Transparency classifier name Disables the classifier Each 13 classifier has one rule If you disable a classifier you cannot use policy rule related information name inactive Enables a classifier 13 cluster Disables cluster management on 13 the Switch member mac Removes the cluster member 13 address dhcp relay Disables DHCP relay 13 information Disables the relay agent 13 information option 82 option System name is not appended to 13 option 82 information field dhcp server vlan Disables DHCP server settings 13 id gt default gateway Disables DHCP server default 13 gateway settings primary dns Disables DHCP primary DNS 13 server settings secondary dns Disables DHCP server 13 secondary DNS settings dhcp smart relay Disables global DHCP relay 13 settings information Disables the relay agent 13 information option 82 for global dhcp setting
55. lt 0 61440 gt hello time lt 1 10 gt maximum age lt 6 40 gt forward delay lt 4 30 gt lt port list gt path cost lt 1 65535 gt lt port list gt priority lt 0 255 gt lt port list gt treeIndex lt 1 4 gt Enables STP on the Switch Enables a specific tree configuration Specifies the bridge priority for the Switch The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The Switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Specifies the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch Specifies the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All Switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network Specifies the maximum time in seconds the Switch
56. that identifies packets by comparing them to two user defined rates the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR CIR and PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client Two Rate Three Color Marker evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green After TRTCM is configured and DiffServ is enabled the following actions are performed on the colored packets Red high loss priority level packets are dropped Yellow medium loss priority level packets are dropped if there is congestion on the network 282 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 32 Differentiated Services Green low loss priority level packets are forwarded TRTCM operates in one of two modes color blind or color aware In color blind mode packets are marked based on evaluating against the PIR and CIR regardless of if they have previously been marked or not In the color aware mode packets are marked based on both existing color and evaluation against the PIR and CIR If the packets do not match any of colors then the packets proceed unchanged 32 2 1
57. www zyxel fr Regular Mail ZyXEL France 1 rue des Vergers Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France Germany Support E mail support zyxel de Sales E mail sales zyxel de Telephone 49 2405 690969 Fax 49 2405 6909 99 Web Site www zyxel de Regular Mail ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 Wuerselen Germany Hungary Support E mail support zyxel hu Sales E mail info zyxel hu Telephone 36 1 3361649 Fax 36 1 3259100 Web Site www zyxel hu Regular Mail ZyXEL Hungary 48 Zoldlomb Str H 1025 Budapest Hungary Kazakhstan Support http zyxel kz support Sales E mail sales zyxel kz GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix E Customer Support Telephone 7 3272 590 698 Fax 7 3272 590 689 Web Site www zyxel kz Regular Mail ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk ave Office 414 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan North America Support E mail support zyxel com Sales E mail sales zyxel com Telephone 1 800 255 4101 1 714 632 0882 Fax 1 714 632 0858 Web Site www us zyxel com FTP Site ftp us zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Inc 1130 N Miller St Anaheim CA 92806 2001 U S A Norway e e e e Support E mail support zyxel no Sales E mail sales zyxel no Telephone 47 22 80 61 80 Fax 47 22 80 61 81 Web Site www zyxel no Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 0667 Oslo Norwa
58. zi Uu Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Port Based VLAN Setup label Description Setting Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure After you make your selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left its outgoing port CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch ca
59. 0 00 07 Untagged 1 2 Tagged 3 8 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 409 Chapter 49 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Multicast VLAN Registration Commands This chapter shows you how to use Multicast VLAN Registration mvr commands 50 1 Overview Use the mvr commands in the configuration mode to create and configure multicast VLANs BS If you want to enable IGMP snooping see Section 47 2 on page 383 50 2 Create Multicast VLAN Use the following commands in the config mvr mode to configure a multicast VLAN group Syntax mvr lt vlan id gt mvr lt vlan id gt source port lt port list gt mvr lt vlan id gt receiver port lt port list gt mvr lt vlan id gt inactive mvr lt vlan id gt mode lt dynamic compatible gt mvr vlan id name lt name str gt mvr vlan id tagged lt port list gt mvr lt vlan id gt group lt name str gt start address ip end address ip mvr vlan id exit where vlan id The VLAN ID I 4094 source port Specifies the MVR source ports which send and receive multicast lt port list gt traffic receiver port Specifies the MVR receiving ports which only receive multicast lt port list gt traffic name lt name str gt A name to identify the multicast VLAN group GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 50 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands mode Specifies dynamic sends IGMP reports to all
60. 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 E Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 iT Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 19 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 zl C Any Clear Counter C Pot Copyright 1995 2008 by ZyXEL Communications Corp A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window B C D E These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in B Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory is the configuration of your Switch that stays the same even if the Switch s power is turned off GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator C Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch D Click this link to logout of the web configurator E Click this link to display web help pages The help pages pro
61. 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All Switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the por
62. 115 AAA Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION authentication authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password AuthenticationFailureEventOn GS 4012F This trap is sent when 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 1 authentication fails due to incorrect GS 4024 user name and or password 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 1 RADIUSNotReachableEvent GS 4012F This trap is sent when there is no On 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 1 response message from the GS 4024 RADIUS server 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 1 RADIUSNotReachableEvent GS 4012F This trap is sent when the RADIUS Clear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 2 server can be reached GS 4024 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 2 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Table 115 AAA Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION accounting RADIUSAccountingNotReach ableEventOn GS 4012F GS 4024 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 1 This trap is sent when there is no response message from the RADIUS accounting server RADIUSAccountingNotReach ableEventClear GS 4012F GS 4024 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 2 accounting server can be reached Table 116 SNMP IP Traps
63. 120 on page 231 you can assign a priority of 0 to routers B and C thereby ensuring they do not become DR or BDR and assign a priority of 1 to router A to make sure that it does become the DR 28 1 5 Configuring OSPF To configure OSPF on the Switch do the following tasks 1 Enable OSPF 2 Create OSPF areas 3 Create and associate interface s to an area 4 Create virtual links to maintain backbone connectivity 28 2 OSPF Status Use this screen to view current OSPF status Click IP Application OSPF in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next See Section 28 1 on page 229 for more information on OSPF GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 231 Chapter 28 OSPF Figure 121 OSPF Status Interface OSPF Status Configuration Router ID 192 168 Transmit Delay is J Neighbor Neighbor ID Pri 192 168 1 1 l 4 Link State Database Rou Link ID ADV WLINKO is down line protocol is down OSPF is enabled but not running on this interface swifZ is up line protocol is up Internet Address 192 168 1 10 24 Area 192 168 1 1 OSPF Router with ID 192 168 1 10 Poll Interval s ao Set Interval Stop IB l l0 Network Type BROADCAST Cost 15 l sec State Backup Priority 1l x State Dead Time Address Interface Full DR 00 00 34 192 168 1 1 swif2 192 168 ter Link States Area 0 0 0 0 Router Age Seq CkSum Link count The following table describes the labels in th
64. 24 video services Lastly you configure VLAN with priority 3 and VID of 300 for traffic received from IP subnet 10 1 1 0 24 data services All untagged incoming frames will be classified based on their source IP subnet and prioritized accordingly That is video services receive the highest priority and data the lowest Figure 39 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example Tagged Frames Internet gt Untagged Frames v m SEEN i 10 1 1 0 24 VID 300 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 8 7 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN Click Subnet Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown LES Subnet based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Figure 40 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN OESUnDGEEHTAUES NEN Vlan Port Setting Active C DHCP Vlan Override Apply Active r1 Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Add Cancel Index Active Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this subnet based VLANs on the Switch DHCP Vlan When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP clients can renew their IP address through Override the DHC
65. 7 switch changes 0 2 GS 4024 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 107 7 0 2 mactable MacTableFullEventOn GS 4012F This trap is sent when more than 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 1 99 of the MAC table is used GS 4024 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 1 MacTableFullEventClear GS 4012F This trap is sent when less than 95 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 2 of the MAC table is used GS 4024 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 2 rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 This trap is sent when a variable goes over the RMON rising threshold RmonFallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 This trap is sent when the variable falls below the RMON falling threshold 36 3 4 Configuring SNMP From the Access Control screen display the SNMP screen You can click Access Control to go back to the Access Control screen Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Figure 175 Access Control SNMP i am Access Control Trap Group General Setting Version vec m Get Community public Set Community public Trap Community public Trap Destination Version IP Port Username vac 0 0 0 0 162 vac 0 0 0 0 162 v2c 0 0 0 0 162 vec 0 0 0 0 162 User Information Index Username Security Level Authentication Privacy 1 admin noauth MD5 gt DES Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 118 Access Control S
66. 9 Contents Overview lr c e 249 PUTT TS aNd Us en NN 251 Del 259 ball aem 267 Management CLI Troubleshooting 5 5 neon itu tna tank Vana tan tuR S En e DRR RR lau uu Bo aa ERR M x X an pna Kk 277 CIIM E 279 Peas CONE Mr EM 285 Boer p uS 303 DS E OEE at et n connu Co uU Ts lc eden M En NUR tla D ed ca p anions 305 eM W 309 MAE TADS M 215 zia om e fer erttren rte rt ener emer rrr ere err swore 317 ARF TODE ucan videii iiinn nii n 319 POUE ODID si IQ I NI enn grrr 321 SEER du rc 323 roc uoma COMMAS T 325 User and Enable Mode Commands L1 sa reas cea coat deat ehh dn Ihr deca cxtnqaaudiscasaauasacnsnadida ERa 377 Contiguration Mode Commands m 383 iets ONIN NES ml eens nal aioli aan 395 IEEE 902 10 Teagasd VLAN COmemedst 1oasacuccpetutse tete vem apte eet tte v nci co b atiis po asd bean 403 Multicast VLAN Registration COPDITIBIKIS 1 121 5 ca toi cence tomas cnterseescents onseacuns deren bkbpI decades cauereeneg 411 Routing Domain Command Examples aa cca cca tk ce aad ccna anren binc de pa qa tna dd 413 TREN eS SUNN udi i qd EE RAI E EI abe b ipm vid aO M Ard MM eee 415 Appendices and OX ios xiii ck E EUR vEXE CE QURE ORA eR SRkKRE FER daa EA a T hiaai 423 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table of C
67. AC 1 5A power outlet Make sure that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans The GS 4012F DC unit requires DC power supply input of 48V DC to 60V DC 1 6A Max no tolerance and the GS 4012F DC unit requires DC power supply input of 48V DC to 60V DC 2 2A Max no tolerance To connect the power to the DC units insert one end of the supplied power cord to the power receptacle on the rear panel and the other end to a power outlet Make sure that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans 3 2 2 External Backup Power Supply Connector The backup power supply constantly monitors the status of the internal power supply The backup power supply automatically provides power to the Switch in the event of a power failure Once the Switch receives power from the backup power supply it will not automatically switch back to using the internal power supply even when the power is resumed GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 3 LEDs The following table describes the LEDs Table 2 LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION BPS Green Blinking The system is receiving power from the backup power supply On The backup power supply is connected and active Off The backup power supply is not ready or not active PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green Blinking The system is rebo
68. Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol sss 115 Figure 51 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration sese 115 Figure 52 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP esee 116 Figure 53 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeaeees 118 Figure 54 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP essen 119 Figure 55 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP 121 Figure 56 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP sss 122 Figure 57 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP ueueussss 125 Figure 58 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control uus hoe o o Xo rr are Eb ea oia oda 128 Figure 59 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control 129 Figure 60 Advanced Application gt MIITOD iicet eorr tti rper tta epe orta un peo pt Idae Ee prre dene ao bU 2 Zune iiaeia 131 Figure 61 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status sss 134 Figure 62 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting 195 Figure 63 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP 137 Figure 64 Trunking
69. Application and VLAN in the navigation panel and click the Static VLAN link Pa van status VLAN Port Setting Eie va The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID Elapsed Time Status T 1 1 00 31 Static Change Pages Previous Next 2 Inthe Static VLAN screen select er sauren VLAN Status ACTIVE enter a descriptive ACTIVE A name in the Name field and enter Hane Example s VLAN Group ID 2 2 in the VLAN Group ID field for the VLAN2 network E pum T TxTagging 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging B Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 7 Normal C Fixed Forbidden TI i PEL M TxTagging m i GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example BS The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen refer to the same VLAN ID 3 Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 1 on the Switch select Fixed to configure port 1 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only 4 To ensure that VLAN unaware devices such as computers and hubs can receive frames properly clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 5 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off 5 1 4 Setting Port VID
70. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 36 3 6 Setting Up Login Accounts Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the Switch via web configurator at any one time An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administrator password is 1234 It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password 1234 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control A non administrator username is something other than admin is someone who can view but not configure Switch settings Click Access Control from the navigation panel and then click Logins from this screen Figure 177 Access Control Logins Logins g Access Control Administrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm NEM eee eee Rd eee rs rr S AU rs EEMEMEMJEkhtw ee 6 en UN HIMEN Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 120 Access Control Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You cannot change the default administrator user name Only the administrator has read
71. Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE lt SPTPID gt Sets the SP TPID Service 13 Provider Tag Protocol Identifier vlan type lt 802 1q port Specifies the VLAN type 13 based gt 45 12 4 interface port channel Commands Table 140 interface port channel Commands The following table lists the interface port channel commands in configuration mode Use these commands to configure the ports COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE interface port channel lt port list gt Enables a port or a list of ports for configuration 13 arp inspection trust Sets the port to be a trusted port for arp inspection The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason 13 limit rate lt pps gt Specifies the maximum rate 1 2048 packets per second at which the Switch receives ARP packets from each port The Switch discards any additional ARP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit 13 limit rate lt pps gt burst interval lt seconds gt Specifies the length 1 15 seconds of the burst interval The burst interval is the length of time over which the rate of ARP packets is monitored for each port 13 bandwidth limit Enables ingress pir cir and egress limits on the port s 13 cir Enables the guaranteed bandwidth limits for incoming traffic on the port s 13 cir Kbps Sets the guaranteed b
72. Digi a iMT 280 254 ROBO OYSIDI citet prt e eee aed alae ao ES EA RR RR S RR ad 281 30 9 Fwar Upgrade te T 281 gob Restore a Configuration FIG isseecccsesscesccttss tectis ese satet ness basti Mese Lebe anae 282 eS Backup a Coniguralion FE accsuabeco e am rei on ege e a e ERU e ER ta tia 282 31e FTP Command LNG 2 ismibisss berto pu Prou rie um Nr RENI asa Ded M denied ind 283 33 8 1 Filename CoODVODtlollS Suiriri n tidie airite REEL Cor ove Vea LES MIU E Kus 283 35 8 2 FIP Command Line Procedure esa cm prr E Ferris eoa aa aaia EE Ron EE REA 283 2959 2 DII Dased FTE BIS asi teca ibvtebo esc tu loducki AN 284 ERO FTP ROSMCIONS Wet M 284 Chapter 36 PC CSSS esl le ANM TES 285 SE PAECESS eni Et v Aat ES 285 20 2 The Access Control Main SCREEN iacet ec crac sects abibke Ft ate te exer Reda Ee eps etki a apr Uie ahari 285 OS GI ec n T HU NUN 286 DOs MA yo ad SECUN pM e 287 25 53 PORGE MIBE uocem ote p Rt p E eR odd ioa AT 287 a SNMP TEDS apne emer ne teem meres en meron a cto nr tcu Gen s Ead onem 287 36 3 4 BaneplsthisEci e 291 36 3 9 Configuring SNMP Trap GROUP aiiescesixYenct GO bt BO RH RE SM RERO ER LER Rex dd 293 36 3 0 Senn DBLOONZADGOHUS quicaentsntven epe tetuodekibirierpe Eprr ta e belt PE E DR QM RRBUE 294 xia cvalb i1 s t M 296 20a PON cim ptt TTE DO SU E 296 36 6 SSH Implementation on Ute DWIICIY 4t ope a ea HEn RR M RRUA ERSMER
73. Example Physical Connections 0 cccccccceeeeeeeeee eee eeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeneeeeeee 138 Figure 65 Trunking Example Configuration Sereen iuiiauiiice orte eorr intr rtt pret ttn ke rrt t perra taa ped 139 Figure 69 IEEE BUZ Tx Authentication ProCoSS isssssssette xpo ttt E OREL EHI CA EXER E GS teni 142 Figure 67 MAC Aulheniication PEROQIBS sriscnenonssienmi kin inn EOD QM ME bPM ede c p I Ec EUH aes 142 Figure 68 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication sssssssssssseeene nenne 143 Figure 69 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x sssssssssssssseeeeee 143 Figure 70 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication sssssssss 145 Figure 71 Advanced Application gt Port SSgourlly scccsissscssserssssscncerss pnta ed x3 bove th X R9 p a 33b eH dd he ax ue 148 Figure 72 Advanced Application Classifier uius ieecee dk berto ERES E FH eH LEE nia eua REB PME E eo q a DYR E LEER CE VA E tones 152 Figure 73 Advanced Application gt Classifier Summary Table seen 154 zc X Ee cess e Pm 156 Figure 75 Advanced Application gt Policy RUIG v1 ccruppes esse EEPEIYRAREEPPIYR ee bRE PPP Ye EXE PA T ckPE Ex Led ee HE DH YN n aEE PES 158 Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Summary Table sse 160 Rowe T rrr Fie ip eR T 161 Foie 7o Omne MENOT ee rcr na daciamtinaitateumn aauieraiesiceiatenea aeimaa
74. ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Configuration Name This field displays the configuration name for this MST region Revision Number This field displays the revision number for this MST region Configuration A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN MSTI mapping information Digest This field displays the 16 octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU This field displays the digest when MSTP is activated on th
75. IGMP Filtering Active 0 Unknown Multicast Frame Flooding C Drop Reserved Multicast Group Flooding C Drop Port immed Leave Group Limited Max Group Num IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Querier Mode O D Default Auto 1 Dr fo Default Auto j 3 O O NN Default Auto j 3 O 0 NN Default j Auto gt 4 O O o Default Auto j 5 O 0 fo Default Auto j 6 O O o Default Auto j 7 O O fo Default gt Auto j 8 O El bo Default gt Auto j IAS AT IN RIA S NS NII EOI DFO DS B n E RECIPI im OE Ig OP QA QE Rp Bg RG Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP Snooping Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Host Timeout Specify the time from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds that elapses before the Switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port Leave Timeout Enter an IGMP leave timeout value from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received from a host 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 to which the Swi
76. Ine fao osiseciceniesi decori ee teen ka ke hec aa dr ht kk a a d d 236 20 0 OSPF Vihual Lnks uouonivebe nio e EMO DURER EHRUPE PARAR RUE 238 Chapter 29 rl e M r 241 COMNIS o 241 z0 1 1 How IOMP Works uisi PRESE M UI pED EFI INS ERE PEUH TREE RMET ERN aEE Kos eR MEE FE TE QAEK kPa Eq n RANA 242 202 Part haspd MAP ss snkriec emisdgcie rcu oui aaa dta o pO EDO obo DU ob DE FU LL cob EDI P rio t Ros c adn 243 pereant rcm 243 Chapter 30 kp ine HMM 245 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table of Contents w T ERP CWO C 245 SUNL COE ing Nor 245 30 2 1 DY MRP Ine 246 2 2 Conngundd ECT sni ARR P UE EO POE nua t ale RR RR EUR RR 246 30 3 1 DV MRP Configuration Error Wessages iussenetkmdscsnFEpMa eR Erde kn CE adea reo Yea paran 247 30 4 Default DVYMRP Timer Values A 248 Chapter 31 IP Multicast 249 21 1 IP Multicast CV SPIE ico as cuba cde pad edax anisi aaia Feld apa reales Ping EEEa ia Ea 249 cx dentis MUCAS m 249 Chapter 32 Differentiated Services m 251 ue TEM CTE DVOREME 2 5 o atit lis aa tapa b defit ba cobi d Vip pu esa dad Venda 251 32 1 1 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior iuuntsbesevu ub ebat a
77. Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to frame outgoing port GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 315 Chapter 40 MAC Table 40 2 Viewing the MAC Table Click Management MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 196 MAC Table Sort by Index 1 z 3 4 5 Mac Table MAC VID Port MAC Address VID Port Type 00 85 30 01 01 00 1 8 dynamic 00 85 30 01 01 04 1 8 dynamic 00 a0 c5 00 00 01 1 2 dynamic 00 a0 c5 fe ea 71 1 CPU static 00 a0 c5 fe ea 71 2 CPU static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 131 MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Sort by Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type The information is then displayed in the summary table below MAC Click this button to display and arrange the data according to MAC address VID Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number Index This is the incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs Port This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually
78. LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Rate Active Select this check box to activate commit rate limits on this port Commit Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the Rate incoming traffic flow on a port The commit rate should be less than the peak rate The sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth Active Select this check box to activate peak rate limits on this port Peak Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming Rate traffic flow on a port Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the out going traffic flow on a port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configurin
79. Loop Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch The Switch generates syslog internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts down a port via the loop guard feature Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 221 Chapter 25 Loop Guard Table 80 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port The Switch sends probe packets from this port to check if the switch it is connected to is in loop state If the switch that this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide PART IV IP Application Static Route 225 RIP 227 OSPF 229 I
80. Overview Table 2 LEDs continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION ACT Green Blinking The port is sending or receiving data Off The port is not sending or receiving data or there is no connection Gigabit Ethernet Ports Part of Dual Personality Interface 1000 Green Blinking The port is sending receiving data On The link to a 10 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to a 10 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is down 100 Amber Blinking The port is sending receiving data On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is down GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 52 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide PART II Basic Configuration The Web Configurator 55 Initial Setup Example 65 System Status and Port Statistics 71 Basic Setting 77 The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator 4 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows
81. Password 1 1 dan eren eta dic bid ad ER Vid addi tha dad pisa add dodi ida tdi n 327 45 6 Crone a Now IF Marate er nunana Naa 327 Aa Peg LOVEE 328 29 8 Command ROGER aussen HESREEN CH E ER EPA EAA E EA DA EXE AAAA EATE DEEA AEGA E EAA 328 45 9 Gotting Help m 329 259 7 List oT Avaitiblo Commands iio oz eens boo d pr oa ven EE ERE Fl to obla Di d tii duee 330 25 Usno Command HISI S rodea FREE daREE GR REI ERPE SERRE CUPEoDe E EHI REF Crk ole pp ve Een Leteen bibo 331 25 11 Saving Your COMIGUIAUION ciiecascccssiesauccesssacastennsas iduscnsts Mare anea n aa E 331 49 111 Switch Coniguration FIE eT 332 25 11 2 Lago DUE oara eae Re pa cH rd 332 Aa Pap DIESE I S reer restr ULL SL Peete tree rer 332 PA T User I cootra eite bu Ead ee tbv vende ao 333 ABAD 2 Enade MOIE e 334 45 12 2 General Configuration MOOB ssiri na A 343 45 12 4 interface port channel Commands sscisscscscsssnosccccessenssavcceasrsscaaesaneoscsaasseeossesenniineece 368 45 12 5 interface route domain Commands eiiis eese adt tha adt nii 373 45 126 COMMA Commande 2 conan epi Re repa hdodddek E bna Ead Ra id dk Rad d d 375 LOMA QUT IUS ETE o EIER 376 Chapter 46 User and Enable Mode Commands eeeeeeeeeeeeee sees eee eene nennen nnne ntnnnanu 377 LowEe 10 s CP 377 HO 2 wow COMMANA occi odi t
82. Policy Rule Summary Table Index Active 1 Yes Name Delete Test Classifier s Example rH Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the policy index number Click an index number to edit the policy Active This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the name you have assigned to this policy Classifier s This field displays the name s of the classifier to which this policy applies Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule 19 4 Policy Example The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth and discard out of profile traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier refer to Section 18 4 on page 155 Figure 77 Policy Example Policy A Te st Example Name Jlassifier s Metering VLAN ID Bandwidth 1000 Kbps Egress Port fi Outof Profile 3 DSCP Parameters Outgoing packet format for Egress port Priority DA DSCP TOS pa Forwarding No change C Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame
83. Port Configure auunstexsdexuccuse eid dea ra HEdER pub adeunt Rr ek ets E EEEN ENNEN E Fa 210 Table 73 DHCP Snooping VLAN COnfIgUlB ii ueccieisso ct eria d euet redet p putt ta dde bra rh datu enV a tabe dR peau Erg ai 211 Table 7 ARP Inspection SaS 5 eit LB aeo pte io REP biete aiii ns ages Bute eee 212 Table 75 ARP Inspection VLAN SWS 32 iceturepr Ip PER t RE REN PERI R DRE S EE EHE E FERE PES YN GEPE ERE pauses 213 Table 76 ARP Inspection Log SIOS auiecciessecie tusescsetetaseuec eet doses etta tust ett obe en bla fada cue sudescesmisdervunene 214 Table 77 ARP Inspection Conigur act cciearicisa cecieatacedbasiphactda iipan E BRA E ER NEENA ERR IRE Ead t 215 Table SARF Inspection Pon Comoe xtsuiiedasksisteebpivI exrbPNUE OR PURIS Dee BRE DXQe KE FRPU RR E BRE RII OE EBEN Nd a D NR 217 Table 79 ARF Inspection VLAN Comiguis usexeaesierezuatiai dde ed o de EEA 218 Table 80 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard sse nemen emen nnns 221 Table 31 Static ROUINO E 225 32 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide List of Tables TOES RIF a X MY 228 ji Pe Wl e P 229 Table 34 OSPF Router A ridd aain ni a A RDE aa 229 THEOS CSF SRU me Ea A A A i a lll ica 232 Table 86 OSPF Status Common Output Fields easissonsnseiiai aa a iaa RA 232 Table 87 OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings ssssseee 234 Table 88 OSPF Configuration Area Setup
84. Route Active Type Metric value RIP Vv 1B 15 Static Vv 1E 15 Apply Cancel 2 Name Area ID nono Authentication None Stub Network T No Summary O Default route cost 15 Add Cancel Clear Index Name Area ID Authentication Stub Network Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 88 OSPF Configuration Area Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Area ID Enter a 32 bit ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation that uniquely identifies an area A value of 0 0 0 0 indicates that this is a backbone also known as Area 0 You can create only one backbone area on the Switch Authentication Select an authentication method Simple or MD5 to activate authentication Select None default to disable authentication Usually interface s and virtual interface s should use the same authentication method as the associated area If interface s and virtual interface s use different authentication methods than the associated area the authentication methods are based on the interface s and virtual interface s settings GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 235 Chapter 28 OSPF Table 88 OSPF Configuration Area Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Stub Network Select this option to set the area
85. Router Network ee 272 Figure 158 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch A sss 273 Figure 159 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch B sss 273 Figure 160 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Status on Switch A ise ee tree rona ebd e dene ieee ee 273 Figure 161 VRRP Example T VRRP Status on Switeh B uec ni Erba a EROH ER REP XR ek EE EH ninas 274 Figure 162 VRRP Configuration Example Two Virtual Router Network sseee 274 Figure 163 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch A ssuuusss 274 Figure 164 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch B ssussss 2795 Figure 165 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switeh A uiuis esee ides icxe breath od er eid e dene iones 275 Figure 166 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switch B sssssssssse enne 275 Figure 167 cn c 279 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide List of Figures Figure ToS Load Factory Detail SSIBIT 2 xia Ga peni aaa qo oco a ad t SN Kn ES t adde 280 Figura 169 Reboot System COMMMIAUON sacicccssstcadacvss seranenessseansoeussetendectsstnndeeisstanendeeasenmideanssemedeuts sean 281 Figure 170 Firmware Upgrade e 281 Fowe T171 Rebre Coniguralon siaa enter rere pec trre erect Ter errr rrr ree TTT rere ttre 282 Figure 172 Backup CODI aub abntsntebofventtac uncis iuu tee vm tor rt
86. This field shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution 64 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length 128 255 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length 256 511 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Table 7 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 512 1023 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length 1024 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 1518 between 1024 and 1518 octets in length Giant This field shows the number of packets dropped because they were bigger than the maximum frame size GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics GS 4
87. This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_TUNNEL User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol GRE enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix C Common Services Table 162 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The R
88. Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 25 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All Switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Setting
89. Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it Select the Rebooting checkbox if you want to reboot the Switch and apply the new firmware immediately Firmware upgrades are only applied after a reboot Click Upgrade to load the new firmware After the firmware upgrade process is complete see the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 35 Maintenance 35 6 Restore a Configuration File Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch using the Restore Configuration screen Figure 171 Restore Configuration Restore Configuration g Maintenance To restore the device s configuration form a file browse to the location of the configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to display the Choose File screen below from which you can locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on the Switch so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen 35 7 Backup a Configuration File Backing up your Switch configurations allows you to create various snap shots of you
90. XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default 4 2 System Login 1 Start your web browser 2 Type http and the IP address of the Switch for example the default is 192 168 1 1 in the Location or Address field Press ENTER 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 55 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Figure 18 Web Configurator Login Enter Network Password 2 x qe Please type your user name and password Site 192 168 0 10 Realm GS 4024 at Thu Jan 1 00 58 34 1970 User Name Password Save this password in your password list Cancel 4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen 4 3 The Status Screen The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen Figure 19 Web Configurator Home Screen Status DELG Status a ATT Help GOLIENED B E Pot Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Er Tx KB KB s ime 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Fi Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
91. a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 6 Static Trunking Example This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2 5 1 Make your physical connections make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group are connected to the same destination The following figure shows ports 2 5 on switch A connected to switch B Figure 64 Trunking Example Physical Connections 2 Configure static trunking Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting In this screen activate trunking group T1 and select the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the figure below Click Apply when you are done GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Figure 65 Trunking Example Configuration Screen Link Aggregation Settin Status LACP T3 T4 T5 T6 0 0 0 0 Port Group Apply Cancel Your trunk group 1 T1 configuration is now complete
92. a i e Ru ER a i xd 213 Figure 108 size cecidere 214 Figure TOS ARF Inspecuaim COMMONS a2 sceexia sonet ee RR LER RRRCHE BM UE R ERRK ES SVERRHE LEE EU RNC FE ERU LE dd 215 Figure THAR Inspeccion Port Configure Moe REM 216 Figure 171 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure 2254 ccce tauc reet bm uae srianan iana e ea emus AA kiii 217 Figure T12 Loop Guard vs STP xi an PTT 219 si T oich M Mec Eoi erc 220 Figure 174 Loop Guard Probe Packat ssscccsterssacecsesl ssanecassrsannsavsinasanntaerveasmergaaneaanederanuannasegrnummsaearielee 220 Figure 119 Loop Guard Network LOODE x cccccsancssueceutssntssautes eina FER RN aaa EA DANERA EEEa DANA E AATA teas 220 Figure 116 Advanced Application Loop Guard cciccdicecsccisiies sevdacseceoniacedoriansneliuteemeccaeceaunisiuavieseabuoceants 221 zc EE dl cem 225 Foue TO RIP et 228 Figure 119 OSPF Network Example A 230 Figure 120 OSPF Router Election Example eicccsssussinesscsnaiaadarsdnnnacanscunikaassduinaaduadanuiudans Ri ra i dnce 231 Pe RETO PF 3 aa mr 232 Figure 122 OSPF Configuration Aroa SSW uiioeexiedteniixedevedxecndslecden dps ena do n aad ee 235 Figure 123 OSPF Configuration Summary Table een nnn th anna nna nna nnn 236 Figure 124 OSPF Mlenat e 237 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide List of Figures Figure T25 SFI VIBUBI LIBE ntis o Rak RED ERN Rb RO SN E ES ra LSU Hart pO 238 a Ue OIF BEE t C se
93. a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the Switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the Switch an entry is created in the forwarding table on the Switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the Switch to leave the multicast group The Switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case a DSL port on the Switch If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic Otherwise the Switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table Figure 86 MVR Multicast Television Example s 22 General MVR Configuration Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR link to display the screen
94. and leave all timers An example is shown next sysname show garp GARP Timer Join Timer 200 Leave Timer 600 Leave All Timer sysname 10000 49 2 2 GARP Timer Syntax garp join lt msec gt leave lt msec gt leaveall lt msec gt where join lt msec gt leave lt msec gt leaveall lt msec gt This sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 32767 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds This sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds This sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer the default is 10000 milliseconds This command sets the Switch s GARP timer settings including the join leave and leave all timers Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 49 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands The following example sets the Jo
95. application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP IP based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 SNMP version 2c or SNMP version 3 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 174 SNMP Management Model Manager rll te Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed switch the Switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a switch Examples of variables include number of packets received node port status and so on A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model
96. as shown next You can create up to three multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast BS Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen Figure 87 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR OL sD Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active O Name Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority o Mode Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging None j E 1 e O 2 C e e O 3 e e Dr 4 O G r 5 o e C 6 o E 7 e 7 8 e e O EAE A E I I NI NE IO SIS SIE Add Cancel VLAN Active Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 57 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Multicast VLAN Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 with which the Switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets belonging to this multicast VLAN Mo
97. bep ente ax EH bv iu t bna ea ED ea a PAIN 251 22 1 2 Diffasern Nalwork EXSBIS siaina FREI RP ELE Ee REFER Rr d EAS petiti bend 252 32 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing eese enar 252 32451 TRTUM Cotor blind MOUE 2 2 rior pinarnah iiaia 253 A2 TIRICM Lolgcswee MOD uei hebt on oat do s ma td on d etica dd Rd eu dida 253 OTC AMMEN MIRON acccevdasupice scons TR 254 32 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings ccccccecccccseseccceeeeeseeceeeeneeeceeenneea 254 22 4 DSCP t0 JEEE BUS Tp Priority Settings asssuisaaeccxcsu nale itat ah xtd a Etha Rua hna 256 205 1 Conngamag DSCP SOLD aepusdneciarite tiat veda pci MEE PT NUM ERU VN EP UTR Fr P teat 256 Chapter 33 pj e e 259 eo DIG 8 Me 259 xw MDAC c ee sada scad oh acts ta tangs Sb pba toads RA 259 9o 1 2 DHCP Configuration OPUS ccnccsssciscieciesseiqaisedsecgees soiin a des teo a dad poda 259 vod DHUP TIE ostio eer Mery a N Ou aule oo eti ORT cbe 260 vus DACP Savar Sus DE 1ussutmbspittided iniit Ep antennae naan anaes 260 met CE FARIA A 261 244 1 DHCP Relay Agent IGfortniBlQfE 11e cover iccirco kc nci c 261 2941 2 Connguring DHCP Global Relay iiic orrr tt pott ttr ertt isinne 262 33 4 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example eese 263 225 Configuring DHCP YLAN SOIN auiem xen eterbola ee tete qn cep buliua eee kela ed eem ec adn tua 26
98. cderteane tmu ae teure tnu Erbe duy Epp taa UE 216 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table of Contents 24 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN CODE ds sisscccansiineneradevysnsaterssansaasianuntaadeniananadernduacaneriaade 217 Chapter 25 EDOD LEN e ooi T E AN NEA E E ENT 219 225 1 Loop Guard COIN onasini ec Po pit aE E ER 219 25 2 Loop Guard SEUD MT 221 Part IV IP sie iy Pet 223 Chapter 26 Stoe PRIS c M 225 20 1 Gontiquimidg Sie BOOUURET 122a oe o RO opc DR Rn be a re Pee bu a OR d 225 Chapter 27 RIP sarrin Hn 227 Fo Oe RIP Beato ascetur adc tob imuddasi dte E eb MuM UII d 227 Mage Desa t mlt en pe Perr min o EA ORTU 227 Chapter 28 wild ee 229 WESCE 0 TS oot 229 28 1 1 OSPF Autonomous Systems and AFeGas ioseccusseesisusc edad baci deed d deci sari d diy Rida 229 ZB TE A VUDIEE qascendatan i eni a endelen e ied siu etna ames 230 29 1 3 Interfaces and Virtual Linke uester ett ERE aen E HERI PS REED IER EERHF I n SE ERU E ERSEEEBE IS A ERU UH 230 26 14 OSPF and Router Elections 1e erronee EUH o ve eaaa AAA a 230 VoM pi 81 Rer 231 PUSS lio jp C EE 231 2a COME ONERE Lusxcsetivecdtexaluptonendiaincmaktetedie eod otto e KR meee 233 283 Congue OSPF TUS aiiattsndiadibudedibtu em vn aati bate betae ed dub 235 28 4 1 View OSPF Area Intormation Table 2er ratore etra oa Re eee r e PEU F E cea n tvb aqua Ruuice 236 zu5Conligunng OSPF
99. co 436 Tati 1593 30D E E E etia Crs bae HORIS IAEN EA CEP RENE eU REEMIQX ID EO NATO FEM A NONE 436 Table 159 Eight SUbDNGIS de M 436 Table 160 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning ccccsccccssessssseceesssenneceneesenseceeeessanseceeenenees 437 Table 161 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning esssseeessssessesssreeerinensseernsneesnnansantrranaarsanenasensnnneens 437 Table 152 Commonly Used DSOIVIDOS sseircosinuersiiosiece ione Anadan E ehi NEIN hN CE SURE HUE EEE SNEEN 441 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide PART I Introduction and Hardware Getting to Know Your Switch 37 Hardware Installation and Connection 41 Hardware Overview 45 Getting to Know Your Switch This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Switch 1 1 Introduction Your Switch is a stand alone layer 3 Gigabit Ethernet switch By integrating router functions the Switch performs wire speed layer 3 routing in addition to layer 2 switching The GS 4024 is a stand alone layer 3 Ethernet switch with 20 Gigabit Ethernet ports and 4 GbE dual personality interfaces for uplink A dual personality interface includes one Gigabit port and one slot for mini GBIC transceiver SFP module with one port active at a time The GS 4012F comes with with 8 min GBIC slots and 4 GbE dual personality interfaces for uplink There are two GS 4012F models The GS 4012F DC model require
100. configuring this screen afresh 7 4 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain BS VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic See Chapter 8 on page 91 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs 7 5 Switch Setup Screen Click Basic Setting and then Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen Refer to the chapter on VLAN GS 4012F 4
101. connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect it to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution Ifthe power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device The length of exposed bare power wire should not exceed 7mm This product is recyclable Dispose of it properly GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Safety Warnings GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Safety Warnings GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Introduction and Hardware 22e asci ccr aa dar aa 35 Getma LOOM ror cc M 37 Hardware Installati n and Connection uui sscasetessedasavaue nend EX GERE
102. eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels On the Switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory whe
103. entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide IP Table This chapter introduces the IP table 41 1 IP Table Overview The IP Table screen shows how packets are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports It shows what device IP address belonging to what VLAN group if any is forwarded to which port s and whether the IP address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static belonging to the Switch The Switch uses the IP table to determine how to forward packets See the following figure 1 The Switch examines a received packet and learns the port on which this source IP address came 2 The Switch checks to see if the packet s destination IP address matches a source IP address already learned in the IP table Ifthe Switch has already learned the port for this IP address then it forwards the packet to that port Ifthe Switch has not already learned the port for this IP address then the packet is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion Ifthe Switch has already learned the port for this IP address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the packet Figure 197 IP Table Flowchart Is destination IP address in the IP Table Yes Forward to all ports Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to packet outgoing port GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 317
104. figure shows the network example using MSTP 112 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 47 MSTP Network Example 11 1 5 2 MST Region An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to the rest of the network Each MSTP enabled device can only belong to one MST region When BPDUs enter an MST region external path cost of paths outside this region is increased by one Internal path cost of paths within this region is increased by one when BPDUs traverse the region Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration identification settings These include the following parameters Name of the MST region Revision level as the unique number for the MST region VLAN to MST Instance mapping 11 1 5 3 MST Instance An MST Instance MSTI is a spanning tree instance VLANs can be configured to run on a specific MSTI Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number known as an MST ID known internally to a region Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions Regions 1 and 2 have 2 spanning tree instances GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 113 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 48 MSTIs in Different Regions Physical Connection 11 1 5 4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST A CIST represents the connect
105. from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 314 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide MAC Table This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen 40 1 MAC Table Overview The MAC Table screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports It shows what device MAC address belonging to what VLAN group if any is forwarded to which port s and whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen The Switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure 1 The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came 2 The Switch checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port If the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame e Figure 195 MAC Table Flowchart Is destination MAC address in the MAC Table Forward to all ports
106. groups beyond the local Switch help Displays a description of the 13 interface port channel commands igmp filtering profile lt name gt Applies the specified IGMP 13 filtering profile igmp group Enables the IGMP group limiting 13 limited feature number lt number gt Sets the maximum number IGMP 13 groups allowed igmp immediate Enables the IGMP immediate 13 leave leave function igmp querier mode Sets the IGMP query mode for the 13 auto fixed edge port inactive Disables the specified port s on 13 the Switch ingress check Enables the device to discard 13 incoming frames for VLANs that are not included in a port member set intrusion lock Enables intrusion lock on the 13 port s and a port cannot be connected again after you disconnected the cable ipmc egress Enables the port s to remove 13 untag vlan vlan specified VLAN tag from IP id multicasting packets before forwarding loopguard Enables the loopguard feature on 13 the port s mac Enables MAC authentication viaa 13 authentication RADIUS server on the port s mirror Enables port mirroring in the 13 interface dir ingress Enables port mirroring for 13 egress both incoming outgoing or both incoming and outgoing traffic Port mirroring copies traffic from one or all ports to another or all ports for external analysis multicast limit Enables the port s multicast limit 13 lt pkt s gt Sets how many multicast packets 13 the po
107. gt command to configure or create a VLAN on the Switch The Switch automatically enters the config vlan mode Use the inactive command to deactivate the VLAN s Use the interface port channel lt port list gt command to enter the config interface mode to set the VLAN settings on a port then use the pvid lt vlan id gt command to set the VLAN ID you created for the port list to that specific port in the PVID table Use the exit command when you are finished configuring the VLAN sysname config vlan 2000 sysname config vlan f name upl sysname config vlan fixed 5 8 sysname config vlan no untagged 5 8 sysname config vlan exit sysname config interface port channel 5 8 sysname config interface pvid 2000 sysname config interface exit 2 Configure your management VLAN Use the vlan lt vlan id gt command to create a VLAN VID 3 in this example for managing the Switch and the Switch will activate the new management VLAN Use the inactive command to disable the new management VLAN sysname config vlan 3 sysname config vlan inactive GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 49 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 49 2 Global VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands This section shows you how to configure and monitor the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN 49 2 1 GARP Status Syntax show garp This command shows the Switch s GARP timer settings including the join leave
108. if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the Switch still works Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this 7 3 General Setup Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time Click Basic Setting gt General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 29 Basic Setting gt General Setup DIECAN System Name Location Contact Person s Name Use Time Server when Bootup None Time Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Time foo 56 23 UTC New Time hh mm ss oo 6 p3 Current Date 1970 or 0 New Date yyyy mm dd 1970 z ro s ro Time Zone UTC g Daylight Saving Time End Date It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable Apply Cancel r Start Date First of at jm 7 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Basic Setting gt General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed L
109. inesset esin Rire tk kb haa aa nha kn X9 nk EN eh rk Ra Rd 235 Table 89 OSPF Configuration Summary Fable sio serrer E bp NNUS ERE FPE Y EYE ERE Y pe er ON CR EE E PPP E qer REM dq Eb npa 236 Tab dU OSPF Ine 36e icum mani bn Dac as qa du a 237 Tobe 9T OSPF sii eme RR I T 239 Table 92 IP Application IGMP i 244 Table 93 DVMEBP 1ssvoditi e pO IH RERRHASSRER HOD ISSE E PERDHASPEEREU I ES RERUM ALS Rd E pp ER FL e ES 246 Table 94 DVMIP Default Tier valg 1 de Ep arREERRRE ES a pe PIGET Ee RISSaEER RII CHA be RES DER E ani 248 i e et M 250 Table 96 IP Application TUSSI sss sca siiea cos uel oie bl aaa uu Fete bid ener as V px o br Fa ad e ea du epus p Y ad 254 Table 97 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker cccccccccccceceeseeeseeeeaeeeseeseseeeeeeseeseeeeeeeees 255 Table 98 Default DSCP IEEE 802 1p Mapping 1 rere rendered d EY EPI EXP y MM d d SE Ra Pea aii dni 256 Table 98 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP SOME iseseccasisr etti ener ab ERR EEVER EA ERPLE MR EEn tu RES Ra bR ens 257 Table 100 IP Applicaton gt DACP Status ccccccacedssancguse testes dou Erbe UNE extra Np Eb Lt tir pvp hn aaia btad 260 Table 101 IP Application gt DHCP Server Status Detail 1 ree hte ohne Soror nns 261 Table 102 Relay Agent ONAN saasaa ud atr petu ete pe d tae pa Univ d cuir pu ed nd FRED RE Epp EOR M iade 262 Table 105 IP Applicaton gt DHCP GIOBB 22 1 rerireit apri an Id tex Et o ADAE sash E
110. information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker S Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups Settings 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 1 1 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 206 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 192 168 1 1 Add Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups v Pop up Blocker FAQ Close 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 52 Troubleshooting 6 Click Apply to save this setting 52 2 1 2 JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 207 Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings AG E O Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restri
111. known hosts Displays known SSH hosts 3 information key Displays internal SSH public and 3 rsal rsa dsa private key information session Displays current SSH session s 3 subnet vlan Displays subnet based VLAN 3 settings on the Switch system Displays general system 0 information information tacacs server Displays TACACS server 3 settings tacacs accounting Displays TACACS accounting 3 server settings time Displays current system time and 3 date timesync Displays time server information 3 trunk Displays link aggregation 3 information version Displays the firmware version 0 running on the Switch flash Displays the firmware version on 0 the flash memory of the Switch vlan Displays the status of all VLANs 3 lt vlan id gt Displays the status of the 3 specified VLAN vlan stacking Displays VLAN stacking settings 3 vlaniq gvrp Displays GVRP settings 3 port isolation Displays port isolation settings 3 ssh 1 2 Connects to an SSH server with 0 lt user dest ip gt the specified SSH version command lt gt Connects to an SSH server with 0 the specified SSH version and addition commands to be executed on the server test interface port Performs an internal loopback test 13 channel lt port on the specified ports list gt traceroute lt ip host name gt Determines the path a packet 0 in band out of takes to a device band vlan lt vlan id gt ttl lt 1 255 gt wait lt 1 60
112. lt vlan id gt e Enter no fixedorno forbidden to change lt port list gt to normal status Enter untagged to send outgoing frames without a tag Enter no untagged to tag outgoing frames 49 3 4 1 Modify a Static VLAN Table Example The following example configures ports 1 to 5 as fixed and untagged ports in VLAN 2000 sysname config vlan 2000 sysname config vlan fixed 1 5 sysname config vlan untagged 1 5 49 3 4 2 Forwarding Process Example 49 3 4 2 1 Tagged Frames 1 First the Switch checks the VLAN ID VID of tagged frames or assigns temporary VIDs to untagged frames 2 The Switch then checks the VID in a frame s tag against the SVLAN table 3 The Switch notes what the SVLAN table says that is the SVLAN tells the Switch whether or not to forward a frame and if the forwarded frames should have tags 4 Then the Switch applies the port filter to finish the forwarding decision This means that frames may be dropped even if the SVLAN says to forward them Frames might also be dropped if they are sent to a CPE customer premises equipment DSL device that does not accept tagged frames 49 3 4 2 2 Untagged Frames 1 Anuntagged frame comes in from the LAN 2 The Switch checks the PVID table and assigns a temporary VID of 1 3 The Switch ignores the port from which the frame came because the Switch does not send a frame to the port from which it came The Switch also does not forward frames to forbidden por
113. method s you want to use both on the Switch and the port s then configure the RADIUS server settings in the Auth and Acct gt Radius Server Setup screen Click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 68 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication ODnESumsrrsrnm 802 1x Click here MAC Authentication Click here 16 2 1 Activate IEEE 802 1x Security Use this screen to activate IEEE 802 1x security In the Port Authentication screen click 802 1x to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 69 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x DEWAR Port Authentication Active Ci Port Active Reauthentication Reauthentication Timer seconds 3 600 seconds o 4 CO e ce e seconds o 3 4 e seconds o 5 4 e seconds seconds OF Oo 3 1E gH seconds o 3 4 0 ce wf wf wh wt co pL ofl ar nyt a eo of of of seconds 95 T4 5 A i49 40 SD OOo oO o oro o o zI 4 CO 600 seconds K 99 i o_O Lt Am Ane Apply Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the Switch Note You m
114. on one port to another port or ports Syslog The Switch can generate syslog messages and send it to a syslog server GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 427 Appendix A Product Specifications Table 148 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator CLI or an FTP TFTP tool to put it on the Switch Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Restoration Configuration Backup amp Make a copy of the Switch s configuration and put it back on the Switch later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration Cluster Management Cluster management also known as iStacking allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 149 Feature Specifications Layer 2 Features Bridging 16K MAC addresses Static MAC address filtering by source destination Broadcast storm control Static MAC address forwarding Switching Switching fabric 48 Gbps non blocking Max Frame size 1522 bytes Forwarding frame IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 1q Ethernet Il PPPoE Prevent the forwarding of corrupted packets STP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree capability 4 configu
115. open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure Figure 109 ARP Inspection Configure c OF Inspection Configure as o Aa VLAN ARP Inspection Active E Filter Aging Time Filter aging time 300 seconds Log Profile Log buffer size 32 entries Syslog rate 5 entries Log interval 1 seconds Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 ARP Inspection Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You still have to enable ARP inspection on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Filter Aging Time Filter aging time This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters Enter how long 1 2147483647 seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch after the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet The Switch automatically deletes the MAC address filter afterwards Enter O if you want the MAC address filter to be permanent Log Profile Log buffer size Enter the maximum number 1 1024 of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and have not been sent to the syslog server yet Make sure this number is appropriate for the specified Syslog rate and Log interval If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number the Switch stops recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were dropped due to unavailab
116. or Fahrenheit F https Displays the HTTPS information 3 certificate Displays the HTTPS certificates 3 key lt rsa dsa gt Displays the HTTPS key 3 session Displays current HTTPS 3 session s timeout Displays the HTTPS session 3 timeout igmp filtering profile Displays IGMP filtering profile 3 settings igmp snooping Displays global IGMP snooping 3 settings vlan Displays the VLANs on which 3 IGMP snooping is enabled querier Displays the IGMP querier mode 3 settings on each port interfaces port Displays current interface status 3 number gt interfaces config Displays current interface 3 lt port list gt configuration bandwidth control Displays bandwidth control 3 settings bstorm control Displays broadcast storm control 3 settings egress Displays outgoing port 3 information igmp filtering Displays IGMP filtering settings 3 igmp group Displays the IGMP group limit limited igmp immediate Displays the IGMP Immediate 3 leave Leave setting igmp query mode Displays the IGMP query mode for 3 the specified port s ip Displays IP related information arp Displays the ARP table 3 dvmrp group Displays DVMRP group 3 information dvmrp interface Displays DVMRP interface 3 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 138 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE dvmrp neigh
117. or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Rate pps Specify the maximum number for DHCP packets 1 2048 that the Switch receives from each port each second The Switch discards any additional DHCP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit which is recommended for trusted ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 5 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option 82 information Chapter 33 on page 259 to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 105 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure VID DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Show V
118. outgoing traffic bandwidth limit to 5000Kbps Set the guaranteed bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic to 4000Kbps Set the maximum bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic to 8000Kbps sysname config interface port channel 1 sysname config interface bandwidth limit sysname config interface bandwidth limit egress 5000 sysname config interface bandwidth limit cir 4000 bandwidth limit pir 8000 sysname config interface 48 2 5 mirror The mirror command enables port mirroring on the interface Syntax mirror mirror dir lt ingress egress both gt where dir Enables port mirroring for incoming outgoing or both ingress egress both incoming and outgoing traffic Port mirroring copies traffic from one or all ports to another or all ports for external analysis An example is shown next Enable port mirroring Enable the monitor port 3 Enable ports 1 4 5 and 6 for configuration Enable port mirroring on the ports GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 397 Chapter 48 Interface Commands Enable port mirroring for outgoing traffic Traffic is copied from ports 1 4 5 and 6 to port three in order to examine it in more detail without interfering with the traffic flow on the original ports sysname config mirror port sysname config mirror port 3 sysname config interface port channel 1 4 6 sysname config interface mirror sysname config interface mirror dir
119. previously marked for dropping Priority No change C Setthe packet s 802 1 priority C Send the packetto priority queue C Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change C Setthe packet s TOS field C Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value C Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Action Send the packetto the mirror port Send the packetto the egress port Sendthe matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping orto be sentto the CPU to the egress port Setthe packet s VLAN ID Metering Enable M Drop the packet Change the DSCP value Set Out Drop Precedence Out of profile action Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Add Cancel Clear GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Queuing Method This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported 20 1 Queuing Method Overview Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth
120. shown Figure 84 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Filtering Profile Multicast Setting Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address End Address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 Profile Name Default Add Clear Start Address End Address Delete Profile Delete Rule O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes To configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already added enter the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Table 56 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save the profile to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses the
121. so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features 22 1 Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively 22 1 1 IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnetwork A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA web site for more information 22 1 2 IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can control which IGMP groups a subs
122. source ports in the lt dynamic compati multicast VLAN or compatible does not send IGMP reports ble gt group name A name to identify the MVR IP multicast group lt name str gt start address Specifies the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in Sipa dotted decimal notation end address lt ip gt Specifies the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the start address if you want to configure only one IP address for the multicast group Enter MVR mode Create a multicast VLAN with the name multiVlan and the VLAN ID of3 Specify source ports 2 3 5 and receiver ports 6 8 Specify dynamic mode for the multicast group Configure MVR multicast group addresses by the name of ipgroup Exit MVR mode See the following example sysname config mvr 3 sysname config mvr name multivlan sysname config mvr source port 2 3 5 sysname config mvr receiver port 6 8 sysname config mvr mode dynamic sysname config mvr gt 224 070 255 sysname config mvr exit group ipgroup start address 224 0 0 1 end address GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Routing Domain Command Examples 51 0 1 interface route domain Syntax interface route domain lt ip address gt lt mask bits gt where lt ip address gt This is the IP address of the Switch in the routing domain Specify the IP address is dotted de
123. specified port to accept all Ethernet frames or only those with an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag The following example sets ports 1 to 5 to accept only tagged frames sysname config interface port channel 1 5 sysname config interface frame type tagged 49 3 3 Enable or Disable Port GVRP Use the gvrp command to enable GVRP on the port s Usethe no gvrp command to disable GVRP The following example turns off GVRP for ports 1 to 5 sysname config interface port channel 1 5 sysname config interface no gvrp 49 3 4 Modify Static VLAN Use the following commands in the config vlan mode to configure the static VLAN table Syntax vlan lt vlan id gt fixed lt port list gt forbidden lt port list gt name lt name str gt normal lt port list gt untagged lt port list gt no fixed lt port list gt no forbidden lt port list gt no untagged lt port list gt GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 49 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands where lt vlan id gt Il The VLAN ID 1 4094 name str A name to identify the SVLAN entry lt port list gt This is the Switch port list Enter fixed to register the lt port list gt to the static VLAN table with lt vlan id gt Enter normal to confirm registration of the lt port list gt to the static VLAN table with lt vlan id gt Enter forbidden to block a lt port list gt from joining the static VLAN table with
124. standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The Switch supports the link aggregation IEEE802 3ad standard This standard describes the Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide E Chapter 15 Link Aggregation You must connect all ports point to point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking LACP only works on full duplex links All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow control settings Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops 15 2 1 Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 34 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table 35 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 15 3 Link Aggreg
125. stop only administrative sessions via SSH lt radius tacacs Telnet and console port and gt specifies the mode and protocol method exec start Enables sending accounting 13 stop stop only gt information for administrative lt radius tacacs sessions via SSH Telnet and gt broadcast console port sessions to all configured accounting servers at the same time system Enables accounting of system 13 lt radius tacacs events and specifies the protocol gt method system Enables sending accounting 13 lt radius tacacs gt broadcast information for system events to all configured accounting servers at the same time GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE update periodic lt 1 2147483647 gt Sets the update period for accounting sessions This is the time the Switch waits to send an update to an accounting server after a session starts 13 authentication enable methodl xmethod2 lt method3 gt Enables authorization for executing commands on the Switch and specifies which method should be used first second and third The methods can be enable radius or tacacs 14 login methodl xmethod2 lt method3 gt Enables authentication for administrative sessions on the Switch and specifies which me
126. sysname allow you to save configuration accounts with a settings reset configuration settings privilege of 13 or 14 as well as display further system Read only accounts information This mode also contains with a privilege of 0 the configure command which 12 need to type the takes you to config mode enable command and enter enable mode password Config Commands available in this mode Type configin sysname config enable mode mode Command modes that follow are sub modes of the config m ode and can only be accessed from within the config Config vlan This is a sub mode of the config mode and allows you to configure VLAN settings Type vlan followed by a number between 1 to 4094 For example vlan 10 to configure settings for VLAN 10 sysname config vlan Config interface This is a sub mode of the config mode and allows you to configure port related settings Type interface port channel followed by a port number For example interface port channel 8 to configure port 8 on the Switch sysname config interface Config mvr This is a sub mode of the config mode and allows you to configure multicast VLAN settings To enter MVR mode enter mvr followed by a VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 For example enter mvr 2 to configure multicast settings on VLAN 2 sysname config mvr Enter exit to quit from the current mode or enter logout to exit t
127. system 281 redistribute route 234 registration product 447 related documentation 3 remote management 301 service 302 trusted computers 301 resetting 62 280 to factory default settings 280 restoring configuration 62 282 Reverse Path Forwarding RPF 246 Reverse Path Multicasting RPM 245 RFC 3164 305 RIP configuration 227 direction 227 overview 227 version 227 vs OSPF 229 RIP Routing Information Protocol 227 Round Robin Scheduling 163 router ID 234 routing domain 83 269 routing protocols 234 429 routing table 321 RSTP 109 rubber feet 41 S safety certifications 430 safety warnings 6 save configuration 61 280 Screen summary 58 Secure Shell See SSH security 429 service access control 300 service port 301 SFP Small Form factor Pluggable 47 show commands examples 377 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP SNMP 286 agent 286 and MIB 286 and security 287 authentication 293 communities 292 management model 286 manager 286 MIB 287 network components 286 object variables 286 protocol operations 286 security 293 setup 291 293 version 3 287 versions supported 286 SNMP traps 287 288 289 290 291 setup 293 Spanning Tree Protocol See STP 109 SPQ Strict Priority Queuing 163 SSH encryption methods 297 how it works 296 implementation 297 SSH Secure Shell 296 SSL Secure Socket Layer 297 standby ports 133 static bindings 199 static link aggregation example 138 static MAC ad
128. the switch in loop state Figure 114 Loop Guard Probe Packet The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port In other words loop guard also protects against standard network loops The following figure illustrates three switches forming a loop A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown In this example the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port As long as loop guard is enabled on port N The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch Figure 115 Loop Guard Network Loop GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 25 Loop Guard LES After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re activate the disabled port via the web configurator see Section 7 7 on page 85 or via commands see Section 45 12 4 on page 368 25 2 Loop Guard Setup Click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown BS The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP MRSTP or MSTP enabled Figure 116 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard Port Active Ae Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 Advanced Application gt
129. the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 bits
130. the Switch Click on the RADIUS Server Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Figure 95 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup D RADIUS Server Setup J Auth and Acct Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1812 O 2 0 0 0 0 1612 O Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1813 C 2 0 0 0 0 1813 O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication settings Server Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple RADIUS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured RADIUS server if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second RADIUS server Select round robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the RADIUS server If you are using index pri
131. the VLAN ID of the packet with the value you configure in the VLAN ID field Metering Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow s then set the actions to be taken on out of profile packets Out of profile action Select the action s to be performed for out of profile traffic Select Drop the packet to discard the out of profile traffic Select Change the DSCP value to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in the Out of profile DSCP field Select Set Out Drop Precedence to mark out of profile traffic and drop it when network is congested Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to queue the frames that are marked to be dropped Add Click Add to inset the entry to the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 19 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Policy screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field Figure 76 Advanced Application gt
132. the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Click Delete to remove the
133. their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers is kept separate 21 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group The service provider can separate these two VLANSs within its network by adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking Figure 79 VLAN Stacking Example A A VLAN 24 VLAN 24 N N Sa TST ETD VLAN 24 VLAN 24 B B 21 2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles Each port can have three VLAN stacking roles Normal Access Port and Tunnel the latter is for Gigabit ports only Select Normal for regular non VLAN stacking IEEE 802 1Q frame switching Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure The incoming frame is treated as untagged so a second VLAN tag outer VLAN tag can be added BS Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose Normal or Access Port
134. unknown multicast frame parameter GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 47 Configuration Mode Commands Syntax igmp snooping igmp snooping 8021p priority 0 7 igmp snooping host timeout lt 1 16711450 gt igmp snooping leave timeout lt 1 16711450 igmp snooping unknown multicast frame lt drop flooding gt igmp snooping reserved multicast group drop flooding where igmp snooping 8021p priority host timeout 1 16711450 gt leave timeout lt 1 16711450 gt unknown multicast frame lt drop flooding gt reserved multicast group lt drop flooding gt An example is shown next Enables IGMP snooping on the Switch Sets a priority level 0 7 to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Specifies the time out period of the Switch with respect to IGMP report queries If an IGMP report for a multicast group was not received for a host timeout period from a specific port this port is deleted from the member list of that multicast group Specifies the time that the Switch will wait for multicast members to respond to a leave report If no response happens in the timeout period the Switch deletes the port from the multicast group Specifies whether you want to discard packets from unknown multicast groups or whether you want to forward them to all ports Specifies whether you want to discard packets in the reserved multicast groups or whether
135. were created because the Switch identified unauthorized ARP packets Index This field displays a sequential number for each MAC address filter Mac Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter Port This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet Expiry sec This field displays how long in seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch You can also delete the record manually Delete Reason This field displays the reason the ARP packet was discarded MAC VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID were not in the binding table IP The MAC address and VLAN ID were in the binding table but the IP address was not valid Port The MAC address VLAN ID and IP address were in the binding table but the port number was not valid Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Delete Click this to remove the selected entries Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above 24 6 1 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Use this screen to look at various statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt VLAN Status 212 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Figure 107 ARP Inspection VLAN Status C OWS Status Enabled VLAN Show VLAN range C Selected VLAN Start V
136. will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result Enables STP on the specified ports Specifies the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is assigned according to the speed of the bridge Specifies the priority for each port Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first Specifies which STP configuration these ports will participate in mrstp command only An example using spanning tree command is shown next Enable STP on the Switch Set the bridge priority of the Switch to 0 Set the Hello Time to 4 Maximum Age to 20 and Forward Delay to 15 on the Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 47 Configuration Mode Commands Enable STP on port 5 with a path cost of 150 Set the priority for port 5 to 20 sysname config spanning tree priority 0 sysname config spanning tree hello time 4 maximum age 20 forward delay 15 sysname config spanning tree 5 path cost 150 sysname config spanning tree 5 priority 20 47 5 no Command Examples These are the commonly used command exam
137. writes Database detail Description First successful access Last ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans Last ignored time Total ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans Status 300 300 None Not Running Not Running None None No failure recorded Times o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Status None o 0 0 0 0 Confiqure IPS seconds seconds GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 DHCP Snooping LABEL DESCRIPTION Database Status This section displays the current settings for the DHCP snooping database You can configure them in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 24 5 on page 208 Agent URL This field displays the location of the DHCP snooping database Write delay timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Abort timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database after the current bindings change This section displays information about the current update and the next update of the DHCP snooping database Agent running This field displays the status of the curren
138. you do not need to go to any additional screens GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Port Authentication This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1x and MAC authentication methods 16 1 Port Authentication Overview BS 16 1 1 Port authentication is a way to validate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external server authentication server The Switch supports the following methods for port authentication IEEE 802 1x An authentication server validates access to a port based on a username and password provided by the user MAC An authentication server validates access to a port based on the MAC address and password of the client Both types of authentication use the RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 protocol to validate users See Section 23 1 2 on page 186 for more information on configuring your RADIUS server settings If you enable IEEE 802 1x authentication and MAC authentication on the same port the Switch performs IEEE 802 1x authentication first If a user fails to authenticate via the IEEE 802 1x method then access to the port is denied IEEE 802 1x Authentication The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to a IEEE 802 1x authentication enabled port goes through a validation process The Switch prompts the client for login information in the form of a user name and pas
139. you want to forward them to all ports Enable IGMP snooping on the Switch Set the host timeout and leave timeout values to 30 seconds Set the Switch to drop packets from unknown multicast groups sysname config igmp snooping sysname config igmp snooping sysname config igmp snooping sysname config igmp snooping host timeout 30 leave timeout 30 unknown multicast frame drop 47 3 Configure IGMP Filter Use the following commands in the config mode to configure IGMP filtering profiles Syntax igmp filtering igmp filtering profile lt name gt start address lt ip gt end address lt ip gt GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 47 Configuration Mode Commands where igmp filtering Enables IGMP filtering on the Switch profile lt name gt Specifies a name up to 32 alphanumeric characters for this IGMP profile If you want to edit an existing IGMP profile enter the existing profile name followed by start address and end address parameters start address Specifies the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile IP address in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting end address Specifies the ending multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile IP address in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used f
140. your previous configuration Index This field displays the index number of an entry IP Address This field displays IP address of the Switch in the IP domain Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask of the Switch in the IP domain VID This field displays the VLAN identification number of the IP domain on the Switch Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Note Deleting all IP subnets locks you out from the Switch Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 7 7 Port Setup Use this screen to configure Switch port settings Click Basic Setting and then Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 32 Basic Setting gt Port Setup ONXIn En NE Port Active Name Type Speed Duplex Flow Control 802 1p Priority BPDU Control i jg r M Pe M 1 Vv l 10 100 1000M Auto J rH 0 gt Peer gt 2 Vv 10 100 1000M Auto gt r 0 Peer 3 Vv 10 100 1000M Auto 0 Peer 4 iv 10 100 1000M Auto gt C 0 gt Peer gt 5 Vv 10 100 1000M Auto ri 0 J Peer B Vv 10 100 1000M Auto Li 0 J Peer 7 Vv 10 100 1000M Auto ri 0 gt Peer 8 Iv 10 00 1000M Auto m 0 gt Peer l Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Basic Setting gt Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index nu
141. 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Delete Cancel j The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that you configured in the MVR screen from the drop VLAN ID down list box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Refer to Section 22 1 1 on page 171 for more information on IP multicast addresses End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to Section 22 1 1 on page 171 for more information on IP multicast addresses Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start Address This fie
142. 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 i Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 xl aLr Clear Counter _ 36 9 Service Port Access Control Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted computer s for each service in the Remote Management screen discussed later Click Access Control to go back to the main Access Control screen Figure 185 Access Control Service Access Control Service Access Contro Access Control Services Active Serice Port Timeout Telnet Vv 3 SSH v b2 1 FTP v NEM HTTP Vv go 3 Minutes HTTPS Vv 443 ICMP iv SNMP Vv Apply Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 121 Access Control Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services yo
143. 012F 4024 User s Guide Basic Setting This chapter describes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup and Port Setup screens 7 1 Overview The System Info screen displays general Switch information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as fan speeds The General Setup screen allows you to configure general Switch identification information The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Switch The real time is then displayed in the Switch logs The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global Switch features The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a Switch IP address in each routing domain subnet mask s and DNS domain name server for management purposes 7 2 System Information In the navigation panel click Basic Setting and System Info to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number and monitor the Switch temperature fan speeds and voltage in this screen GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 28 System Info Systeminfo System Name GS 4012F ZyNOS FW Version V3 80 TS 0 b4 03 31 2007 Ethernet Address 00 19 cb 00 00 02 Hardware Monitor Temperature Unit C_ Temperature C Current MAX MIN Threshold Status MAC 35 0 36 0 26 0 65 0 Norma CPU 34 0 34 5 25 0 65 0 Norma P
144. 024 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 30 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup Switch Setup io 1 VLAN Type eile Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active O MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment evel eve eve eve eve eve 6 5 4 evel3 2 1 0 eve Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Choose 802 1Q or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 8 on page 91 for more information Bridge Control Select Active to allow the Switch to handle bridging control protocols STP for Protocol example You also need to define how to treat a BPDU in the Port Setup screen Transparency MAC Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts For MAC address Learning learning to occur on a port the port must be active Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 3000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a J
145. 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 213 Subnetting Example After Subnetting 1 A LE I B D P E3 mo SN i I LE CS hs 5 pos H P T Internet gt a n B TM P i P i i i 9 192 168 1 0 25 4 W192 168 1 128 ue a mumumumumum um eom um um um um um um In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible c
146. 1 2 sysname config ip route 172 21 1 104 255 255 0 0 192 168 1 2 metric 2 sysname config ip route 172 21 1 104 255 255 0 0 192 168 1 2 name routel 47 7 Enabling MAC Filtering You can create a filter to drop packets based on the MAC address of the source or the destination Syntax mac filter name name mac mac addr vlan vlan id drop src dst both GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 47 Configuration Mode Commands where name lt name gt Names the filtering rule mac lt mac addr gt Specifies the MAC address you want to filter vlan lt vlan id gt Specifies which VLAN this rule applies to drop lt src dst both gt Selects the behavior of the rule src drop packets coming from the specified MAC address dst drop packets going to the specified MAC address both drop packets coming from or going to the specified MAC address An example is shown next e Create a filtering rule called filter1 Drop packets coming from and going to MAC address 00 12 00 12 00 12 on VLAN sysname config mac filter name filter 1 sysname config mac filter name filter 1 mac 00 12 00 12 00 12 vlan 1 drop both 47 8 Enabling Trunking To create and enable a trunk enter trunk followed by the ports which you want to group and press ENTER Syntax trunk T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 trunk T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 interface port list trunk T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 lacp
147. 1000 Base Tx ports All Models 4 GbE Dual Personality interfaces Each interface has one 1000Base T copper port and one Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP fiber port with one port active at a time One local management Ethernet port Auto negotiation Auto MDIX One console port Compliant with IEEE 802 3ad u x Back pressure flow control for half duplex Flow control for full duplex IEEE 802 3x LEDs Per switch BPS PWR SYS ALM Per Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC port 100 1000 LNK ACT Per mini GBIC port LNK ACT Per Management port 10 100 Operating Environment Temperature 0 C 45 C 32 F 113 F Humidity 10 90 non condensing Storage Environment Temperature 10 C 70 C 13 F 158 F Humidity 10 90 non condensing Ground Wire Gauge 18 AWG or larger GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Table 147 Hardware Specifications Power Wire Gauge 18 AWG or larger Fuse Specification 250 VAC T2A Table 148 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default IP Address In band 192 168 1 1 Out of band Management port 192 168 0 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Administrator User Name admin Default Password 1234 Number of Login Accounts Configurable on the Switch 4 management accounts configured on the Switch Authentication via RADIUS and TACACS also
148. 168 1 20 192 168 1 20 Tiago cue NC DDR ICA 192 168 1 10 uC 172214 gt 172 21 1 1 You want to set switch A as the master router Configure the VRRP parameters in the VRRP Configuration screens on the switches as shown in the figures below Figure 158 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch A Active iv Name Examplei Network 192 168 1 1 24 x Virtual Router ID 1 x Advertisement Interval 1 Preempt Mode lv Priority 110 Uplink Gateway 172 21 1 100 Primary Virtual IP 192 168 1 20 Secondary Virtual IP 0 0 0 0 Figure 159 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch B Active iv Name Example Network 192 168 10 1 24 Virtual Router ID 1 j Advertisement Interval 1 Preempt Mode Vv Priority oo Uplink Gateway 2211300 Primary Virtual IP 32168120 Secondary Virtual IP nono After configuring and saving the VRRP configuration the VRRP Status screens for both switches are shown next Figure 160 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Status on Switch A ED VRRP Statt S Configuration index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 1 24 1 Master Alive GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 273 Chapter 34 VRRP Figure 161 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Status on Switch B O8S Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 1 Backup Alive 34 5 2 Two Subnets Example The following fi
149. 191 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 Table 158 Subnet 4 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 159 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 159 Eight Subnets continued SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 160 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER NET HOST BITS SUB 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240
150. 20 1 1 Strictly Priority Queuing Strictly Priority Queuing SPQ services queues based on priority only As traffic comes into the Switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q7 is transmitted first When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements 20 1 2 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves to the back of the list The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being used This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient i
151. 248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs ofall zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 153 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 8bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits 242 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216_2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 20102 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 0925 6 Notation Since the mask 1s always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notati
152. 4 99 5 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLAINS aueciiscec esee tio orent eor znset ioo er emen tape couaveanee 266 Chapter 34 RPE auia ERE EMPLEO NI EIN ERAS QUEMDAM OMA EFE ARR REVO RA E E EVER RR RUD ERRAT USO EARUM 267 Od T VESPERE secca teste endieleneaodses renda base et eod Moda la pleted restat beUi assa deut cda 267 CEN WIR cc Mv 268 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table of Contents TES NRRP wen rus T 269 znacWw i21 269 s Row VRRP Parameters fb nonini i ennO E EEE EEEE Ee ODIE 270 34 3 3 Configuring VRRP ParamelorS 12x ex dw duin aged er ea ed a eR ha a ea de 271 34 4 VRRP Coniigurallon SUMMAN sketedu qiix n nanan nee ena iue o d eae ra ei Rd ee aA n 272 24 5 VRRP Configuration Examples scccccctassstcces ruea cute estes out n O AE 272 34 5 1 OnE Subhot Network EXBITIBIB seta cescannwis inna tab p Ra c LER EP da tira pend i FER p dx Vr Lob 272 235 52 Two Subnet EXeITIBIB caceauiicaniniidc detracts ERER REESE DIEM PHMI S init 274 Part V Management CLI Troubleshooting 277 Chapter 35 Mamionanto S 279 35 1 The Maintenance SOFC sscesscccscartcrequuiseeissnesswesesaeaaveadiascnsncerqeuaaemaiqusenteiiaenryuavsasunrteeee 279 Joa Load Factory s e 280 20 9 ogge CODTIQUE UD assiacec addo opo abut iuo Qa PO I ORI AP ined seaiehananesaaes Shae eee M E IQU
153. 4012F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 2 temperature returns to the normal GS 4024 operating range 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 2 voltage VoltageEventOn GS 4012F This trap is sent when the voltage 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 1 goes above or below the normal GS 4024 operating range 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 1 VoltageEventClear GS 4012F This trap is sent when the voltage 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 2 returns to the normal operating GS 4024 range 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 2 reset UncontrolledResetEventOn GS 4012F This trap is sent when the Switch 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 1 automatically resets GS 4024 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 1 ControlledResetEventOn GS 4012F This trap is sent when the Switch 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 1 resets by an administrator through a GS 4024 management interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 1 RebootEvent GS 4012F This trap is sent when the Switch 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 2 reboots by an administrator through GS 4024 a management interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 2 timesync RTCNotUpdatedEventOn GS 4012F This trap is sent when the Switch 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 1 fails to get the time and date from a GS 4024 time server 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 1 RTCNotUpdatedEventClear GS 4012F This trap is sent when the Switch 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 2 gets the time and date from a time GS 4024 Server 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 2 in
154. 5 3 Configure a Static VLAN Use this screen to configure and view 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the Switch See Section 8 1 on page 91 for more information on static VLAN To configure a static VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 37 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN Static VLAN END VLAN Status ACTIVE O Name VLAN Group ID Port Control Tagging Normal M Tx Tagging 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 6 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging Tf Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 8 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging iin uS LON SONS fl ell fe fn fh Add Cancel Clear VID Active Name Delete 1 Yes 1 O Delete Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 16 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Port The port number identifies
155. 6 169 priority 167 VRID Virtual Router ID 268 VRRP 267 advertisement interval 270 authentication 270 backup router 267 configuration example 272 Hello message 270 how it works 267 interface setup 269 master router 267 network example 267 272 parameters 270 preempt mode 270 271 priority 270 271 status 268 uplink gateway 271 uplink status 268 Virtual Router 267 Virtual Router ID 271 VRID 268 VSA 193 W warranty 446 note 447 web configurator 55 getting help 63 home 56 login 55 logout 63 navigation panel 57 screen summary 58 weight queuing 163 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 163 WRR Weighted Round Robin Scheduling 163 Z ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 283 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Index GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide
156. 73 and IGMP 171 and VLAN 249 configuration 250 IP addresses 171 overview 171 249 setup 172 173 vs unicast 249 vs broadcast 249 multicast delivery tree 246 multicast group 176 multicast router mrouter 246 multicast VLAN 180 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 111 Multiple RSTP 111 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See MSTP 109 112 Multiple STP 112 MVR 177 configuration 178 group configuration 180 network example 177 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 177 N NAT 438 network management system NMS 286 no commands examples 387 NTP RFC 1305 80 O OSPF 229 advantages 229 area 229 235 Area 0 229 area ID 235 authentication 235 autonomous system 229 backbone 229 configuration steps 231 general settings 233 how it works 230 interface 230 232 236 link state database 230 232 network example 230 priority 230 redistribute route 234 route cost 236 router elections 230 router ID 234 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 457 Index router types 229 status 231 stub area 229 236 virtual link 230 virtual links 238 vs RIP 229 OSPF Open Shortest Path First 229 P password 61 administrator 295 Peak Information Rate PIR 127 PHB Per Hop Behavior 251 ping test connection 303 PIR Peak Information Rate 127 policy 159 160 and classifier 159 and DiffServ 157 configuration 159 example 161 overview 157 rules 157 158 viewing 160 policy configuration 160 port authentication 141 and RAD
157. 8 setup 127 bandwidth control and TRTCM 255 basic settings 77 BDR Backup Designated Router 230 binding 199 binding table 199 building 199 BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units 110 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 110 bridging 428 broadcast storm control 129 C certifications 445 notices 446 viewing 446 CFI Canonical Format Indicator 91 changing the password 61 CIR Committed Information Rate 127 CIST 114 Class of Service CoS 251 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Index classifier 151 153 and QoS 151 editing 154 example 155 overview 151 setup 151 153 154 viewing 154 CLI syntax conventions 326 cloning a port See port cloning cluster management 309 and switch passwords 314 cluster manager 309 313 cluster member 309 314 cluster member firmware upgrade 311 network example 309 setup 312 specification 309 status 310 switch models 309 VID 313 web configurator 311 cluster manager 309 cluster member 309 Command Line Interface introduction 325 Command Line Interface CLI 325 Command Line Interface See also commands accessing 325 commands 325 accessing 325 and configuration file 332 and passwords 327 configure tagged VLAN example 403 exit 332 forwarding process example 407 getting help 329 interface 395 logging in 326 modes 328 modes summary 329 static VLAN table example 407 summary 332 syntax conventions 326 user mode details 333 using history 331 VLAN 403 Committed Information Rate CIR
158. 8 1 1 192 168 1 100 110 n Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 108 VRRP Configuring VRRP Parameters LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an entry Active This field shows whether a VRRP entry is enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays a descriptive name of an entry Network This field displays the IP address and subnet mask of an interface VRID This field displays the ID number of a virtual router Primary VIP This field displays the IP address of the primary virtual router Uplink Gateway This field displays the IP address of the uplink gateway Priority This field displays the priority level 1 to 255 of the entry Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 34 5 VRRP Configuration Examples The following sections show two VRRP configuration examples on the Switch 34 5 1 One Subnet Network Example The figure below shows a simple VRRP network with only one virtual router VR1 VRID 1 and two switches The network is connected to the WAN via an uplink gateway G 172 21 1 100 The host computer X is set to use VR1 as the default gateway 272 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 34 VRRP Figure 157 VRRP Configuration Example One Virtual Router Network m 492 168 1 1 Default Gateway 192
159. AMAA D gt authentication accounting IP ping traceroute Switch Ci stp mactable rmon Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 119 Access Control SNMP Trap Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Trap Destination Select one of your configured trap destination IP addresses These are the IP IP addresses of the SNMP managers You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP Setting screen Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch sends to that SNMP manager Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station See Section 36 3 3 on page 287 for individual trap descriptions The traps are grouped by category Selecting a category automatically selects all of the category s traps Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the Switch to send to the SNMP station Clearing a category s check box automatically clears all of the category s trap check boxes the Switch only sends traps from selected categories Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel
160. AN tags from IP multicast packets on an out going port DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ configure 2 Rate 3 Color Marker and set DSCP to IEEE802 1p mappings DHCP This link takes you to screens where you can configure the DHCP settings VRRP This link takes you to screens where you can configure redundant virtual router for your network Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management Diagnostic This link takes you to a screen where you can view system logs and test port s Syslog This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server Cluster This link takes you to screens where you can configure clustering management and Management view its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses and types of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs IP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the IP addresses and types of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses IP address resolution table Routing Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the
161. ARR Ea IAEE 262 Table 104 IP Application DHCP gt WYLAN iiuisescusadeu na vna sedated soenicnired inani EAEan eiar Rl A Ekaa ASEEN 265 Table 105 VRRP GOS scoprini aan alas EIN O EORR PATI ERREN QUE eemnaheaaieammaaiens 268 Table 106 VRRP Configurations IP Imterlace 4e tod p Rp Lehr dd d Le oet ba sete t xe aee 270 Table 107 VRRP Configuration VRRP Parameters ssssssssssssesseseeeeee nennen 271 Table 108 VRRP Configuring VRRP Parameters 21 ceci reset ressent eideann ER ba qu BER 272 Tapio ERUIT T 279 Table 110 Filename Convention uan p iret pero Neuse Eae x E SER RI UI A P ER T HRPETMIP RE ER NR REEIDE 283 Table 111 Access Control QUOFVIENME iuusasessitecadses Chen asta dI asl L4 EXPE e CRI dO seemideudsiexsguot diend iiaii 285 Table MA SNMP E un C ERR E E ETE SEE 286 TE Ue oer soured UNAS m 287 Table 113 25 MMP Interface TRS irora iatna naana OREA NAE iu E reed ER ER 289 THE TE AAA TADE Nr Te 289 TUS TISONMP IP tc x sesio a 290 TRE TT SNMP SCIT TESBBC ganana aa aa e 291 Table 118 Access Control SNMP ccincasccsntnmssindvianabe i EN EE A E ERE 292 Table 119 Access Control SNMP Trap GOUD sccicsecteterssesiaccisiessceatdcecrastoiusenmscssacderesvntenasasideienerns 294 Tablo 120 Access Control Logne C 295 Table 121 Access Control Service Access Control cccssisssicassassacaacsionsaadansanesictasasosaaeoassapssueasiatseasaqarions 301 Table 122 Access Conirok Remote Managemen
162. Access Control IEEE 802 1D MAC Bridges IEEE 802 1p Traffic Types Packet Priority IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 3 Packet Format IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation IEEE 802 3ah Ethernet OAM Operations Administration and Maintanence IEEE 802 3x Flow Control Safety UL 60950 1 CSA 60950 1 EN 60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A CE EMC Class A GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host
163. Application gt VLAN VLAN Status erret ttt trai ee ena ases Coo pna eek keen 94 Figure 36 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail sssssssseem mI 94 Figure 37 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN sss 95 Figure 38 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting 97 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 25 List of Figures Figure 39 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example ccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeecnceeceeeeeeeeeseeseesenneeaeeeeeeeees 98 Figure 40 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN 99 Figure 41 Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected etna nn nnt he kd an hb uae 101 Figure 42 Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation e eer pna dne eor epe 102 Figure 43 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding seem 105 Figure 44 Advanced Application gt FIIEGFIDI 2uuiusseceeseee cene iier tu neither tuae eorr tu nae ea erc en 107 Figure 45 MES IP Network Example 2 esisrtesn korr irit netta d ck nad cnn npe lr EP EIL Rn 111 Figure 46 S TEIBSTPE Henan EXITOS 6aoesis p bp E HEREEOIBEH EPEUUNE CHERP EDI EE REP PER HERE PUR HERR DEM un 112 Figure 47 MST PR Netra EXIIDDIS sinnis nei ete oo Gn aioe Pc HO P EE RIA 113 Figura 48 MSTIS in Different Regions sisse eorr E roa radi ed cd ERR EAR EXE CUR REPAIR askance ed 114 Figure 49 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example ecce nera entire 114 Figure 50
164. Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the Switch These rubber feet help protect the Switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking Figure 5 Attaching Rubber Feet GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection LES Do NOT block the ventilation holes Leave space between devices when stacking BS For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the Switch This is especially important for enclosed rack installations 2 2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack This section lists the rack mounting requirements and precautions and describes the installation steps 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements Two mounting brackets Eight M3 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Four MS flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver gt Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit 2 2 1 1 Precautions Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes
165. Authority ZyXEL s vendor ID is 890 Vendor Type A vendor specified attribute identifying the setting you want to modify Vendor data A value you want to assign to the setting BES Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure VSAs for users authenticating via the RADIUS server The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch Table 63 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Ingress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 1 Vendor data ingress rate Kbps in decimal format GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 63 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Egress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 2 Vendor data egress rate Kbps in decimal format Privilege Assignment Vendor ID 890 Vendor Type 3 Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN or Vendor ID 9 CISCO Vendor Type 1 CISCO AVPAIR Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN where N is a privilege level from O to 14 Note If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server s and the Switch the user is assigned a privilege level from the database RADIUS or local the Switch uses first for user authentication 23 2 4 1 Tunnel Protocol Attribute You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server refer to your RADIUS server documentation to assign a port
166. BIRIRIB Ble gt o e e BIRR Be e e o BEI e e DDDDD e o o o DARE DERBE e e DEERE e DEEE E iibi o o gt o KERRE 2 BBBbiio gt gt o HEERE o iv wv gt o Bii Bi BREER o o o fco o gt gt o o BO n 4 iv iv S DER RE VM Ww VM Ww 1 gt 2 gt 3 m VMM VM Ww gt BIBIBIBIB gt gt gt o BEREE gt BIDE b gt BEREE gt bebeb e v gt DEDE bebebe Mss BEREE bili sS13 5 135 a ess SS Sy ACC VM WM Ww VM WM Ww Outgoing n E iv iv iv iv iv iv iv iv iv iv iv iv iv 22 n 23 n 24 ARENIS ENEXEIEIEXERENS ES i 7 18 n n iv iv MMM M 1 14 Apply Cancel iv CPU 24 23 19 20 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Figure 42 Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation Setting Wizard Pon isolation z Apply o o 3 oau e WwW wD uu Annn n nnal 10 n 12 13 M Outgoing 45 16 F Fl 20 a so OO ORS 5 30 7 BSS SS 34437 so OO OSS 5 350 BSS a 43474 21 22 23 24 CPU djaja g 8 9 10 11 15 16 Pah 19 39 20 21 r m m m m m n7 4 r r r E FI EI E EI FI E E E FI FI FI FI FI z E RI I CHIETI Kaona 4 CPU sanmnaoaaommmmmsassocmmmmmaa2sana22s5 saqdqaa230mmmmmas sssommmmmasa2asaa s qaa0203mmmmassssosmmmmmasa2saas 4
167. Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 1 3 STP Port States STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 23 STP Port States PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and processed Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded 11 1 4 Multiple RSTP MRSTP Multiple RSTP is ZyXEU s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP With MRSTP you can have more than one spanning tree on your Switch and assign port s to each tree Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information In the following example there are two RSTP instances
168. CAR ERR aaaea kiinaa raia 41 Hardware COV GIVI erm 45 Basic Configurallon M 53 The WED pesce M 55 IPIS SOIN BOOTS eee eer en obi A bPUD QU kupcu Tem ty Ue A FERA ARE R CU bA A arene Ead 65 System Status ami Port Statistica 1 io apos eria Ip pepe ise pF E sS M EM dE 71 rr decur UI 77 Advanced ceniris a eo ede 89 MUTA ETE rer O E A E AEE NA 91 Saio MAC FON ard Roi o 105 ni E E A E 107 Sa AN Teo FOO O ec m 109 risu Ed uL eT 127 IGA ST LCN C ONDON t 129 E E E e P TTE T E E UU UR AE E E 131 Mir UT 133 Por AUTENC 41 din ch id ea cR b d p co a d bob t C LE Ba oe tat ad 141 FOI SEGUE aiiis eather dien d dam ductus gu leaned spade us decet e i dab m esas cata 147 cup gm den 151 xq e M 157 EULDDIMNU i e e 163 VLAN Eccl 165 LIE TU La Ae eee ore Be py nce eros Areonee mere ann Vereen ono ne erm Lens a A 171 Auheonicalon iere RR o N 185 IP SOUS GUIU MERERI TT 199 UP PCI M tT ERES 219 IF ABDICSUDEE aiuiasibedvaxedead T RU eni Ei ARENA T T TE N ER REPE E TEA 223 DEDE tepore Horis terere lau fer oy MMe taeda i an ctun eter sete aM uae LI CoD OLI 225 i nee rep T TN 227 SII v 229 INR suicides PEEL MM EU LE 241 Boa li EN PERTENECER EUN 245 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide
169. Click Advanced Application gt Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 44 Advanced Application gt Filtering ED Filtering d Active C Name Discard source Action Discard destination MAC L BL B HL BE VID Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Action Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 21 Advanced Application gt Flltering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification only GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 10 Filtering Table 21 Advanced Application gt Filtering continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Action Select Discard source to drop frame from the source MAC address specified in the MAC field The Switch can still send frames to the MAC address Select Discard destination to drop frames to the destination MAC address specified in the MAC address The Switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to from the MAC address specified in the MAC field MAC Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal ch
170. Dot1x Configure the Switch to send information when an IEEE 802 1x client begins a session authenticates via the Switch ends a session as well as interim updates of a session Commands Configure the Switch to send information when commands of specified privilege level and higher are executed on the Switch Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured accounting servers at the same time If you don t select this and you have two accounting servers set up then the Switch sends information to the first accounting server and if it doesn t get a response from the accounting server then it tries the second accounting server Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events Select e start stop to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a user begins a session during a user s session if it lasts past the Update Period and when a user ends a session stop only to have the Switch send information to the accounting server only when a user ends a session Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for accounting of specific types of events TACACS t is the only method for recording Commands type of event Privilege This field is only configurable for Commands type of event Select the threshold command privilege level for which the Swit
171. EL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK is the prefix number you dial to make an international telephone call GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Index Numerics 802 1P priority 87 A AAA 185 AAA Authentication Authorization and Accounting 185 access control limitations 285 login account 294 remote management 301 service port 300 SNMP 286 accounting 185 setup 190 accounts and modes 328 address learning MAC 99 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 319 323 324 administrator password 295 age 123 aggregator ID 135 136 aging time 82 alternative subnet mask notation 433 applications backbone 37 bridging 38 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 39 switched workgroup 38 Area Border Router ABR 229 area ID and OSPF 235 ARP how it works 319 viewing 319 ARP Address Resolution Protocol 319 ARP inspection 199 201 and MAC filter 202 configuring 202 syslog messages 202 trusted ports 202 AS Boundary Router 229 authentication 185 235 Index and OSPF 235 setup 190 Authentication Authorization and Accounting see AAA 185 authorization 185 privilege levels 191 automatic VLAN registration 92 Autonomous System and OSPF 229 Autonomous System AS 229 245 B back up configuration file 282 Backbone Router BR 229 backbone routing 229 Backup Designated Router BDR and OSPF 230 bandwidth control 127 428 egress rate 128 ingress rate 12
172. Egress outgoing Ingress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Link Aggregation This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link 15 1 Link Aggregation Overview Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link However the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation In a properly planned network it is recommended to implement static link aggregation only This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your Switch See Section 15 6 on page 138 for a static port trunking example 15 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad
173. Figure 91 MVR Group Configuration Example 5 a Group Configuratio 200 x Multicast VLAN ID End Address 230 1 2 60 Start Address 230 1 2 50 Name Movie Add Cancel MVLAN Start Address End Address Delete All 200 m 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 C Name Delete Group News Delete Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 92 MVR Group Configuration Example Group Configuration D MVR Multicast VLAN ID 200 Name Start Address End Address poo 0 0 0 0 ada Cancel MYLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 O 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 Delete Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Authentication amp Accounting This chapter describes how to configure authentication and accounting settings on the Switch 23 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch The Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do Different user accounts may have higher or lower privilege levels associated with the
174. GMP 241 DVMRP 245 IP Multicast 249 Differentiated Services 251 DHCP 259 VRRP 267 Static Route This chapter shows you how to configure static routes 26 1 Configuring Static Routing Static routes tell the Switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually Click IP Application Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 117 Static Routing EXD Active C Name Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Metric Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Destination Address SubnetMask Gateway Address Metric Delete 1 Yes Example 172 21 1 1 255 255 0 0 192 168 1 2 2 DH Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route Table 81 Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is Address always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for this destination Mask Gateway IP Enter the IP addre
175. GS 4012F 4024 Intelligent Layer 3 Switch User s Guide Version 3 8 4 2007 Edition 1 DEFAULT LOGIN IP Address Mhttp 192 168 1 1 User Name admin Password 1234 ZyXEL www zyxel com About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the ES 4124 using the web configurator or via commands You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP IP networking concepts and topology Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information BES It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the Switch Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for additional support documentation and product certifications User Guide Feedback Help us help you Send all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address or use e mail instead Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan E mail techwriters zyxel com tw GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 3
176. GbR PAIN veut 157 1 2 Goopmgurthig Foll BIS osciisccpri i Y Dti boda prd dados o d od tir a ode d 158 19 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration 125 prLcp inn FERRI EXP XHEEI e c eH I xx XE eder Had en ERU S 160 19 4 Policy Example m 161 Chapter 20 RU UD INS 163 20 1 Queuing Method COVERAGE iad sdctokiee titre dade et Rte barn ec e b ei dad ad 163 20 1 1 Strictly Priority QUGUING P 163 20 1 2 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR c cceesssccceceseeccccceeseeeceerenseeceeenteees 163 20 EPONA STUNNED ciao caps S T S T T SERIE 164 Chapter 21 VLAN Eccli cem sna aa a 165 ZERE VLAN SORIN OVONIOW 165 2 VLAN Stck Example oed eod ed ri tob odd pubbd dba EUR d LEE t eb ba dte RE nba dixe E EEEN EES 165 21 2 VLAN Stacking Port ROOIES iicusiecsesiedidus sess baeut iie aa cd ek ra pu dup Era bid aber a cid eed 166 13 VLAN agi roma si odeidatae pd te aan ee ened te d eee a CER MUN 167 213 dr uiis SES 167 214 Connguring WLAN bcr e 168 Chapter 22 Multicast d 171 ESAN IRE IPIS MERE IT T T 171 22 1 1 IF Mullicast Adgdressps 1 2 iecit s immer tee toit tuae tutt tote Cort duse deti souetenes cnc k viis 171 221 2 OIE USING 1er rti date Ea eto a pa E tc La ean t d od pec Rc need 171 Frage
177. HY 40 0 40 5 28 5 65 0 Norma FAN Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Threshold Status FAN 6450 6510 6194 3250 Norma FAN2 6392 6450 6167 3250 Norma FAN3 5540 6571 6334 3250 Norma Voltage V Current MAX MIN Threshold Status VCOREA 2 576 2 576 2 576 1 B Norma VINRO 1 232 1 232 1 232 1 11 Norma 3 3VIN 3 344 3 344 3 344 T96 Norma AVCC 4 972 4 972 4 972 T96 Norma 12VIN 12 342 12 342 12 281 1 11 Norma 12VIN 1 248 1 248 1 248 1 B Norma 5VSB 1 328 1 328 1 328 10 Norma 5VIN 1 248 1 248 1 248 1 B Norma VBAT Absent The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes ZyNOS FAN This field displays the version number of the Switch s current firmware including the Version date created Ethernet This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the Switch Address Hardware Monitor Temperature The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the Unit temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the temperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperature MAC CPU and PHY refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch printed circuit board Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature me
178. IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting IP Address Conflicts Each device on a network must have a unique IP address Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources The devices may also be unreachable through the network Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example computer A has a static or fixed IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client Neither can access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically Figure 214 Conflicting Computer IP Add
179. ID End VID Apply VID Received Request Reply Forwarded Dropped The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 ARP Inspection VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN range Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to look at in the section below Enabled VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs on which ARP inspection is enabled in the section below Selected VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs in a specific range in the section below Then enter the lowest VLAN ID Start VID and the highest VLAN ID End VID you want to look at Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above Received This field displays the total number of ARP packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Request This field displays the total number of ARP Request packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Reply This field displays the total number of ARP Reply packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Forwarded This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch forwarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Dropped This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch discarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted 24 6 2 ARP Inspection Log Status Use this scre
180. IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP query port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The Switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 22 4 IGMP Snooping VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the IGMP Snooping VLAN link to display the screen as shown See Section 22 1 4 on page 172 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 83 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN Mode VLAN Name VID Index t IGMP Snooping VLAN Name Multicast Setting auto C fixed Apply Cancel m m Add Cancel Clear VID Delete Cancel Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select auto to have the S
181. IP address of the syslog server Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 307 Chapter 38 Syslog GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Cluster Management This chapter introduces cluster management 39 1 Cluster Management Status Overview Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one Switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 127 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Maximum number of cluster members 24 Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The switch through which you manage the cluster member switches Cluster Members The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 39 Cluster Management Figure 190 Clustering Application Example 39 2 Cluster Management Status Click Management Cluster Management in the navigation p
182. IUS 186 IEEE802 1x 143 188 190 MAC authentication 141 port based IGMP 243 port based VLAN type 82 port cloning 323 324 advanced settings 323 324 basic settings 323 324 port details 72 port isolation 97 102 port mirroring 131 132 370 428 and commands 397 direction 132 egress 132 ingress 132 port redundancy 133 port security 147 limit MAC address learning 148 MAC address learning 147 overview 147 setup 147 221 port setup 85 port status 71 port VID default for all ports 372 port VLAN trunking 93 port based VLAN 100 all connected 102 port isolation 102 settings wizard 102 ports standby 133 diagnostics 303 mirroring 131 speed duplex 86 power backup power supply connector 49 voltage 79 power specification 425 power status 79 priority level 83 priority and OSPF 231 priority queue assignment 83 product registration 447 protocol based VLAN hexadecimal notation for protocols 99 priority 99 PVID 91 97 PVID Priority Frame 91 Q QoS 428 and classifier 151 Queue priority 164 Queue weight 164 queue weight 163 queuing 163 SPQ 163 WRR 163 Queuing algorithm 164 Queuing method 164 queuing method 163 R RADIUS 185 186 advantages 186 and port authentication 186 and tunnel protocol attribute 194 Network example 185 server 186 settings 186 setup 186 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Index Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RSTP 109 rear panel 48 reboot load configuration 281 reboot
183. LAN Confiqure Start VID End vip Apply Enabled Option82 Information No O r1 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable DHCP snooping on the VLAN You still have to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch and specify trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports Option82 Select this to have the Switch add the slot number port number and VLAN ID to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 24 5 on page 208 Information Select this to have the Switch add the system name to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can configure the system name in the General Setup scree
184. NMP LABEL DESCRIPTION General Setting Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community password values Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch The SNMP version on the Switch must match the version on the SNMP manager Choose SNMP version 2c v2c SNMP version 3 v3 or both v3v2c Note SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1 Get Community Enter the Get Community string which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Set Community Enter the Set Community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Destination Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Table 118 Access Control SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Enter the port nu
185. OTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from UDP 24032 White Pines Software DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security IPSEC_TUNNEL Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix C Common Services Table 162 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable TCP 21 fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP MULTICAST User Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667
186. Option 82 Information The Switch can add information to DHCP requests that it does not discard This provides the DHCP server more information about the source of the requests The Switch can add the following information Slot ID 1 byte port ID 1 byte and source VLAN ID 2 bytes System name up to 32 bytes This information is stored in an Agent Information field in the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames See Chapter 33 on page 259 for more information about DHCP relay option 82 When the DHCP server responds the Switch removes the information in the Agent Information field before forwarding the response to the original source You can configure this setting for each source VLAN This setting is independent of the DHCP relay settings Chapter 33 on page 259 24 1 1 4 Configuring DHCP Snooping Follow these steps to configure DHCP snooping on the Switch 1 Enable DHCP snooping on the Switch 2 Enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and configure DHCP relay option 82 3 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of DHCP packets that each port can receive per second 4 Configure static bindings 24 1 2 ARP Inspection Overview Use ARP inspection to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network This can prevent many kinds of man in the middle attacks such as the one in the following example Figure 99 Example Man in the middle Attack In this example computer B
187. P whose external metrics are directly comparable to the internal OSPF cost When selecting a path the internal OSPF cost is added to the AB boundary router to the external metrics Select 2 for routing protocols whose external metrics are not comparable to the OSPF cost In this case the external cost of the AB boundary router is used in path decision to a destination Metric Value Enter a route cost between 0 and 16777214 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again 234 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF 28 4 Configure OSPF Areas To ensure that the Switch receives only routing information from a trusted layer 3 devices activate authentication The OSPF supports three authentication methods None no authentication is used Simple authenticate link state updates using an 8 printable ASCII character password e MD5 authenticate link state updates using a 16 printable ASCII character password To configure an area set the related fields in the OSPF Configuration screen Figure 122 OSPF Configuration Area Setup OPH n Interface Virtual link Status Active Dr Router ID 0 0 0 0 Redistribute
188. P VLAN or via another DHCP server on the subnet based VLAN Select this checkbox to force the DHCP clients in this IP subnet to obtain their IP addresses through the DHCP VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Active Check this box to activate the IP subnet VLAN you are creating or editing Name Enter up to 32 alpha numeric characters to identify this subnet based VLAN IP aa IP address of the subnet for which you want to configure this subnet based GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Mask Bits Enter the bit number of the subnet mask To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary format and add all the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1s in binary There are three 255s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 VID Enter the ID of a VLAN with which the untagged frames from the IP subnet specified in this subnet based VLAN are tagged This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch
189. RIE A RAE RRHEY NN n po PRT T2 E OR P E REEPA TA 297 30 6 1 Reguirements for Using SSH E 297 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table of Contents 2 T Introduction DO HIT TIAS uoc pec ini Ee URS MERECE SEE RPEGUSEK ERE TYME RU E3UAAW RI Eg Rak dt RA 297 SX ED UPS aS TET TIU 298 36 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages ecce ennnnnni tnnt 298 36 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages sseee 299 Erw J cer E E SENT 299 38 8 Semice Port ACCESS ConirOl isse ccisssesecct tisse tec eteene cocer emen s eek tese aa Cet LIV EL RA dUY Eas 300 36 10 Remote NMBUSSOGHROEE sassesxakeitecbba ndun EE Ee pH LU cS p EE A EXER REA KK ud EE Ae Duns ERES RERA SESER 301 Chapter 37 chc M 303 Sy NO pci A 303 Chapter 38 rti M 305 RO Be UNF NENEN eR NN CUR 305 coucou sioe re 305 29 2 SONI Salve SUE iuuciiapetddas Un SERERE HRS URN RUTRUM SARI AISRI d LS ae RSUO 306 Chapter 39 Custer Manage me DIE ub aa Fe LER ARRA ARA FR ARR UD RE d UE E S RR pl a cR ERE 309 29 1 Cluster Management Status L VEFVIGW ussistester teer ep pa e Etpe IY Ye Repo Y daa FEE ped ke ee inas 309 si We Fumar e 310 39 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management esser en etna rk th anna a tnaa 311 39 3 Clustering Management Configurat
190. RR enter the queue weight here Bandwidth is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide VLAN Stacking This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on your Switch See the chapter on VLANs for more background information on Virtual LAN 21 1 VLAN Stacking Overview A service provider can use VLAN stacking to allow it to distinguish multiple customers VLANs even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a range of VLANS to handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign
191. ST channel port instance list multi login Disables another administrator 14 from logging into Telnet or the CLI mvr vlan id Removes an MVR configuration 13 from the Switch password privilege Disables a password to execute 14 0 14 commands of the specified privilege level policy name Deletes the policy A policy sets 13 actions for the classified traffic inactive Enables a policy 13 port access Disables port authentication on 13 authenticator the Switch lt port list gt Disables authentication on the 13 listed ports lt port list gt Disables the re authentication 13 reauthenticate mechanism on the listed port s port security Disables port security on the 13 device lt port list gt Disables port security on the 13 specified ports lt port list gt Enables MAC address learning 13 learn inactive on the specified ports radius accounting index Disables accounting on the 13 specified RADIUS server radius server index Disables the use of 13 authentication from the specified RADIUS server remote management index Clears a secure client set entry 13 from the list of secure clients index service Disables a secure client set entry 13 telnet ftp number from using the selected http icmp remote management service snmp ssh https router dvmrp Disables DVMRP on the Switch 13 igmp Disables IGMP on the Switch 13 ospf Disables OSPF on the Switch 13 rip Disable RIP on the Switch
192. Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 207 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 5 DHCP Snooping Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch not on specific VLAN specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server is located and configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database stores the current bindings on a secure external TFTP server so that they are still available after a restart To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure Figure 103 DHCP Snooping Configure DHCP Snooping Configure Port VLAN DHCP Snooping Active L CR Disable an X aEEB Database Agent URL hean RR Timeout interval 300 seconds Write delay interval 300 seconds Renew DHCP Snooping URL Rene
193. TP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol LES This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the Switch Figure 53 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second uU 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click RSTP to edit RSTP settings on the Switch Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch ca
194. TRTCM Color blind Mode All packets are evaluated against the PIR If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow Finally if it is below the CIR then it is marked green Figure 139 TRTCM Color blind Mode Exceed NO 32 2 2 TRTCM Color aware Mode In color aware mode the evaluation of the packets uses the existing packet loss priority TRTCM can increase a packet loss priority of a packet but it cannot decrease it Packets that have been previously marked red or yellow can only be marked with an equal or higher packet loss priority Packets marked red high packet loss priority continue to be red without evaluation against the PIR or CIR Packets marked yellow can only be marked red or remain yellow so they are only evaluated against the PIR Only the packets marked green are first evaluated against the PIR and then if they don t exceed the PIR level are they evaluated against the CIR Figure 140 TRTCM Color aware Mode YES GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 253 Chapter 32 Differentiated Services 32 3 Activating DiffServ Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802 1p priority mapping on the selected port s Click IP Application gt DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 141 IP Application gt DiffServ 4 aAauucrn NN 2 rate 3 Color Marker DSCP Setting Act
195. Timer Values The following are some default DVMRP timer values Table 94 DVMRP Default Timer Values DVMRP FIELD DEFAULT VALUE Probe interval 10 sec Report interval 35 sec Route expiration time 140 sec Prune lifetime Variable less than two hours Prune retransmission time 3 sec with exponential back off Graft retransmission time 5 sec with exponential back off GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide IP Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure the IP Multicast screen 31 1 IP Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast one sender to one recipient or Broadcast one sender to everybody on the network IP Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody You can configure the Switch to untag remove the VLAN tags from IP multicast packets that the Switch forwards This allows the Switch to send packets to Ethernet devices that are not VLAN aware 31 2 Configuring Multicast Click IP Application and IP Multicast in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 136 IP Multicast ED iP Multicast Port IP Multicast Egress Untag Vian ID I 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 NO FNPF FF FF LP QU FFF EN Apply Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 31 IP Multicast The following table describes the labels in this screen
196. UCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040 10 ET 1040 11 Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix D Legal Information condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any imp
197. UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 153 Chapter 18 Classifier 18 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration BS To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Classifier screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field When two rules conflict with each other a higher layer rule has priority over lower layer rule Figure 73 Advanced Application gt Classifier Summary Table Index Active Name Rule Delete 1 Yes Example EtherType IP SrcMac 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 SrcPort port 2 Ci Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Classifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule Active This field displays Yes when the rule is a
198. UTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v v NAS Identifier v v v NAS IP Address v v v Service Type v v v Acct Status Type v v v Acct Delay Time v v v Acct Session ld v v v Acct Authentic v v v Acct Session Time v v Acct Terminate Cause v Table 66 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v v NAS Identifier v v v NAS IP Address v v v Service Type v v v Calling Station Id v v v Acct Status Type v v v Acct Delay Time v v v Acct Session ld v v v Acct Authentic v v v Acct Session Time v v Acct Terminate Cause v 23 3 2 3 Attributes Used for Accounting IEEE 802 1x Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time of the session they are sent Table 67 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v v NAS IP Address v v v NAS Port v v v Class v v v Called Station Id v v v GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 67 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP Calling Station Id v v v NAS Identifier v v v NAS Port Type v v v Acct Status Type v v v Acct Delay Time v v v Acct Session ld v v v Acct Authentic v v v Acct Input Octets v v Acct Output Octets v v Acct Session Time v v Acct Inp
199. X Packet Tx Packets ulticast Broadcast Pause Tagged RX Packet Rx Packets ulticast Broadcast Pause Control TX Collison Single ultiple c 202233 Co Co Excessive Late Error Packet RX CRC Length Runt Distribution 64 65 to 127 128 to 255 256 to 511 512 to 1023 1024 to 1518 Giant O OOo PKrnm uoococooocooooocococoocccococococooco A A sysname 46 2 5 show mac address table Syntax show mac address table lt all lt sort gt static gt Where lt sort gt Specifies the sorting criteria MAC VID or port This command displays the MAC address es stored in the Switch The following example shows the static MAC address table sysname show mac address table static Port VLAN ID MAC Address Type CPU 1 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 Static sysname GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 379 Chapter 46 User and Enable Mode Commands 46 3 ping Syntax ping ip host name lt in band out of band vlan lt vlan id gt size gt lt 0 1472 gt t gt where ip host name TheIP address or host name of an Ethernet device in band out of Specifies the network interface or the VLAN ID to which the Dane ate Avan Ethernet device belongs Be out of band refers to the management port while in band means the other ports on the Switch size lt 0 1472 gt Specifies the packet size to send t Sends Ping packets to the Ethernet device indefini
200. a E ba Eta Bem E MEHR es os alee 411 502 Crete Multicast VLAN genase peti ot PER HR A BR P pO DD Dia DERE T ret debi ood NER 411 Chapter 51 Routing Domain Command Examples leeren tnn 413 BT Ter ace FOHLOSCIOTEIBUEY 222a reevd a ER Io rd ERAS HP NOD IR ER p ccr Ec ipe RE IN Pen iV PR 413 Chapter 52 TroubleshooHBn uci ceci aieiaa ocRe rH URS M QUE ADI MINDS 415 22 1 Problems Starting Up hg Sul Ho eiecit YR ERHODHRE Rant 43 URS MR CL EXE RS RR LS ago 415 52 2 Problems Accessing the SWIEGEE adsereddus lena bea toa pud erp RReaE d Ea rA ka a Ear edel LEE AA ERR E FEAR HEU pad 415 52 2 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions seesesssss 416 527 3 Problems with tho PaSSWON 1 ode i aaa e n tot e td doa oodd 421 Part VI Appendices and Index eee eee ner 423 Appendix A Product Spesiticatigris assises as drene riS YE PP E DEVI RA nR RTR EEA 425 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting ccccccccccccccccecceececeeceecceeccecceeseceeeeeeeeseeeeeeness 431 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 23 Table of Contents Appendix C Common Services cccccccsccscccnececeececeeeceeenececcaeccecceecececcecceeeessecseseeeeeeeeeeess 441 ep qe AMT Riu UMEN 445 Appendix E Customer QUPDOIT eue casdacap eana Aaaa a a E AEE l tato mi tub CR Uta aM da re 449 rm o e 453 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guid
201. a Ur EM manana Kx E RA 193 23 3 Supported RADIUS FSTPbULGS iseceies orbe siio iate N ERI e EE EP RU SRM EPAUE 194 23 3 1 Attributes Used Tor Authentication sire bbs der orta kd dd e aa c da Se 195 23 2 2 Attributes Used for ACCOUN NG iius ies esatto te dena reina d Rd RR tik haha d add 195 Chapter 24 IP SOURCES 2c 199 24 1 IP Source Guard Overview M MM 199 24 1 1 DHCP Snooping OWVOPIQW sc ciaadicaistunceascdhetapniacastnanasantednastadiatapudcdadaaaactantnenarladicnoas 199 25 1 2 ARF Inspection QVeFVIBW 1 ei po P REESE e ERR ERI S KE RIF ed Ep uisu MER OEE 201 242 IP SOURS GURII T 203 24 3 IP Source Guard Statie Binding ausessccenactem idee eni ita crit aet nnt FER P Ena 203 24 4 DACP gc M 205 245 DSP SoboUpirtg CONGUE sede sis Spacey e out oua e option RR a i pt S EDU 208 225 1 DACP Shooping POR COQUE acci ccepit deser inani un x Re ete reb per ERE eM EREHEA 209 24 5 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN CODIGUEG inoacciuc cuss cntes ita uid dementia suse cated done sadannan 211 24G ARP specion SaS NR T UT 212 24 6 TARP Inspection VLAN SII cca demi deicauenielaienuiikosinaneise nate 212 245 2 ARP Inspection Log SIUS sisiicec nouatios saad ete odi rod get UD ican d pd std aa d ad 213 ZA ARP Inspection Configure i5 nesdesen Dieta cnra rrt Hoa bits sepnadigbuksssnantiah s Fide Fata EMI 215 24 7 AARP inspection Port Configure 222 rerit rotate robe
202. able This chapter introduces the routing table 43 1 Overview The routing table contains the route information to the network s that the Switch can reach The Switch automatically updates the routing table with the RIP information received from other Ethernet devices 43 2 Viewing the Routing Table Use this screen to view routing table information Click Management Routing Table in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 200 Routing Table Status LTE SSD Index Destination Gateway Interface Metric Type 1 192 168 1 0 24 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 1 1 STATIC 2 10 10 10 0 24 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 1 1 STATIC The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 134 Routing Table Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number Destination This field displays the destination IP routing domain Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway device Interface This field displays the IP address of the Interface Metric This field displays the cost of the route Type This field displays the method used to learn the route OSPF added as an OSPF interface RIP learned from incoming RIP packets or STATIC added as a static entry GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 321 Chapter 43 Routing Table 322 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Configure Clone This chapter shows you how you can copy the se
203. able DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection 24 1 1 DHCP Snooping Overview Use DHCP snooping to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically This can prevent clients from getting IP addresses from unauthorized DHCP servers 24 1 1 1 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for DHCP snooping This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches The Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high The Switch learns dynamic bindings from trusted ports The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers The Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arr
204. ables sending all IP type traps to a manager The options are ping or traceroute 13 switch Enables sending all Switch type traps to a manager 13 switch lt options gt Enables sending all Switch type traps to a manager The options o are stp mactable or rmon 13 system Enables sending all system type traps to a manager 13 system lt options gt Enables sending all system type traps to a manager The options are coldstart warmstart fanspeed temperature voltage reset timesync intrusionlock or Ioopguard 13 username name sec level noauth auth pr iv Sets the authentication level for SNMP v3 user authentication 13 sec level noauth auth pr iv auth md5sha priv des aes gt Specifies the authentication and encryption methods for communication with the SNMP manager 13 version v2c v3 v3v2c Sets the SNMP version to use for communication with the SNMP manager 13 spanning tree Enables STP on the Switch 13 mode lt RSTP MRSTP MSTP gt Specifies the STP mode you want to implement on the Switch 13 lt port list gt Enables STP on a specified port 13 lt port list gt path cost lt 1 65535 gt Sets the STP path cost for a specified port 13 lt port list gt priority lt 0 255 gt Sets the priority for a specif
205. ace no Command EXamples ceo aene terne te epe aperi e pYo s CIE E Spp AERIS TRE 22H40 REEL 2 VIE PET EE 401 22 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table of Contents 464a ll no bandwidth E iusso iter n p RR HOS LOS LR EE t d ea Hp ER Lg 401 Chapter 49 IEEE 802 10 Tagged VLAN Commands LLiuui ien ene nha aaa na ean nana enu ana naar oE ER a aaa Ma Raman ak nnen 403 V NE SOISDUSMEos Ede RT rm 403 49 2 Global VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands see 404 mM EC iE Cli CNN ecbadauus deschaubie RE NE S SEE E ESE 404 A 2 TARP TIMED iaixstesensbni Maa FRON RSEN GRE FROCRR a 404 OI QVRP TIEF tacit Baie aha d DID er er se DOD Vet et oes 405 2052 3 BOIS 2 VIS ouo e Haier epa AER Gethin S ONE Ans elas debe lespuids 405 AOS Disable Gy e a 405 259 2 Port VLAN LOIS oos ee pt rtr perta rag PURO OR IER I E ERR a Ag S a a RA Nd 405 SK ORL POR ln 405 25 3 2 Set Acceptable Frame Type uusssuisenk epic caa eri 1s kkl s FXbR ERU BUR TA INE REEL CUN Eob kde Una REG 406 49 3 3 Enable OF Disable Pott V RE euii varandi prp ep SK EEUU nada Lesen pul Le doc dao 406 493 A4 Modiy cate VLAN MR UTEM 406 AO Delete VLAN TD M 408 zr MEV VLAN sasra eE E E 408 doa DEADS VERN airan N A 408 255 Show VLAN SEIN sicascntiaivsaciivwsssrnei iiss Tore ost d db OU ta 408 Chapter 50 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands cese eee a eeeeneeeseeeeneeneeseeeeeeeeees 411 BUT NID scias Rana migr
206. aceroute done sysname gt 46 5 Copy Port Attributes Use the copy running config command to copy attributes of one port to another port or ports Syntax copy running config interface port channel lt port gt lt port list gt copy running config interface port channel lt port gt lt port list gt gt active name speed duplex bpdu control flow control gt intrusion lock vlanlq vlanlq member bandwidth limit gt vlan stacking port security broadcast storm control mirroring gt port access authenticator queuing method igmp filtering gt spanning tree mrstp port based vlan mac authentication trtcm gt ethernet oam loopguard arp inspection dhcp snooping where copy running config Copies all of the possible attributes from one port to interface port channel another port or ports lt port gt lt port list gt copy running config Copies only the specified port attributes from one port interface port channel to another port or ports lt port gt lt port list gt active An example is shown next Copy all attributes of port 1 to port 2 Copy selected attributes active bandwidth limit and STP settings to ports 5 8 sysname copy running config interface port channel 1 2 sysname copy running config interface port channel 1 5 8 active bandwidth limit spanning tree 46 6 Configuration File Maintenance The following sections s
207. activate OSPF and set general settings Click IP Application OSPF and the Configuration link to display the OSPF Configuration screen See Section 28 1 on page 229 for more information on OSPF GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 233 Chapter 28 OSPF OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings OF T Interface Virtual Link Status m Active E mc Router ID 0 0 0 0 Redistribute Route Active Type Metric value RIP iv 1B 15 Static iv 1B 15 Ne Apply Cancel Name nam Area ID pono Authentication None Stub Network O No Summary r Default route cost 15 Add Cancel Clear Index Name Area ID Authentication Stub Network Delete Delete Cancel The follow table describes the related labels in this screen Table 87 OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Active OSPF is disabled by default Select this option to enable it Router ID Router ID uniquely identifies the Switch in an OSPF Enter a unique ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation for the Switch Redistribute Route redistribution allows your Switch to import and translate external routes learned Route through other routing protocols RIP and Static into the OSPF network transparently Active Select this option to activate route redistribution for routes learn through the selected protocol Type Select 1 for routing protocols such as RI
208. age 13 10 maximum age and forward delay for the 6 40 forward Specified tree delay 4 30 interface port Activates STP on the specified 13 list ports path cost 1 Sets a path cost to the specified 13 65535 ports priority 0 Sets the priority value to the 13 255 specified ports for STP tree index 1 Assigns a specific STP 13 4 configuration to the ports help Displays the detailed help for the 13 mrstp command mstp Activates MSTP on the Switch 13 configuration name Sets a name for an MSTP 13 region hello time 1 10 Sets Hello Time Maximum Age 13 maximum age 6 40 and Forward Delay forward delay 4 30 instance 0 16 Specifies which MST instance 13 you are configuring interface port Specifies the ports you want to 13 channel port list participate in this MST instance GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE interface port channel port list path cost 1 655352 Assigns the path cost to the specified ports 13 interface port channel port list priority 1 255 Assigns priority to the specified ports 13 max hop 1 255 Sets the maximum hop value before BPDUs are discarded in the MST Region 13 revision 0 65535 Sets the revision number for this MST Region configura
209. ake some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to activate TRTCM on the port Commit Specify the Commit Information Rate CIR for this port Rate Peak Specify the Peak Information Rate PIR for this port Rate GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 255 Chapter 32 Differentiated Services Table 97 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DSCP Use this section to specify the DSCP values that you want to assign to packets based on the color they are marked via TRTCM green Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with low packet loss priority yellow Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with medium packet loss priority red Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with high packet loss priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 32 4 DSCP to IEEE 802 1p Priority Settings You can configure the DSCP to IEEE 802 1p mapping to allow the S
210. ally logs you out of the management interface after five minutes of inactivity If this happens to you simply log back in again By default multiple command interpreter management session are allowed via either the console port or Telnet However no more than nine concurrent login sessions are allowed Use the configure multi login command in the configuration mode to limit concurrent logins to one Console port access has higher priority 45 2 1 The Console Port Connect to the Switch s console port using a terminal emulation software configured to the following settings VT100 terminal emulation GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 325 Chapter 45 Introducing Commands 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control 45 2 1 1 Initial Screen When you turn on your Switch it performs several internal tests as well as line initialization You can view the initialization information using the console port After the initialization the login screen displays refer to Section 45 3 on page 326 Copyright c 1994 2007 ZyXEL Communications Corp initialize mgmt ethernet address 00 13 49 00 00 01 initialize switch ethernet address 00 13 49 00 00 02 Initializing switch unit 0 Initializing MSTP 9e Initializing VLAN Database Initializing IP Interface Initializing Advanced Applications Initializing Command Line Interface Initializing Web Interface Press ENTER t
211. an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 42 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch the Switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 42 2 Viewing the ARP Table Click Management ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen Use the ARP table to view IP to MAC addre
212. and i e means that is or in other words GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The Switch icon is not an exact representation of your device Switch Computer Notebook computer N css SE mmc mm Server Firewall NN LL Nr ooo oom ml E qc c cd amm E I Seo cot SS SS Telephone Switch Router lt M n GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide a Safety Warnings Safety Warnings O For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions e e e e e e Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information For continued protection against risk of fire replace only with same type and rating of fuse Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place
213. andwidth allowed for incoming traffic on the port s 13 pir Enables bandwidth limits allowed for incoming traffic on the port s 13 pir Kbps Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic on the port s 13 egress Enables bandwidth limits allowed for outgoing traffic on the port s 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 140 interface port channel Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE egress lt Kbps gt Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for outgoing traffic on the port s 13 bpdu control lt peer tunnel disc ard network gt Sets how Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs are used in STP port states 13 broadcast limit Enables broadcast storm control limit on the port s 13 lt pkt s gt Specifies the maximum number of broadcast packets to allow through the port 13 dhcp snooping trust Sets this port as a trusted DHCP snooping port Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches and the Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high 13 dhcp snooping limit rate pps Sets the maximum rate that DHCP packets are allowed to arrive at a trusted DHCP snooping port 13 diffserv Enables DiffServ on the port s 13 dlf limit Enables the Destina
214. anel to display the following Screen BS A cluster can only have one manager Figure 191 Cluster Management Status Status Manager Manager 00 13 49 00 00 02 Configuration The Number Of Member 1 Index MacAddr Name 3 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 Status Online GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 39 Cluster Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 128 Cluster Management Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays the role of this Switch within the cluster Manager Member you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number of This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The following Member fields describe the cluster member switches Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 192 on page 311 MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for exa
215. ansceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down Figure 10 Transceiver Installation Example 2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place 3 The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Figure 11 Installed Transceiver 3 1 3 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary Figure 12 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example 2 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Figure 13 Transceiver Removal Example ar e 3 2 Rear Panel The following figures show the rear panels of the AC and DC power input model switches The rear panel contains a connector for backup power supply BPS and the power receptacle For the DC power input model it also contains the power switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Figure 14 Rear Panel GS 4012F Figure 16 Rear Panel GS 4012F DC Model Figure 17 Rear Panel GS 4024 DC Model 3 2 1 Power Connector Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel To connect the power to the GS 4012F 4024 AC unit insert the female end of power cord to the power receptacle on the rear panel Connect the other end of the supplied power cord to a 100 240V
216. aracter pairs VID Type the VLAN group identification number Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name s field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only MAC This field displays the source destination MAC address with the VLAN identification Address number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP as defined in the following standards e IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1w Ra
217. ary 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Switch and renames it to ras Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the Switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the Switch to your computer and renames it to config cfg See Table 110 on page 283 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 35 8 3 GUl based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Specify the default remote directory path Directory Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path 35 8 4 FTP Restrictions FTP will n
218. as a stub area If you enter 0 0 0 0 in the Area ID field the settings in the Stub Area fields are ignored No Summary Select this option to set the Switch to not send receive LSAs Default Route Specify a cost between 0 and 16777214 used to add a default route into a stub area Cost for routes which are external to an OSPF domain If you do not set a route cost no default route is added Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 28 4 1 View OSPF Area Information Table The bottom of the OSPF Configuration screen displays a summary table of all the OSPF areas you have configured Figure 123 OSPF Configuration Summary Table Index Name Area ID Authentication Stub Network Delete 1 Example 192 168 1 1 None No m Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 89 OSPF Configuration Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an area Name This field displays the descriptive name of an area Area ID This field displays the area ID that uses the for
219. ased VLAN Static VLAN Static MAC Forwarding Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Link Aggregation Setting Ling Aggregation Control Protocol Port Authentication 802 1x MAC Authentication Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast Multicast Setting IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Group Configuration Authentication and Accounting RADIUS Server Setup TACACS Server Setup Auth and Acct Setup IP Source Guard IP Source Guard Static Binding DHCP Snooping ARP Inspection Status Loop Guard RIP OSPF Status OSPF Configuration OSPF Interface OSPF Virtual Link IGMP DVMRP IP Multicast DiffServ 2 Rate 3 Color Marker DSCP Setting DHCP Status DHCP Relay VLAN Setting VRRP VRRP Configuration Firmware Upgrade Restore Configuration Backup Configuration Load Factory Default Save Configuration Reboot System Access Control SNMP Logins Service Access Control Remote Management Diagnostic Syslog Syslog Server Setup Cluster Management Clustering Management Configuration MAC Table IP Table ARP Table Routing Table Configure Clone GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 5 Navigat ion Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Basic Settings System In
220. assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this subnet based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing subnet based VLAN Active This field shows whether the subnet based VLAN is active or not Name This field shows the name the subnet based VLAN IP This field shows the IP address of the subnet for this subnet based VLAN Mask Bits This field shows the subnet mask in bit number format for this subnet based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the frames which belong to this subnet based VLAN Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this subnet based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the subnet based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 8 Port based VLAN Setup Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to
221. asured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above Fan Speed A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a sufficiently RPM ventilated cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 8 System Info continued point otherwise Error is displayed LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays this fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM lt 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure under 2000 RPM Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltage V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting
222. ation 47 removal 48 traps destination 292 TRTCM and bandwidth control 255 and DiffServ 254 color aware mode 253 color blind mode 253 setup 255 TRTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker 252 trunk group 133 trunking 133 428 example 138 trusted ports ARP inspection 202 DHCP snooping 200 tunnel protocol attribute and RADIUS 194 Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM 252 Type of Service ToS 251 U untrusted ports ARP inspection 202 DHCP snooping 200 user mode 328 examples 377 user profiles 185 V Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA ventilation 42 ventilation holes 42 VID 85 91 94 95 167 number of possible VIDs 91 priority frame 91 VID VLAN Identifier 91 virtual links 238 virtual links and OSPF 230 Virtual Router status 268 Virtual Router VR 267 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP 267 VLAN 81 91 428 acceptable frame type 97 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Index and DHCP 264 automatic registration 92 ID 91 IGMP snooping 172 ingress filtering 97 introduction 81 number of VLANs 94 port isolation 97 port number 95 port settings 96 port based VLAN 100 port based all connected 102 port based isolation 102 port based wizard 102 static VLAN 95 status 94 95 subnet based 98 tagged 91 trunking 93 98 type 82 93 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 81 VLAN commands examples 403 VLAN number 85 VLAN stacking 165 167 configuration 168 example 165 frame format 167 port roles 16
223. ation Status Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation in the navigation panel The Link Aggregation Status screen displays by default See Section 15 1 on page 133 for more information Figure 61 Advanced Application Link Aggregation Status OWS eee Link Aggregation Setting Index Enabled Ports Synchronized Ports Aggregator ID Status 1 2 3 E 4 5 6 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Advanced Application Link Aggregation Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the trunk ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Enabled Port These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the individual port GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Table 36 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Synchronized These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk Ports group Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of the following system priority MAC address key port priority and port number Refer to Section 15 2 1 on page 134 for more information on this field Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group It displays
224. ault PVID is VLAN 1 forall 13 ports Sets a PVID in the range 1 to 4094 for the specified interface qos priority 0 7 Sets the quality of service priority 13 for an interface speed duplex auto 10 half 10 Sets the duplex mode half or 13 full 100 full and speed 10 100 or half 100 1000 Mbps of the connection on full 1000 full gt the interface Selecting auto auto negotiation makes one port able to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support Spq Sets the port s to use Strict 13 Priority Queuing trtom Enables Two Rate Three Color 13 Marker on the port s cir Kbps Sets the Commit Information Rate 13 on the port s pir Kbps Sets the Peak Information Rate 13 on the port s dscp green 0 63 DSCP value to use for packets 13 with low packet loss priority dscp yellow 0 DSCP value to use for packets 13 63 with medium packet loss priority dscp red 0 63 DSCP value to use for packets 13 with high packet loss priority 372 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 140 interface port channel Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE vlan stacking priority 0 7 Sets the priority of the specified port s in VLAN stacking 13 role access tunnel Sets the VLAN stacking port roles of the specified port s 13 SPVID vlan
225. available IP Routing Domain An IP interface also known as an IP routing domain is not bound to a physical port Configure an IP routing domain to allow the Switch to route traffic between different networks VLAN A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router VLAN Stacking Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers MAC Address Filter Filter traffic based on the source and or destination MAC address and VLAN group ID DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use this feature to have the Switch assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network IGMP Snooping The Switch supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are members of that group thus allowing you to significantly reduce mu
226. ays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log message The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP packets in the log consolidation interval into one log message You can configure this interval in the ARP Inspection Configure screen See Section 24 7 on page 215 Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated dhcp deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a dynamic binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID static deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID deny An ARP packet was discarded because there were no bindings with the same MAC address and VLAN ID dhcp permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a dynamic binding static permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a static binding In the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen you can configure the Switch to generate log messages when ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the VLAN ID of the ARP packet See Section 24 7 2 on page 217 Time This field displays when the log message was generated GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 7 ARP Inspection Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global settings for the ARP inspection log To
227. backup router assumes the role of the master router However when another backup router with a higher priority joins the network it will preempt the lower priority backup router that is the master Disable preempt mode to prevent this from happening By default a layer 3 device with the same IP address as the virtual router will become the master router regardless of the preempt mode 270 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 34 VRRP 34 3 3 Configuring VRRP Parameters After you set up an IP interface configure the VRRP parameters in the VRRP Configuration screen Figure 155 VRRP Configuration VRRP Parameters Active Name Network Virtual Router ID Preempt Mode Priority Uplink Gateway Primary Virtual IP Adertisement Interval Secondary Virtual IP name 192 168 1 10 24 v rs E Iv fio ooo poop Add Cancel Clear The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 107 VRRP Configuration VRRP Parameters LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this VRRP entry Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Network Select an IP domain to which this VRRP entry applies Virtual Router ID Select a virtual router number 1 to 7 for which this VRRP entry is created You can configure up to seven virtual routers for one network Advertisement Interval Specify t
228. bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on a port The Peak Information Rate PIR is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic flow on a port when there is no network congestion The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth If the CIR is reached packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR When network congestion occurs packets through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop BS The CIR should be less than the PIR The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth 12 2 Bandwidth Control Setup Click Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as shown next GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control Figure 58 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control TOETO Active 1 Port yes De Active Egress Rate Active Commit Rate Active Peak Rate H Kbps Kbps r kbps 1 O NEN Kbps Ci foo Kbps C hoo Kbps 2 r fi Kbps O 1000 Kbps O 1000 Kbps 3 m fi Kbps r 1000 Kbps m 1000 Kbps 4 rn sl kbps ri i000 kbps P 1000 Kbps 5 Hl ops E i000 kops o 1000 Kbps 6 O fi Kbps 1000 Kbps r 1000 Kbps 7 Eoo kbps i000 kbps 1000 Kbps 8 fi Kbps n 1000 Kbps r 1000 Kbps ISIS TO_SON Y I SNS I SN I OSI STD TI OS NR Apply Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 31 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control
229. ble 141 interface route domain Commands eieeeesiiee enne tnter ha tatnen nha diana 373 Table 142 Command Summary config vlan Commands sse 375 Table 143 Command Summary myr COmMmMANOS nisse rtt rtt naris Eb Ye REM IR HX kinika i 376 Table 144 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Switch cccccecccececeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeensenaeeeeeeeeees 415 Table 145 Troubleshooting Accessing the SWIIGIY sinsrcsssminansrinirsuiiiiniaiinini aniis 415 Table 146 Troubleshooting he Password iiic suasit sassccacscavscenes doasannendassccncudassscnnd AEREE 421 Table 147 Hardware SSCS ccccasccssssavucesivancevadiwetenvdnradoreutiasscetaaiduanedinna K ka NG ia Na ELS aa br esta 425 Table 148 Fira Spec callofis saoraidh n a a 426 Tablo m9 Fears SOCIO ccce op E a a Pr ER a ERR Teter 428 Tatio 150 Standards Supporled iLosaaiemeon ded p Precedente Yi Ecl eni b epu dad eben da oman ds 429 Table 151 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example ssssssssse 432 Tabie 152 Subnec MASKS ebrei io I I aM DE IEEE ped ES t d UMP EM Fi aput Fe ERR ER Y DL apad 433 Table 152 Macau Host Numbers disstebeshquxbe DH UE HEN IE S EHEBHEN S REFPPEQI dene EE ELO EUN ee Ebr P Tn PUR E dq RN 433 Table 154 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation 1 ececeeciesiccesi esee cta ku nat bh d nsus tb a dana taba d oda da 433 Table Reis GUDBEE D aa ba Teva cade e pLe si aea ADORA trae 435 js qoi pr M 436 CO cErA l0 c M
230. ble type Copper or Fiber Status If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 11 1 on page 109 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Table 7 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up Tx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted TX Packet This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast transmitted Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets transmitted Tagged This field sho
231. bor Displays DVMRP neighbor 3 information dvmrp prune Displays the DVMRP prune 3 information dvmrp route Displays the DVMRP routes igmp group Displays multicast group details 3 for each port s igmp interface Displays IGMP settings for each 3 IP interface igmp multicast Displays details about known and 3 unknown multicast frames passing through the Switch on the specified port s igmp timer Displays IGMP counter and timer 3 settings for each IP interface iptable all Displays the IP address table You 3 IP VID PORT can sort the table based on the IP address VLAN ID or the port number iptable count Displays the number of IP 3 interfaces configured on the Switch iptable static Displays the static IP address 3 table ospf database Displays OSPF link state 3 database information ospf interface Displays OSPF interface settings 3 ospf neighbor Displays OSPF neighbor 3 information protocol based Displays protocol based VLAN 3 vlan settings on the port s route Displays IP routing information 3 route static Displays IP static route 3 information source binding Displays the static bindings IP to 3 MAC address configured on the Switch source binding Displays the static bindings 3 lt mac addr gt configured on the Switch based ea on MAC address or VLAN ID of the static binding source binding Displays help information for the 3 help Source binding command tcp Displays IP TCP informati
232. ca nasien ak Cid dE dd add ad dat ESEN 387 4275 2 Rexenasble coi iE cosa a Pre EI v SD Rr e ena e Pr pi bebe EERE 387 47 S4 Other Examples of no Commands irrito ptt E Ph Ly RE rA Rr EHI iniiai 388 AZ 6 Stato ROME Pur lp IY LERNTE E DO 390 47 7 Enabling MAG lg 390 2 8 Enabling TO o oec etd cen oe opedd dod ub cd tico ae Wine earn aie ee 391 ATO Enabling Fort ADIRE ziiextbxdus ins conEd sec tobR aS ib CUnDHInCI NN 392 479 1 RADIUS Server SOIFIgIS 122x552 c bi consiecuss tote ttti secetenss sor et idera dre S 392 47 9 2 Port Authentication Settings PPP 393 Chapter 48 literlace Commands me n a a S a ai 395 a8 OVEIMIOW 395 49 2 Intemace Command Exaile sias rodea OU ARD ERE A 395 Ls M WRETIACS DOMFCNONNIG sdin E 395 Lowest X dienes 395 25 2 3 BIOBOCOSIMIDIE 2 inund e ERLeI a EX Qeon BR PREE UE d ora ES Fu Rae piena e e Lug 396 Ls Ric ui aem 396 zc Tos Me 397 nonus isi eee NEU DI T 398 ABZ WIGTRSSCNOOK A e n 398 oe THAIS ET 398 452 B WINE adiecto un ov E ae A ae eres 399 LLACNDME IDLA 399 255501 OS DEDE Geo sata des trea ERU SRI IE REERREIN EH ENEI EE x Mus Aa aT a EUR OD bL MANNI d Ud 400 Ao 2 Te 1k e T E 400 dod ED ANUE Let scr e ped labeo Deed D LER ce RD e et peu d 400 ano TH ESAE unciis bande udo ctas eodepao bem i epa CAN RUD dta temtes oa us 401 28 3 Interf
233. cast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile 176 Table 57 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR sess 179 Table 58 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration 181 Table 59 RADIUS ve TACACOF sasiccteccidasdsvscraacannnocadaansdpecaaasnnnecuaansapiecananndniecamannnncaassssaieadieasamaaiiniens 186 Table 60 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup sss 187 Table 61 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup sess 189 Table 62 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup sess 191 Dc borse coc Mc 193 Table 64 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute inisidan nnman nananana nannini nnne nnn nnne nennen nnns 194 Table 65 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console sse 196 Table 66 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ccccssecsccceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeesenaecaeeeeeeeeeeneess 196 Table 67 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console sssseseemm 196 EE Oe IP Saute G r sersan 203 Table 69 IP Source Guard Static Binding used aisdu tht adi Rb dg anann EAEAN ENTANA EAAS Ex ARA 204 TOC PRA P cquo o EE 206 Tablo 71 DHCP S popiu CODIIQUEE sinirinin d ope ERG RR E Rp ati aa E rn ERR Lad S Rad 208 Table 72 DHCP Snooping
234. ch Setup screen first Select Peer to process any BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units received on this port Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide PART III Advanced VLAN 91 Static MAC Forward Setup 105 Filtering 107 Spanning Tree Protocol 109 Bandwidth Control 127 Broadcast Storm Control 129 Mirroring 131 Link Aggregation 133 Port Authentication 141 Port Security 147 Classifier 151 Policy Rule 157 Queuing Method 163 VLAN Stacking 165 Multicast 171 Authentication amp Accounting 185 IP Source Guard 199 Loop Guard 219 VLAN The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and port based VLANs 8 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANs A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in
235. ch and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 9 Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin
236. ch should send accounting information The Switch will send accounting information when commands at the level you specify and higher are executed on the Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 62 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 2 4 Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor specific information between a RADIUS server and a network access device for example the Switch A company can create Vendor Specific Attributes VSAs to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user authentication Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to Assign account privilege levels See Section 45 7 on page 328 for more information on account privilege levels for the authenticated user The VSAs are composed of the following Vendor ID An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers
237. ch will be chosen as the root bridge within the spanning tree instance Enter priority values between 0 and 61440 in increments of 4096 thus valid values are 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 and 61440 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide E Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Range Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the Start field Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the End field Next click Add to add this range of VLAN s to be mapped to the MST instance Remove to remove this range of VLAN s from being mapped to the MST instance Clear to remove all VLAN s from being mapped to this MST instance Enabled VLAN s This field displays which VLAN s are mapped to this MST instance Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST instance
238. cimal notation For example 192 168 1 1 lt mask bits gt The number of bits in the subnet mask Enter the subnet mask number preceded with a To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 Use this command to enable create the specified routing domain for configuration An example is shown next Enter the configuration mode Enable default routing domain the 192 168 1 1 subnet for configuration Begin configuring for this domain sysname config sysname config interface route domain 192 168 1 1 24 cmd interface route domain 192 168 1 1 255 2554 255 0 sysname config if GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 51 Routing Domain Command Examples GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies 52 1 Problems Starting Up the Switch Table 144 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Switch PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION None of the LEDs Check the power connection and make sure the power source is turned on turn on when you turn on the y If the error persists you may have a hardware problem In this case you should Switch contact your vendor 52 2 Problems Accessing the Switch Table 145 Troubles
239. cimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 0 254 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 11 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration IP Interface Use these fields to create or edit IP routing domains on the Switch IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 This is the IP address of the Switch in an IP routing domain IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of an IP routing domain in dotted decimal notation For Mask example 255 255 255 0 VID Enter the VLAN identification number to which an IP routing domain belongs Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to
240. connect to the Switch over SSH 36 7 Introduction to HTTPS HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web configurator The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server the Switch must always authenticate itself to the SSL client the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Switch whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSL client must send the Switch a certificate You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the Switch Please refer to the following figure 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the Switch s WS web server 2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 by default on the Switch s WS web server GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 297 Chapter 36 Access Cont
241. creen Table 101 IP Application gt DHCP Server Status Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION Start IP Address This field displays the starting IP address of the IP address pool configured for this DHCP server instance End IP Address This field displays the last IP address of the IP address pool configured for this DHCP server instance Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask value sent to clients from this DHCP server instance Default Gateway This field displays the default gateway value sent to clients from this DHCP server instance Primary DNS This field displays the primary DNS server value sent to clients from this DHCP Server server instance Secondary DNS This field displays the secondary DNS server value sent to clients from this DHCP Server server instance Address Leases This section displays information about the IP addresses this DHCP server issued to clients Index This field displays a sequential number for each DHCP request handled by the Switch IP Address This is the IP address issued to a DHCP client Timer This field displays the time remaining before the DHCP client has to renew its IP address Hardware This field displays the MAC address of the DHCP client Address It may also display SELF OCCUPIED ADDRESS if the IP address cannot be used for DHCP because it is already assigned to the Switch itself Hostname This field displays the system name of the client
242. criber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription You can set the Switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port 22 1 3 IGMP Snooping A Switch can passively snoop on IGMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch 22 1 4 IGMP Snooping and VLANs The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs You can configure the Switch to automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs The Switch then performs IGMP snooping on the first 16 VLANs that send IGMP packets This is referred to as auto mode Alternative
243. cted sites Internet This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones r Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone E Medium Safe browsing and still functional Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites OK Cancel Click the Custom Level button Scroll down to Scripting Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default Click OK to close the window ona Rh WN GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 52 Troubleshooting Figure 208 Security Settings Java Scripting Security Settings 2 xi Settings 125 Scripting 3 poe a E Allow paste operations via script O Disable 9 Enable Q Prompt amp SURG of Java applets OQ Prompt Lleaw Aukhantiostian z Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset Le se 52 2 1 3 Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Click the Custom Level button Scroll down to Microsoft VM a fF 0 N Click OK to close the window Figure 209 Security Settings Java Security Settings 24xl Settings Q Disable 9 Enable EX Font dow
244. ctivated and No when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule s settings Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number Table 44 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER IP ETHII 0800 X 75 Internet 0801 NBS Internet 0802 ECMA Internet 0803 Chaosnet 0804 X 25 Level 3 0805 XNS Compat 0807 Banyan Systems OBAD BBN Simnet 5208 IBM SNA 80D5 AppleTalk AARP 80F3 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 18 Classifier Some of the most common IP ports are Table 45 Common IP Ports PORT NUMBER PORT NAME 21 FTP 23 Telnet 25 SMTP 53 DNS 80 HTTP 110 POP3 18 4 Classifier Example The following screen shows an example where you configure a classifier that identifies all traffic from MAC address 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 on port 2 After you have configured a classifier you can configure a policy in the Policy screen to define action s on the classified traffic flow GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 18 Classifier Figure 74 Classifier Example Active Vv Example Packe
245. d aderenti nda Rd d Rd a ad 135 SEM elencate uapI Nue er s 136 19 5 Statie Trunkirig EOMP 2uiiescesk rre taut tea d HEAR oH EU HM Fu Va P ESSA 138 Chapter 16 Porn PETES CALGON enr 141 Leur douleur 141 ju wEEz sgENRS CU c MT 141 10 1 2 MAC AOIGMRC ANON 12 cocexdtG pee iE un XL Ipaa KISS RAE REFEEEII URGE ASAA EM LEX laa Ag Ras 142 16 2 Port Authemiicaton Configuration iussis epe eek uku IN EE LER PEU n REP c Eur pape AR DLL dE DON dM E RRE 143 152 T Activate IEEE CUS Ix Spuy quiin pd eodd aa e d vt d 143 16 2 2 Activate MAC AUtBent IDE uus tek eree ptt ep bna kb end bb Rae udi EN ow DEVE RE raa E Ken 144 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 17 Pon oc D rU 147 QUSE SI dni COUN Meer ad Pa ii secre ba acl hace ale ence TM 147 17 2 Porn Securnly SETUP ome 147 Chapter 18 e a A A E A E E E E E A A E A 151 18 1 Ab t the Classifier and QOS auos leer ct iaaiiai eid bial ph ed Ex pn aaa pa 151 18 2 Configuring Hie Classiior e 151 18 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration cccssssuscecrssssccsevaviunsavsrssanecesiisuaccaevassaceasersoots 154 Te SSSR EX mu 155 Chapter 19 c o FP fee mec n a a 157 19 1 Polity Riles OVGIVIOW A 157 DER I e ais satan dea ER PH RU UNO TID 157 19 1 2 DSCP and Per Hop BeliBViIOF xusceesexseeeskct vs dA Iro cesta onte T pa ski IEEE EX
246. d modes User Enable and Configure The modes and commands available to you depend on what level of privilege your account has See Section 45 7 on page 328 for more information on setting up privilege levels When you first log into the command interpreter with a read only account having a privilege of 0 the initial mode is the User mode The User mode commands are a subset of Enable mode commands The User mode command prompt ends with an angle bracket gt To enter Enable mode type enable and enter the administrator password when prompted the default is 1234 When you enter Enable mode the command prompt changes to the pound sign If you log into the command interpreter as an administrator you automatically enter Enable mode GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands The following table describes command interpreter modes and how to access them Table 136 Command Interpreter Mode Summary HOW TO LOGIN allow you to configure settings that affect the Switch globally MODE DESCRIPTION ACCESS PROMPT User Commands available in this mode are Default login level fora sysname gt a subset of enable mode You can read only account The first part of the prompt is perform basic tests and display the system name In the CLI general system information examples in this User s Guide the system name is always sysname Enable Commands available in this mode Default login level for
247. dE EEUU 183 IQUE SS PA er M 185 Figure 94 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct ccicisiascsnastecaccscscataaannespnsiaansadaceceassionasaserssresnanenthesoas 186 Figure 95 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup sueseusss 187 Figure 96 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup 2 eseteeeeeeeeees 189 Figure 97 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup ssessssssssssss 191 Figure 98 DHCP Snooping Database File Format 11i isst anrea nr ntm ntt e ned 200 Figure 99 Example Man in the middle Attack esee riennnn nna hn tnn nna rn tn anna ko tna a Ru Eua 201 Figure 100 EsTre At p GG G G G X 203 Figure TOT IF Source Guard Statie BINGING epee ecc tdeo dade tete seconda do euo eda ei os ER tery 204 ricus T0Z PRCP SHOE sstsneidbelenisat iMbapcisi tuis venatu Fatus iint cincti ss v nri tuba vene cbe aa terre ni Rau end freee 205 Figure 103 DACP Snooping COMNGUIS ee 208 Figure 104 DHCP Snooping Port Configure secet pa ct d kit cte Kk Ge p b br EL int er Yeu 210 Figure TUS DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure aiite ire ck rtr Ee ERR NE er opo pH qut uk A 211 Figuie TOB ARP napoti SEU Lu Rene nme tem dcc oe Aba adc du E o d t Rt RR dia 212 Figure 107 ARP Inspection VLAN Status uiuis eror Ro a ena Le
248. de Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued specified VLAN group COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE logging Enables logging of ARP 13 all none permi inspection events on the t deny specified VLAN s Optionally specifies which types of events to log bandwidth Enables bandwidth control 13 control bcp Enables Bridge Control Protocol 13 transparenc BCP transparency y classifier name packet Configures a classifier A 13 format classifier groups traffic into data 802 3untag 802 3t flows according to specific ag EtherIIuntag criteria such as the source EtherIItag address destination address AE Source port number destination priority lt 0 7 gt port number or incoming port vlan vlan number id gt ethernet type ether num iplipx arp rarp appletalk decnet sna netbios dlc Source mac lt src mac addr source port lt port num gt destination mac lt dest mac addr gt dscp 0 63 ip protocol lt protocol num tcp udp icmple gp ospf rsvpligmp igp pim ipsec gt establish only Source ip src ip addr gt mask bits lt mask bits gt source socket lt socket num gt destination ip dest ip addr mask bits mask bits destination Socket socket num inactive help Displays help information for this 13 command cluster lt vlan id gt Enables cl
249. de Specify the MVR mode on the Switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Table 57 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link
250. displays the IP network address of the final destination Address Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate Address neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide RIP This chapter shows you how to configure RIP Routing Information Protocol 27 1 RIP Overview RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a routing device to exchange routing information with other routers The Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets When set to Both the Switch will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives Incoming the Switch will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received Outgoing the Switch will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received None the Switch will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Switch sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but
251. displays the priority of the Switch This number is used in the designated router election Designated This field displays the router ID of the designated router Router Backup This field displays the router ID of a backup designated router Designated Router Time Intervals This field displays the time intervals in seconds configured Configured Neighbor Count This field displays the number of neighbor routers Adjacent This field displays the number of neighbor router s that is adjacent to the Switch Neighbor Count Neighbor Neighbor ID This field displays the router ID of the neighbor Pri This field displays the priority of the neighbor This number is used in the designated router election State This field displays the state of the neighbor backup or DR designated router Dead Time This field displays the dead time in seconds Address This field displays the IP address of a neighbor Interface This field displays the MAC address of a device Link State Database Link ID This field displays the ID of a router or subnet ADV Router This field displays the IP address of the layer 3 device that sends the LSAs Age This field displays the time in seconds since the last LSA was sent Seq This field displays the link sequence number of the LSA Checksum This field displays the checksum value of the LSA Link Count This field displays the number of links in the LSA 28 3 OSPF Configuration Use this screen to
252. dress 105 static MAC forwarding 99 105 static routes 225 226 static trunking example 138 Static VLAN 95 static VLAN control 96 tagging 96 status 56 71 LED 50 link aggregation 134 MSTP 124 OSPF 231 port 71 port details 72 power 79 STP 117 120 VLAN 94 VRRP 268 STP 109 428 bridge ID 118 121 bridge priority 116 119 configuration 116 119 designated bridge 110 forwarding delay 117 120 Hello BPDU 110 Hello Time 117 118 119 121 how it works 110 Max Age 117 118 120 121 path cost 110 117 120 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Index port priority 117 120 port state 111 root port 110 status 117 120 terminology 109 vs loop guard 219 stub area 229 236 stub area See also OSPF 236 subnet 431 subnet based VLAN and DHCP VLAN 99 setup 99 subnet based VLANs 98 subnet mask 432 subnetting 434 switch lockout 61 switch reset 62 switch setup 81 switching 428 syntax conventions 4 syslog 202 305 protocol 305 server setup 306 settings 305 setup 305 severity levels 305 system information 77 system log 303 system reboot 281 T TACACS 185 186 setup 188 TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus 185 tagged VLAN 91 Telnet commands 326 logging in 326 management 326 temperature 425 temperature indicator 78 time current 80 time zone 80 Time RFC 868 80 time server 80 time service protocol 80 format 80 Time To Live TTL 246 trademarks 445 transceiver install
253. dress for Switch management The following example shows you how to create an IP interface for the IP address 172 23 0 1 with the subnet mask 255 255 255 0 sysname config sysname config vlan 1 sysname config vlan ip address 172 23 0 1 255 255 255 0 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 327 Chapter 45 Introducing Commands 45 7 Privilege Levels You can use a command whose privilege level is equal to or less than that of your login account For example if your login account has a privilege level of 12 you can use all commands with privilege levels from 0 to 12 0 privilege level commands are available to all login accounts BS If you use an external RADIUS server to authenticate users you can use a VSA Vendor Specific Attribute to configure a privilege level for an account on the RADIUS server See Section 23 2 4 on page 193 for more information Use the following commands to specify privilege levels for login accounts Syntax logins username lt username gt password lt password gt logins username lt username gt privilege lt 0 14 gt where username username Specifies a new user up to 32 alphanumeric characters Enter a user name to change the settings of an existing account password password Specifies the new password up to 32 alphanumeric characters for this user privilege lt 0 14 gt Assigns a privilege level for the user 45 8 Command Modes There are three comman
254. ds IGMP Query packets to all ports The Switch then listens for IGMP Report packets and it records which port the messages came from It then delivers multicast traffic to only those ports from which it received a request to join a multicast group 29 3 Configuring IGMP Click IP Application IGMP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Each entry in the table is automatically created when you configure a new IP domain in the IP Setup screen refer to Section 7 6 on page 83 Figure 130 IP Application gt IGMP Num Active D Unknown Multicast Frame I Flooding 6 Drop Index Network Version 1 172 23 37 203 24 None x Apply Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 29 IGMP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 92 IP Application gt IGMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable IGMP on the Switch Note You cannot enable both IGMP snooping and IGMP at the same time Refer to Section 22 3 on page 172 for more information on IGMP snooping Unknown Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame Multicast Unknown multicast frames are addressed to multicast groups for which the Switch has Frame not recorded any group members Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Index This field displays an index number of an entry Network This field displays the IP do
255. e Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is USER DEFINED the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number e Port s This value depends on the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Ifthe Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number Ifthe Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 162 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header IPSEC_TUNNEL tunneling protocol uses this service AIM New ICQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service It is also used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BO
256. e Parameters Outgoing packet format for Egress port amp Tag C Untag Priority 0 DSCP TOS 0 Forwarding No change C Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change C Setthe packet s 802 1 priority C Send the packetto priority queue Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change Setthe packet s TOS field Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value C Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Action Send the packetto the mirror port Send the packet to the egress port Send the matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping or to be sent to the CPU to the egress port Setthe packet s VLAN ID Metering Enable Drop the packet Out of profile Change the DSCP value action Set Out Drop Precedence Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Coen cio GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the policy Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Classifier s This field displays the active classifier s you configure in the Classifier screen Select the classifier s to which this policy rule appli
257. e Chapter 16 Port Authentication Figure 70 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication OMT Port Authentication Active O Name Prefix Password zyxel Timeout 0 Port Active i 1 C 2 7 3 a 4 1 5 r1 6 1 7 1 8 C cass o e a E a uA NI ug NII eii NZ NZE NUM LLL e Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Name Prefix Type the prefix that is appended to all MAC addresses sent to the RADIUS server for authentication You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters If you leave this field blank then only the MAC address of the client is forwarded to the RADIUS server Password Type the password the Switch sends along with the MAC address of a client for authentication with the RADIUS server You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters Timeout Specify the amount of time before the Switch allows a client MAC address that fails authentication to try and authenticate again Maximum time is 3000 seconds When a client fails MAC authentication its MAC address is learned by the MAC address table with a status of denied The timeout period
258. e List of Figures List of Figures Figure TBackbole ADIIESSUDE aires tdci pans se Fat aia oe ma eR A BL apre de ea rte En dad 38 Figure 2 Bridging FMC GMO a caceti Mm 38 Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application ecce eere nnne 39 Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example 11 crei sep rtt rrr ue pL R PRAISE eK EE RPM AER RER ABA EAS 40 Figure 3 Atlaching BUDDOE Foel qisspeudsetiqieuasm erp nS NE FEED ME C PIN RR AU HAE RROLUA 41 Figure 8 Attaching the Mounting Blaekefe ssaicecsesc ias eere eterirt be cer tbe rri ck crabe iet x reote bb ac LL ened 43 Figura 7 Mounting the Switchon a Raek sosceiosi haiti isst beer tad ei rap bap Enen eiu PARI Rp rca BU RE FE Ed 43 Front Panel GS 4024 45 Front Panel GS 4012F 45 Figure 10 Transceiver Installation Example 1 usessedu ceo rrarti ena torre e br FRU BEP LE corteo RREt HALE ERE p EE 47 Figure Ti Installed Transceiver tn 48 Figure 12 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example c cic cc ss0ccsccassnecssscesnosedsanassnesstnnesanssddanatoossdeachannsdaa 48 Figure T3 Transceiver Removal Example cicdieasnciuateniieaieidetel aA 48 Rear Panel GS 4012F 49 Rear Panel GS 4024 49 Rear Panel GS 4012F DC Model 49 Rear Panel GS 4024 DC Model 49 Figura 18 Web Configurator Login auuudesensiisccetiaoprtetud nnna chu E Eaa A AEAEE NEANS sd Wok Salawbe Rub IUE 56 Figure 19 Web Configurator Home Screan SAMUS csiicccsesssnecusssneecssasinnraccaserin coausttereasernesie
259. e Network This field displays the IP address and the subnet mask bits of an IP routing domain that is associated to a virtual router VRID This field displays the ID number of the virtual router VR Status This field displays the status of the virtual router This field is Master indicating that this Switch functions as the master router This field is Backup indicating that this Switch functions as a backup router This field displays Init when this Switch is initiating the VRRP protocol or when the Uplink Status field displays Dead Uplink Status This field displays the status of the link between this Switch and the uplink gateway This field is Alive indicating that the link between this Switch and the uplink gateway is up Otherwise this field is Dead This field displays Probe when this Switch is check for the link state Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 34 VRRP 34 3 VRRP Configuration The following sections describe the different parts of the VRRP Configuration screen 34 3 1 IP Interface Setup Before configuring VRRP first create an IP interface or routing domain in the IP Setup screen see the Section 7 6 on page 83 for more information Cl
260. e Section 45 12 3 on page 343 copy running config Backs up running configuration to 13 tftp ip the specified TFTP server with the remote file specified file name running config Clones copies the attributes 13 interface port from the specified port to other channel port ports Xport list running config bandwidth limit Copies the specified attributes 13 interface port a from one port to other ports channel port Xport list tftp config index Restores configuration with the 13 ip remote specified filename from the file specified TFTP server to the specified configuration file on the router flash ip Restores firmware via TFTP 13 lt remote file gt disable Exits Enable or privileged mode 13 Accesses Enable or privileged 0 enable mode Enables the highest privilege level for executing commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 138 Command Summary Enable Mode continued snooping database default DHCP snooping database COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE lt 0 14 gt Accesses Enable mode 0 commands up to the privilege level specified erase running config Resets to the factory default 13 settings help Displays help information for this 13 command interface port Resets to the factory default 13 channel port settings on a per port basis and list ba
261. e Switch Syntax port access authenticator port access authenticator lt port list gt port access authenticator lt port list gt reauthenticate port access authenticator lt port list gt reauth period lt reauth period gt where port access authenticator Enables port authentication on the Switch port access authenticator lt port list gt Specifies which ports require authentication reauthenticate Enables reauthentication on the port reauth period lt reauth Specifies how often a client has to re enter his or her period gt username and password to stay connected to the port An example is shown next GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 47 Configuration Mode Commands Specify RADIUS server 1 with IP address 10 10 10 1 port 1890 and the string secretKey as the password See Section 47 9 1 on page 392 for more information on RADIUS server commands Specify the timeout period of 30 seconds that the Switch will wait for a response from the RADIUS server Enable port authentication on ports 4 to 8 Activate reauthentication on the ports Specify 1800 seconds as the interval for client reauthentication sysname config radius server host 1 10 10 10 1 acct port 1890 key secretKey sysname config radius server timeout 30 sysname config port access authenticator sysname config port access authenticator 4 8 sysname config port access authenticator 4 8 reauthenticate sysname
262. e and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date yyyy mm dd Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Daylight Saving Time Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall wnen many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time is displayed in the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday Mar
263. e da oven teles Up REI ui AE RU 282 Figure 173 Access CONVO ee 285 Figure 174 SNMP Management Model essent trinkt mhi i c tta nba LR Fc 286 gi ART e Perusij dee c mE 292 Figure 1768 Access Contra SNMP TESDCOFOUD 151r GERE RR Eae a bd a Ep d dd bo pex isa duod 294 Figure 177 Access Control Logins aoo cun Spaces Hoes sae Pobod i ad ER pa DR eto ctu ba x en ur e 295 Figure 178 SSH Communication Exemple 22 ocio pret rper ttt tpe prt ttn nn peto epe prt enne en ER 296 zs riii Poclbusce 296 Figure 190 HTIPS ANN ee 298 Figure 181 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer escena 298 Figure 182 Security Certificate 1 Netscape sees enna nnne renta nna nni th ka naa ene M ARA naan MAR ALEX MRRA 299 Figure 183 Security Certificate 2 Celica ceste bkn tae tetulexsei tu been to berec ota Epp LE Pug aa 299 Figure 184 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection ccccccccccesesecccceeessecceeeeensecceeeesseeceeenneees 300 Figure 185 Access Control Service Access Control eee eeu esse aeree than ken ta nnn kata a an aa Eun k 300 Figure 186 Access Control Remote Management oacssseeienr eee hirta tte aaa uann 301 ECCE TEELooD D rr 303 Figs IOS ISI E e E EE distin ee caia ceva ian coda av E er errr errr ter todos 306 Figure 189 Syslog Server SEP acusscssecesscesusisessizabasceesescustcasshd Apee eeu plz maie epa i d Ane ea Epid a 307 Figure 190 Clust
264. e network For the example network configure two DHCP client pools on the Switch for the DHCP clients in the RD and Sales networks n the web configurator clic CEAN Setting Status 1 Inthe web configurator click IP Application and DHCP in the vD 2 navigation panel and click the DHCP Status Fia s elay VLAN link Server Client IP Pool Starting Addi 192 168 2 100 2 Inthe VLAN Setting screen escent Size of Client IP Pool 66 specify the ID of the VLAN to IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 which the DHCP clients belong Default Gateway 19215821 S 72 235 the starting IP address pool Rae nenei UEA Secondary DNS Server 172 23 5 2 subnet mask default gateway Relay address and the DNS server Remon T namar dd Remote DHCP Server 2 a ress es Remote DHCP Server 3 3 Click Add to save the settings to Relay Agent Information I option s2 Information EF Gs 401 er the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost XS ea GISEE when the Switch s power is turned off GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 5 1 3 Creating a VLAN VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members In this example you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2 Figure 24 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN PTS 6 D ne acm 1 Click Advanced
265. e status of the cluster 3 addr gt member s cpu utilization Displays the CPU utilization 0 statistics on the Switch dhcp relay vlan id Displays DHCP relay settings server Displays DHCP server settings 3 server vlan id Displays DHCP server settings in 3 a specified VLAN smart relay Displays global DHCP relay 3 settings snooping Displays DHCP snooping 3 configuration on the Switch snooping binding Displays the DHCP binding table 3 snooping database Displays DHCP snooping 3 database update statistics and settings snooping database Displays DHCP snooping 3 detail database update statistics in full detail form diffserv Displays general DiffServ settings ethernet oam discovery port Displays OAM configuration 3 list details and operational status of the specified ports ethernet oam statistics port Displays the number of OAM 3 list packets transferred for the specified ports GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 337 Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 138 Command Summary Enable Mode continued information COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE ethernet oam summary Displays the configuration details 3 of each OAM activated port garp Displays GARP information 3 hardware monitor lt C F gt Displays current hardware monitor 0 information with the specified temperature unit Celsius C
266. e system Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Changed Times Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Instance These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mapping In other words which VLANs run on each spanning tree instance Instance This field displays the MSTI ID VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI MSTI Select the MST instance settings you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root Switch Internal Cost This is the path cost from the root port in this MST instance to the regional root Switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the MST instance GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Bandwidth Control This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen 12 1 Bandwidth Control Overview Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port 12 1 1 CIR and PIR The Committed Information Rate CIR is the guaranteed
267. each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that 1s a port through which a data packet leaves for both ports Port based VLANS are specific only to the Switch on which they were created BES When you activate port based VLAN the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN BES In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter 1 as the VID The port based VLAN setup screen is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports 8 8 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen and then click VLAN from the navigation panel to display the next screen Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected Figure 41 p All connected Setting Wizard Incoming sss BODDE e e oo EDS onn sb bbbbblblblblbls e e bjblblblb s s ee sb bbb bbiblblblbls e e e e BRRL e ee sb bbbbbliblblblbls e e e e HERBE e 55 DEDEN o e o HEEE o HEEE BEEBE o gt gt BEEBE o o o o BS BIB o e BEBE e o 2 355 e 2 e e BEEBE 0099590 DEEE BEBEBE o gt gt BEBBE o o o BIS 2bb bP Pp BIRIBIB Be gt e e e DARRE e e e e ze eee PBIRIR Ble gt e e e BRI Be eo 5 2bb b gt 2 BIRR Be gt o e e DARRE e e e e e v e e e EE gt gt o GBB oos gt eee e
268. eal Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix C Com
269. eceive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Maximum hops Enter the number of hops between 1 and 255 in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged Configuration Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 characters of an MST region Revision Number Enter a number to identify a region s configuration Devices must have the same revision number to belong to the same region Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance Use this section to configure MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance settings Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch The Switch supports instance numbers 0 16 Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance The lower the number the more likely the Swit
270. ection is established between two remote hosts Figure 179 How SSH Works Internet 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server The server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control 2 Encryption Method Once the identification 1s verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use 3 Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client then sends its authentication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server 36 6 SSH Implementation on the Switch Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods DES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time 36 6 1 Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer Windows or Linux operating system that is used to
271. ed Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP susessss 121 Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP seen 123 Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP sesssssssssss 125 Table 31 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control cccccccccceccecssssssseseeseceeeceseeeeeeeeeesesaeaesaaeseessens 128 Table 32 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control sss 130 Table 33 Advanced Application gt Mirroring uitiis o diet ea aot ra ex b or o t ttd 132 Table 34 Link Aggregation ID Local SwWItGh ieu isse e trn hu hn ke ann ak nnne pna ka naa 134 Table 35 Link Aggregation ID Peer SWIGON iuiecesesnc tenerent teria adde dber aaeeea E eese t vk PERPE uois nOA 134 Table 36 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status ssssssssse emm 134 Table 37 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting 136 Table 38 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP 137 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 34 List of Tables Table 39 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1X sse 144 Table 40 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication esesssss 145 Table 41 Advanced Application gt Port Sec
272. ed changes are erased after you reboot the Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 35 Maintenance 35 4 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off It also allows you to load configuration one Config 1 or configuration two Config 2 when you reboot Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load configuration one The following screen displays Figure 169 Reboot System Confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer x 2 Are you sure you want to reboot system E Cancel 2 Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the Switch s configuration Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the Switch 35 5 Firmware Upgrade Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device O Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device From the Maintenance screen display the Firmware Upgrade screen as shown next Figure 170 Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Maintenance To upgrade the internal switch firmware browse the location of the binary BIN file and click Upgrade butt File Path Browse Rebooting
273. ed on the Switch then the Switch will not add the tag Priority refers to the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic based on the class of service CoS the customer has paid for On the Switch configure priority level of inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VID is the VLAN ID SP VID is the VID for the second service provider s VLAN tag 21 3 1 Frame Format The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame a single tagged 802 1Q frame customer and a double tagged 802 1Q frame service provider is shown next Configure the fields as highlighted in the Switch VLAN Stacking screen Table 50 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format DA SA Len Data FCS Untagged Etype Ethernet frame DA SA TPID Priorit VID Len Data FCS IEEE 802 10 y Etype customer tagged frame DA SA SPTPI Priority VID TPID Priorit VID Len Data FCS Double tagged D y Etype frame Table 51 802 1Q Frame DA Destination Address Priority 802 1p Priority SA Source Address Len Length and type of Ethernet frame Etype GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking Table 51 802 1Q Frame SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol IDentifier Data Frame data VID VLAN ID FCS Frame Check Sequence 21 4 Co
274. ed on the same VLAN group across different IP routing domains that is you cannot have duplicate VIDs for different DVMRP configurations see Figure 135 on page 247 Active Select Active to enable DVMRP on this IP routing domain Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh 30 3 1 DVMRP Configuration Error Messages You must have IGMP RIP enabled when you enable DVMRP otherwise you see the screen as in the next figure Figure 133 DVMRP IGMP RIP Not Set Error error Error IGMP should be turned on before setting DVMRP Back When you disable IGMP but DVMRP is still active you also see another warning screen Figure 134 DVMRP Unable to Disable IGMP Error ac ng Warning DVMRP is still enabled DVMRP will not function if IGMP is turned off Back Each IP routing domain DVMRP configuration must be in a different VLAN group otherwise you see the following screen Figure 135 DVMRP Duplicate VID Error Message Error Error Routing domains with same VID can t enable DVMRP simultaneously Back GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 247 Chapter 30 DVMRP 30 4 Default DVMRP
275. egress 48 2 6 gvrp Syntax gvrp GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch An example is shown next Enable the IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN command to configure tagged VLAN for the Switch Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Enable GVRP on the interface sysname config vlanlq gvrp sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface gvrp 48 2 7 ingress check The ingress check command enables the device to discard incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member Syntax ingress check An example is shown next Enable ports 1 3 4 and 5 for configuration Enable ingress checking on the interface sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface ingress check 48 2 8 frame type Syntax frame type lt all tagged untagged gt GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 48 Interface Commands where lt all tagged Choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames just untagged tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Enable ingress checking on the ports Enable tagged frame typ
276. ember switch fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s configuration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch 39 3 Clustering Management Configuration Use this screen to configure clustering management Click Configuration from the Cluster Management screen to display the next screen GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 39 Cluster Management Figure 194 Clustering Management Configuration c Clusterin anagement Configuration Status Clustering Manager Active Vv Name Master VID fi Apply Cancel Clustering Candidate 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 GS 2024 List Password Add Cancel Refresh Index MacAddr Name Model Remove Remove Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 130 Clustering Management Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon A appears i
277. emory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP to display the screen shown next See Section 15 2 on page 133 for more information on dynamic link aggregation GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Figure 63 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol Link Aggregation Setting Active O System Priority 65535 Group ID LACP Active T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 TB LI ET DELETED Port LACP Timeout c2 ce 4 seconds 4 seconds seconds z seconds co c Y seconds v seconds 30 v seconds 4 Co Ch 4 CO hb co ids 30 v seconds co ce Y seconds p P cw wr ww XP Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION aa Note Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable Control dynamic link aggregation Protocol Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Ag
278. en to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 213 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Figure 108 ARP Inspection Log Status ARP Inspection Log Status Status Clearing log status table Apply Total number of logs 0 index Port VID Sender Mac Sender IP Num Pkts Reason Time The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 ARP Inspection Log Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Clearing log status table Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet Total number of logs This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet If one or more log messages are dropped due to unavailable buffer there is an entry called overflow with the current number of dropped log messages Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message Port This field displays the source port of the ARP packet VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of the ARP packet Sender Mac This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet Num Pkts This field displ
279. enng Application EXOmID iuis icr nest tme ERUEE Pe rbv neis aa s anadla aiaa Ix ria iade coi 310 Figure 191 Cluster Management SAUS ere 310 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen 311 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch 312 Figure 194 Clustering Management Configuration 1 necne nnne nnne anta 313 igure T9S MAC Table Fw iisscusodiptpXe en vU Hb OSA RUSO GA EEEV AOL EBUHR REEL RU LEE EU uas 315 Pe TORTE TIO dem 316 Figure 197 IP Table FOwChant e a aa ai iaa a 317 Foue cc uds TTE I T IUS LT TUTTI 318 Xie Fe St PIDE saana tobovetiuDe asain 320 Fia 200 ROmNa TE SAUS 321 Foue DUNT Congue CONE e cer 323 Figure 202 no port access authenticator Command Example cccceeeeeeeeceecaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenesaeees 389 MF Peper Popp BOOR eio oak ny RE ERU ear aaa ee ed oodd ep La qu os i RM Li al ele 416 rie 204 iuc cuti ctm 417 Figure 205 INGA ds ri e 418 Figure 206 Pop up Blocker SUGGS Lesen a nds Ret aa CM edi bn iL RA FO iq ES MD CEU GE e Mk x nO EE 418 gi Pear WIRING SANTIS dee a 419 Figure 208 Security Settings Java GOD sii enden Mo tein c doas dot ecd a tr rer eR d 420 Figure 209 Security Selngs Java aser p opa eda ERR ea a adc Ea a ERR EO Ed d 420 Figure 210 CEPI 421 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide List of Figures Figure Z 11 Network Number and Host ID 5 ss sassesesssscnssestsscaanes
280. er Displays RADIUS server settings remote management Displays all secured client information index Displays the specified secured client information router dvmrp Displays DVMRP settings igmp Displays global IGMP settings ospf Displays OSPF settings ospf area Displays OSPF area settings ospf network Displays OSPF network or interface settings w Ww W vj Ww ospf redistribute Displays OSPF redistribution settings ospf virtual link Displays OSPF virtual link settings rip Displays global RIP settings vrrp Displays VRRP settings running config Displays current operating configuration interface port channel port list gt bandwidth limit Displays current operating configuration on a port by port basis Optionally specifies which settings are displayed help Displays the help information for this command service control Displays service control settings snmp server Displays SNMP settings spanning tree config Displays Spanning Tree Protocol STP settings ssh Displays general SSH settings GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 138 Command Summary Enable Mode continued command COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE
281. er manager switch as shown in the following example GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 39 Cluster Management Figure 193 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch C gt ftp 192 168 1 1 Connected to 192 168 1 1 220 Switch FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00 58 46 1970 User 192 168 0 1 none admin 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp 1s 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for LIST W W w rw rw rw W W w rw rw rw 1 owner group l owner group 1 owner group l owner group 226 File sent OK ftp 297 bytes received in 0 00Seconds 297000 00Kbytes sec ftp bin 200 Type I OK 3042210 Jul 01 12 00 ras 393216 Jul 01 12 00 config O Jul 01 12 00 fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 O Jul 01 12 00 config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 ftp put 3701t0 bin fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File received OK ftp 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44Kbytes sec ftp The following table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 129 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 Ts Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 3601t0 bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster m
282. ersion compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP 36 3 3 SNMP Traps The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs The following tables outline the SNMP traps by category An OID Object ID that begins with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 is defined in private MIBs Otherwise it is a standard MIB OID Table 113 SNMP System Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION coldstart coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the Switch is turned on warmstart warmstart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the Switch restarts fanspeed FanSpeedEventOn GS 4012F This trap is sent when the fan speed 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 1 goes above or below the normal GS 4024 operating range 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 1 FanSpeedEventClear GS 4012F This trap is sent when the fan speed 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 2 returns to the normal operating GS 4024 range 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 2 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 287 Chapter 36 Access Control Table 113 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION temperature TemperatureEventOn GS 4012F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 1 temperature goes above or below the GS 4024 normal operating range 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 1 TemperatureEventClear GS
283. es To select more than one classifier press SHIFT and select the choices at the same time Parameters Set the fields below for this policy You only have to set the field s that is related to the action s you configure in the Action field General VLAN ID Specify a VLAN ID number Egress Port Type the number of an outgoing port Outgoing Select Tag to add the specified VID to packets on the specified outgoing port packet Otherwise select Untag format for Egress port Priority Specify a priority level DSCP Specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 TOS Specify the type of service TOS priority level Metering You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow Traffic that exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated in cases where the network is congested is called out of profile traffic Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second Kbps Enter a number between 1 and 1000000 Out of Specify a new DSCP number between 0 and 63 if you want to replace or remark the Profile DSCP number for out of profile traffic DSCP Action Specify the action s the Switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets Select Discard the packet to drop the packets Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain the frames that were marked to be dropped before
284. es for VLANs that do not have this port as a member GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 8 3 Port VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices Refer to the following figure Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 33 Port VLAN Trunking c E N P d w v v2 N o vi v2 8 4 Select the VLAN Type Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting Switch Setup screen Figure 34 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type L Switch Setup e VLAN Type naim C Port Based 8 5 Static VLAN Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be sentto a VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not blocked from a VLAN gr
285. es on the interface sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface ingress check sysname config interface frame type tagged 48 2 9 weight Syntax weight wtl lt wt2 gt lt wt8 gt where wtl wt2 Sets the interface WFQ weighting A weight value of one to eight is eer given to each variable from wt 1towt 8 An example is shown next Enable WRR queuing on ports 2 and 6 to 8 Enable port 2 and ports 6 to 8 for configuration Set the queue weights from QO to Q7 sysname configure sysname config interface port channel 2 6 8 sysname config interface wrr sysname config interface weight 87654321 48 2 10 egress set Syntax egress set lt port list gt where lt port list gt Sets the outgoing traffic port list for a port based VLAN An example is shown next Enable port based VLAN tagging on the Switch Enable ports one three four and five for configuration GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 48 Interface Commands Set the outgoing traffic ports as the CPU 0 seven 7 and eight 8 sysname config vlan type port based sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface egress set 0 7 8 48 2 11 qos priority Syntax qos priority lt 0 7 where 0 7 gt Sets the quality of service priority for a port An example is shown next Enable ports one three
286. et OAM on the Switch 13 igmp filtering Disables IGMP filtering on the Switch 13 profile name Removes the specified IGMP filtering profile 13 profile name start address ip end address ip Clears the settings of the specified IGMP filtering profile 13 igmp snooping Disables IGMP snooping 13 8021p priority Disables changing the priority of outgoing IGMP control packets 13 vlan vlan id Removes IGMP snooping configuration on the specified VLAN 13 ip Sets the management IP address to the default value 13 route ip mask Removes a specified IP static route 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE route lt ip gt Enables a specified IP static 13 mask inactive route lacp Disables the link aggregation 13 control protocol dynamic trunking on the Switch logins lt name gt Disables login access to the 14 specified name loopguard Disables loopguard on the 13 Switch mac authentication Disables MAC authentication on 13 the Switch mac authentication Resets the MAC authentication 13 timeout timeout value on the Switch to 0 mac filter name name mac Enables the specified MAC filter 13 lt mac addr gt vlan
287. et oam Disables Ethernet OAM remote 13 remote loopback loop back capability on the supported port s flow control Disables flow control on the 13 port s ge spq Disables strict priority queuing on 13 the Gigabit ports gvrp Disable GVRP on the port s 13 igmp filtering Disables IGMP filtering 13 profile igmp group limit Disables IGMP group limitation 13 igmp immediate Disables the IGMP immidiate 13 leave leave function inactive Enables the port s on the Switch 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 371 Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 140 interface port channel Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE ingress check Disables ingress checking on the 13 port s intrusion lock Disables intrusion lock on a port 13 so that a port can be connected again after you disconnected the cable ipmc egress Disables the port s from 13 untag vlan vlan removing specified VLAN tag from id IP multicasting packets before forwarding loopguard Disables the loop guard feature 13 on the port s mac Disables MAC authentication via 13 authentication a RADIUS server on the port s mirror Disables port mirroring on the 13 port s multicast limit Disables multicast limit on the 13 port s trtom Disables 2 rate 3 color marking 13 on the port s vlan trunking Disables VLAN trunking on the 13 port s pvid vlan id The def
288. evice and an OSPF network An interface has state information an IP address and subnet mask associated with it When you configure an OSPF interface you first set an interface to transmit OSPF traffic and add the interface to an area You can configure a virtual link to establish maintain connectivity between a non backbone area and the backbone The virtual link must be configured on both layer 3 devices in the non backbone area and the backbone 28 1 4 OSPF and Router Elections The OSPF protocol provides for automatic election of Designated Router DR and Backup Designated Router BDR on network segments The DR and BDR keep track of link state updates in their area and make sure LSAs are sent to the rest of the network In most cases the default DR BDR election is fine but in some situations it must be controlled In the following figure only router A has direct connectivity with all the other routers on the network segment Routers B and C do not have a direct connection with each other Therefore they should not be allowed to become DR or BDR Only router A should become the DR GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF Figure 120 OSPF Router Election Example A Ta ue You can assign a priority to an interface which determines whether this router will be elected to bea DR or BDR The router with the highest priority becomes the DR while a router with a priority of 0 does not participate in router elections In Figure
289. ey up to eight printable ASCII character long in this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes made in this table 34 3 2 VRRP Parameters This section describes the VRRP parameters 34 3 2 1 Advertisement Interval BS The master router sends out Hello messages to let the other backup routers know that it is still up and running The time interval between sending the Hello messages is the advertisement interval By default a Hello message is sent out every second If the backup routers do not receive a Hello message from the master router after this interval expires it is assumed that the master router is down Then the backup router with the highest priority becomes the master router All routers participating in the virtual router must use the same advertisement interval 34 3 2 2 Priority Configure the priority level 1 to 254 to set which backup router to take over in case the master router goes down The backup router with the highest priority will take over The priority of the VRRP router that owns the IP address es associated with the virtual router is 255 34 3 2 3 Preempt Mode If the master router is unavailable a
290. f not applicable to clear the fields above Clear Click this to clear the fields above Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how long the binding is valid Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 4 DHCP Snooping Use this screen to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping Figure 102 DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping d Database Status Description Agent URL Write delay timer Abort timer Agent running Delay timer expiry Abort timer expiry Last succeeded time Last failed time Last failed reason Total attempts Startup failures Successful transfers Failed transfers Successful reads Failed reads Successful writes Failed
291. figuration file If you want to reset the second configuration file use the write memory command again with the specified index number The following example resets both configuration files to the factory default settings sysname erase running config sysname write memory sysname write memory 2 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Configuration Mode Commands This chapter describes how to enable and configure your Switch s features using commands For more background information see the feature specific chapters which proceed the commands chapters 47 1 Change the Out of Band Management IP Address Use the ip address command to change the IP address of the out of band management port on the Switch Syntax ip address lt IP Adress gt lt Subnet Mask gt An example is shown next Change the out of band Management IP address to 192 168 0 2 View updated settings sysname config ip address 192 168 0 2 255 255 255 0 sysname config exit sysname show ip Management IP Address IP 192 168 0 2 Netmask 255 255 255 0 VID 0 IP Interface IP 192 168 2 1 Netmask 255 255 255 0 VID 2 See example in Section 48 2 on page 395 for information on how to change the in band management IP address for the Switch 47 2 Enabling IGMP Snooping To enable IGMP snooping on the Switch Enter igmp snooping and press ENTER You can also set how to treat traffic from an unknown multicast group by typing the
292. filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet filter mac addr gt vlan lt vlan id gt Displays the current list of MAC address filters based on the MAC address or VLAN ID contained in the filter interface port channel port list gt Displays the ARP inspection settings for the specified port s log Displays the log settings configured on the Switch It also displays the log entries recorded on the Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 138 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE statistics Displays statistics regarding the 3 total number of ARP packets received on the Switch statistics vlan Displays statistics regarding the 3 lt vlan list gt total number of ARP packets received on the Switch based on the VLAN s specified vlan lt vlan list gt Displays ARP inspection settings 3 for the specified VLAN s classifier Displays all classifier related 3 information name Displays the specified classifier 3 related information cluster Displays cluster management 3 status candidates Displays cluster candidate 3 information member Displays the MAC address of the 3 cluster member s member config Displays the configuration of the 3 cluster member s member mac mac Displays th
293. first time the current bindings change after an update vlan vlan Specifies the VLAN IDs for 13 list VLANs you want to enable DHCP snooping on vlan lt vlan Sets the Switch to add the 13 list gt system name to DHCP requests information that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN vlan lt vlan Sets the Switch to add the slot 13 list gt option number port number and VLAN ID to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN diffserv Enables DiffServ 13 dscp lt 0 63 gt Sets the DSCP to IEEE 802 1q 13 priority lt 0 7 gt mappings ethernet Enables Ethernet OAM on the 13 oam Switch exit Exits from the CLI 13 garp join lt 100 65535 gt Configures GARP time settings 13 leave lt msec gt leaveall lt msec gt GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 347 Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued mask of the out of band management port COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE help Displays help information 0 history Displays a list of previous 0 command s that you have executed hostname lt name_string gt Sets the Switch s name for 13 identification purposes https cert regeneration Re generates a certificate 13 lt rsa dsa gt timeout lt 0 65535 gt Sets the HTTPS timeout period 13 igmp Enables IGMP filtering on the 13 filtering Switc
294. flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 19 1 2 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule 19 2 Configuring Policy Rules You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen Refer to Section 18 2 on page 151 for more information Click Advanced Applications gt Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 75 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule C Policy Active rH Name Classifier s General Metering VLAN ID Bandwidth Kbps Egress Port fi e
295. fo This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information about the Switch Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as VLAN type MAC address learning GARP and priority queues IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address subnet mask necessary for Switch management and DNS domain name server and set up to 64 IP routing domains Port Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure settings for individual Switch ports Advanced Applica tion VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu You can also configure a protocol based VLAN or a subnet based VLAN in these screens Static MAC This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static MAC addresses for a Forwarding port These static MAC addresses do not age out Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP MRSTP MSTP to Protocol prevent network loops Bandwidth This link takes you to a screen where you can cap the maximum bandwidth allowed Control from spec
296. four and five for configuration Set the IEEE 802 1p quality of service priority as four 4 sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface qos priority 4 48 2 12 name Syntax name lt port name string gt where lt port name string gt Sets a name for your port interface An example is shown next Enable port one for configuration Set a name for the port sysname config interface port channel 1 sysname config interface name Test 48 2 13 speed duplex Syntax speed duplex auto 10 half 10 full 100 half 100 ful11 1000 full GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 48 Interface Commands where lt auto 10 half 10 Sets the duplex mode half or full and speed 10 100 or 1000 Surry ne EES Mbps of the connection on the port Selecting auto auto pu ete negotiation makes one port able to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Set the speed to 100 Mbps in half duplex mode sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface speed duplex 100 half 48 2 14 test You can perform an interface loopback test on specified ports The test returns Passed or Failed An example is shown next Select ports 3 6 for internal loopback test Execute the
297. fy a destination select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Layer 3 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier DSCP Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided IP Select an IP protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value Protocol Refer to Table 45 on page 155 for more information You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type This means that the Switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections Source IP Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation Address Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Address Prefix E Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Destination IP Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Address Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Address Prefix cud Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP
298. g Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Broadcast Storm Control This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature 13 1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports When the maximum number of allowable broadcast multicast and or DLF packets is reached per second the subsequent packets are discarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast multicast and or DLF packets in your network You can specify limits for each packet type on each port Click Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 59 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast Storm DINH Active C Port Broadcast pkt s Multicast pkt s DLF pkt s OE seo WII MIU ts mip rp rp 80 rp rh rb r r o r v 5 ob bed of ob ob ob NUN mm ob ob sof J of of Apply Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Switch Clear this check box to disable this feature
299. g table describes the four classes of OSPF routers Table 84 OSPF Router Types TYPE DESCRIPTION Internal Router IR An Internal or intra area router is a router in an area Area Border Router An Area Border Router connects two or more areas ABR Backbone Router BR A backbone router has an interface to the backbone AS Boundary Router An AS boundary router exchanges routing information with routers in other ASes GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF The following figure depicts an OSPF network example The backbone is area 0 with a backbone router The internal routers are in area 1 and 2 The area border routers connect area 1 and 2 to the backbone Figure 119 OSPF Network Example 28 1 2 How OSPF Works Layer 3 devices exchange routing information to build synchronized link state database within the same AS or area They do this by exchanging Hello messages to confirm which neighbor layer 3 devices exist and then they exchange database descriptions DDs to create the link state database The link state database in constantly updated through LSAs Link State Advertisements The link state database contains records of router IDs their associated links and path costs Each device can then use the link state database and Dijkstra algorithm to compute the least cost paths to network destinations 28 1 3 Interfaces and Virtual Links An OSPF interface is a link between a layer 3 d
300. ges to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the RADIUS accounting server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for accounting is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this scree
301. ging This command displays the system logs The following figure shows an example sysname show logging 1 Thu Jan 1 00 02 08 1970 PPO5 WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up 2 Thu Jan 1 00 03 14 1970 INFO adjtime task pause 1 day 3 Thu Jan 1 00 03 16 1970 PPOf WAR SNMP TRAP 26 Event On Trap 4 Thu Jan 1 00 03 16 1970 PINI WAR SNMP TRAP 1 warm start 5 Thu Jan 1 00 03 16 1970 PINI WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up 6 Thu Jan 1 00 03 16 1970 PINI INFO main init completed 7 Thu Jan 1 00 00 13 1970 PP26 INFO adjtime task pause 1 day 8 Thu Jan 1 00 00 14 1970 PPOf WAR SNMP TRAP 26 Event On Trap 9 Thu Jan 1 00 00 14 1970 PINI WAR SNMP TRAP 0 cold start 10 Thu Jan 1 00 00 14 1970 PINI INFO main init completed 11 Thu Jan 1 00 00 04 1970 PP05 WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up 11 Thu Jan 1 00 00 04 1970 PP05 WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up Clear Error Log y n BES If you clear a log by entering y at the clear Error Log y n prompt you cannot view it again 46 2 4 show interface Syntax show interface port number 378 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 46 User and Enable Mode Commands This command displays statistics of a port The following example shows that port 2 is up and the related information sysname show interface 2 Port Info Port NO 2 Link 100M F Status FORWARDING LACP Disabled TxPkts 20 RxPkts 263 Errors Tx KBs s Rx KBs s Up Time T
302. gregation Control Protocol LACP System LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65 535 The switch with the lowest Priority system priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the higher the priority level Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk Port This field displays the port number GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Table 38 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them LACP Timeout Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set
303. gs and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard Figure 100 IP Source Guard c ONE eee Static Binding DHCP Snooping Arp Inspection Index Mac Address IP Address Lease Type VID Port 1 a1 12 12 12 12 01 172 23 37 222 inifinity static 1 18 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 IP Source Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding Mac Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how many days hours minutes and seconds the binding is valid for example 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still valid for 2 days 3 hours 4 minutes and 5 seconds This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid for example a static binding Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator dhcp snooping This binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports 24 3 IP Source Guard Static Binding Use this screen to manage
304. gs related to the Switch s DHCP server mode Index This is the index number VID This field displays the VLAN ID for which the Switch is a DHCP server Server Status This field displays the starting DHCP client IP address IP Pool Size This field displays the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to clients Relay Status mode This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch s DHCP relay Relay Mode This field displays VLAN s None if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent Global if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only VLAN followed by a VLAN ID if it is configured as a relay agent for specific 33 3 DHCP Server Status Detail Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and then click an existing index number of a DHCP server configuration to view the screen as shown Use this screen to view details regarding DHCP server settings configured on the Switch Figure 145 IP Application gt DHCP gt DHCP Server Status Detail Server Status Detai Start IP Address End IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Address Leases Index IP Address Timer 192 168 1 33 192 168 1 62 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 254 192 168 5 1 192 168 5 2 Hardware Address DHCP Status Hostname GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 33 DHCP The following table describes the labels in this s
305. gt queries lt 1 10 gt help Displays help information for this O GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 138 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE write memory Saves current configuration to the 13 configuration file the Switch is currently using lt index gt Saves current configuration to the 13 specified configuration file on the Switch 45 12 3 General Configuration Mode The following table lists the commands in Configuration or Config mode Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE aaa accounting commands Enables accounting of command 13 lt privilege gt sessions and specifies the stop only minimum privilege level for which fACAGSE command sessions should be recorded commands Enables sending accounting 13 lt privilege gt information for command stop only sessions to all configured tacacst accounting servers at the same broadcast time dotix start Enables accounting of IEEE 13 stop stop only 802 1x authentication sessions lt radius tacacs and specifies the mode and gt protocol method dotix lt start Enables sending accounting 13 stop stop only gt information for IEEE 802 1x lt radius tacacs authentication sessions to all gt broadcast configured accounting servers at the same time exec start Enables accounting of 13 stop
306. gure Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Changed Times Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide MO Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MSTP click MSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 11 1 5 on page 112 for more information on MSTP Figure 56 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP Status Active r1 Hello Time b seconds MAX Age jo seconds Forwarding Delay hs seconds Maximum hops oe Configuration Name 001 349000002 Revision Number w Apply Cancel Instance Instance E Bridge Priority 0 VLAN Range start Ena Add Remove Clear Enabled VLAN s E Port Active Prority Path Cost r a 1 m fize ho 2 r 28 9 3 128 fis 4 fize 9 5 O 128 19 6
307. gure depicts an example in which two switches share the network traffic Hosts in the two network groups use different default gateways Each switch is configured to backup a virtual router using VRRP You wish to configure switch A as the master router for virtual router VR1 and as a backup for virtual router VR2 On the other hand switch B is the master for VR2 and a backup for VR1 Figure 162 VRRP Configuration Example Two Virtual Router Network 192 168 1 1 mE 172 21 1 1 A VRID 7 1 192 168 1 20 I T 7 1 VR1 r et VRID 7 2 Default Gateway 192 168 1 21 Keeping the VRRP configuration in example for virtual router VR1 refer to Section 34 5 2 on page 274 you need to configure the VRRP Configuration screen for virtual router VR2 on each switch Configure the VRRP parameters on the switches as shown in the figures below Figure 163 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch A Active iv Name Example Network 192 158 1 1 24 Virtual Router ID Advertisement Interval lid Preempt Mode Priority 00 Uplink Gateway 72211300 Primary Virtual IP 32168121 Secondary Virtual IP noon 274 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 34 VRRP Figure 164 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch B Active Name Network Virtual Router ID Advertisement Interval Preempt Mode Priority Uplink Gateway Primary Virtual IP Secondar
308. h profile lt name gt Sets the range of multicast 13 start address lt ip gt address es in a profile end address lt ip gt igmp Enables IGMP snooping 13 snooping 8021p priority 0 7 Sets the 802 1p priority for 13 outgoing igmp snooping packets host timeout 1 16711450 Sets the host timeout value 13 leave timeout lt 1 16711450 gt Sets the leave timeout value 13 unknown multicast Sets how to treat traffic from 13 frame unknown multicast group lt drop flooding gt reserved Sets how to treat traffic 13 multicast group belonging to reserved multicast lt drop flooding gt groups vlan lt vlan id gt Specifies which VLANs to 13 perform IGMP snooping on lt vlan id gt name Allows you to set a name for a 13 lt name gt multicast VLAN mode Specifies whether the Switch 13 auto fixed should automatically learn the first 16 VLAN s that send multicast traffic via the Switch auto or whether the Switch will only perform IGMP snooping on the VLANs configured on the Switch interface port channel Enables a port or a list of ports 13 lt port list gt for configuration See Section 45 12 4 on page 368 for more details route domain lt ip Enables a routing domain for 13 address gt lt mask configuration See Section bits gt 45 12 5 on page 373 for more details ip address lt ip gt lt mask gt Sets the IP address and subnet 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Tab
309. h algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data SHA authentication is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user You can choose one of the following DES Data Encryption Standard is a widely used but breakable method of data encryption It applies a 56 bit key to each 64 bit block of data AES Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses a secret key AES applies a 128 bit key to 128 bit blocks of data Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 36 3 5 Configuring SNMP Trap Group From the SNMP screen click Trap Group to view the screen as shown Use the Trap Group screen to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Figure 176 Access Control SNMP Trap Group ORE g SNMP Setting Trap Destination IP z Type Options System coldstart warmstart fanspeed temperature voltage reset timesync intrusionlock loopguard Interface linkup linkdown autonegotiation
310. hapter 45 Introducing Commands Enter lt command gt help to display detailed sub commands and parameters sysname gt ping help Commands available ping lt ip host name gt lt in band out of band vlan lt vlan id gt size 0 1472 lt gt sysname gt Enter command to display detailed help information about the sub commands and parameters sysname gt ping lt ip host name gt destination ip address help Description of ping help sysname gt 45 10 Using Command History The Switch keeps a list of recently used commands available to you for reuse You can use any commands in the history again by pressing the up 4 or down Y arrow key to scroll through the previously used commands and press ENTER Use the history command to display the list of commands sysname history enable exit show ip history sysname gt 45 11 Saving Your Configuration After you set the Switch settings with the configuration commands use the write memory command to save the changes permanently The write memory Command is not available in User mode GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 331 Chapter 45 Introducing Commands BS You must save your changes after each CLI session All unsaved configuration changes are lost once you restart the Switch sysname write memory 45 11 1 45 11 2 Switch Configuration File When you configure the Switch u
311. he academic buildings VLAN 2 are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172 23 10 100 Figure 150 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs E DHCP 172 23 10 100 For the example network configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown Figure 151 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example VLAN Settir Status VID 2 c DHCP Status Sene Relay Server Client IP Pool Starting Address 000 0 Size of Client IP Pool EEUuYY IP Subnet Mask 9 9 0 0 Default Gateway MATAIRI Primary DNS Server 0 000 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 9 Relay Remote DHCP Server 1 172231 0 100 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Option 82 Information M GS 4012F Add Cancel Clear VID Type DHCP Status Delete 1 Relay 192 168 1 100 n Delete Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide VRRP This chapter shows you how to configure and monitor the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP on the Switch 34 1 VRRP Overview Each host on a network is configured to send packets to a statically configured default gateway this Switch The default gateway can become a single point of failure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP defined in RFC 2338 allows you to create redundant backup gateways to ensure that the default gateway of a host is always available In VRRP a virtual router VR represents a number of physical layer 3 devices An IP address is associated with t
312. he command interpreter 45 9 Getting Help The system includes a help facility to provide you with the following information about the commands List of available commands under a command group Detailed descriptions of the commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands 45 9 1 List of Available Commands Enter help to display a list of available commands and the corresponding sub commands sysname gt help Commands available help logout exit history enable show ip lt cr gt show hardware monito show system informat show alarm status show cpu utilization show version flash show version lt cr gt ping lt ip host name gt ping lt ip host name gt ping help r lt C F gt ion lt cr gt vlan lt vlan id gt traceroute ip host name cr traceroute ip host name vlan lt vlan id gt traceroute help ssh lt 1 2 gt lt user dest ip gt lt cr gt ssh 1 2 lt user dest ip gt command lt gt sysname gt Enter to display a list of commands you can use sysname gt enable Turn on privileged commands exit Exit from the EXEC help Description of the interactive help system history Show a list of previously run commands logout Exit from the EXEC ping Exec ping show Show system information ssh SSH client traceroute Exec traceroute sysname gt GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide C
313. he number of seconds between Hello message transmissions Preempt Mode Select this option to activate preempt mode Priority Enter a number between 1 and 254 to set the priority level The bigger the number the higher the priority Uplink Gateway Enter the IP address of the uplink gateway in dotted decimal notation The Switch checks the link to the uplink gateway Primary Virtual IP Enter the IP address of the primary virtual router in dotted decimal notation Secondary Virtual IP This field is optional Enter the IP address of a secondary virtual router in dotted decimal notation This field is ignored when you enter 0 0 0 0 Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes made in this table Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 271 Chapter 34 VRRP 34 4 VRRP Configuration Summary To view a summary of all VRRP configurations on the Switch scroll down to the bottom of the VRRP Configuration screen Figure 156 VRRP Configuration Summary Index Acte Name Network VRID Primary VIP Uplink Gateway Priority Delete 1 Yes Example 192 168 1 10 24 1 192 16
314. he virtual router A layer 3 device having the same IP address is the preferred master router while the other Layer 3 devices are the backup routers The master router forwards traffic for the virtual router When the master router becomes unavailable a backup router assumes the role of the master router until the master router comes back up and takes over The following figure shows a VRRP network example with the switches A and B implementing one virtual router VR1 to ensure the link between the host X and the uplink gateway G Host X is configured to use VR1 192 168 1 20 as the default gateway If switch A has a higher priority it is the master router Switch B having a lower priority is the backup router Figure 152 VRRP Example 1 192 168 1 1 B Default Gateway 192 168 1 20 VRID 7 1 192 168 1 20 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 267 Chapter 34 VRRP If switch A the master router is unavailable switch B takes over Traffic is then processed by switch B 34 2 VRRP Status Click IP Application VRRP in the navigation panel to display the VRRP Status screen as shown next Figure 153 VRRP Status ORE Configuration Index Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 192 158 1 1 24 1 Master Alive Poll Interval s 10 Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 105 VRRP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of a rul
315. help Displays help information 0 logout Exits from the CLI 0 exit Logs out from the CLI 0 history Displays a list of previously command s that you 0 have executed The Switch stores up to 256 commands in history Accesses Enable or privileged mode See 0 enable Section 45 12 2 on page 334 Enable the highest privilege level for executing commands 0 14 Accesses Enable mode commands up to the 0 privilege level specified See Section 45 12 2 on page 334 Accesses Enable or privileged mode See 0 Section 45 12 2 on page 334 show ip Displays IP related information 0 hardware monitor C F Displays current hardware monitor information with 0 the specified temperature unit Celsius C or Fahrenheit F system information Displays general system information 0 alarm status Display which alarms are enabled on the Switch as 0 well as the LED status of the alarms cpu utilization Display statistics about the utilization of the CPU 0 on the Switch version flash Display the version of the currently installed 0 firmware on the flash memory version cr Display the version of the currently running 0 firmware on the Switch ping lt IP host name gt Sends Ping request to an Ethernet device 0 XIP host name vlan Sends Ping request to an Ethernet device in the 0 lt vlan id gt specified VLAN s with the specified parameters size lt 0 1472 gt e help Displays command help information 0 traceroute lt ip host name gt Determi
316. hooting Accessing the Switch PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION cannot Make sure the ports are properly connected access the You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions Close Switch using other Telnet session s or try connecting again later Telnet Check that you have enabled Telnet service access If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details cannot The administrator username is admin The default administrator password is 1234 access the The username and password are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct web password and username using the proper casing If you have changed the password configurator and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file This restores all of the factory defaults including the password If you have configured more than one IP interface make sure another administrator is NOT logged into the web configurator on a different IP interface using the same account Check that you have enabled web service access If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details Your computer s and the Switch s IP addresses must be on the same subnet See the following section to check that pop up windows JavaScripts and Java permissions are allowed
317. how how to manage the configuration files GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 46 User and Enable Mode Commands 46 6 1 Using a Different Configuration File BS You can store up to two configuration files on the Switch Only one configuration file is used at a time By default the Switch uses the first configuration file with an index number of 1 You can set the Switch to use a different configuration file There are two ways in which you can set the Switch to use a different configuration file restart the Switch cold reboot and restart the system warm reboot Use the boot config command to restart the Switch and use a different configuration file if specified The following example restarts the Switch to use the second configuration file sysname boot config 2 Use the reload config command to restart the system and use a different configuration file if specified The following example restarts the system to use the second configuration file sysname reload config 2 When you use the write memory command without specifying a configuration file index number the Switch saves the changes to the configuration file the Switch is currently using 46 6 2 Resetting to the Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 1 Entererase running config to reset the current running configuration 2 Enter write memory to save the changes to the current con
318. ice CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 32 1 1 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and the remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused CU The following figure illustrates the DS field Figure 137 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bits CU 2 bits DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping The DSCP value determines the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets as it is forwarded across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources ca
319. ick IP Application VRRP and click the Configuration link to display the VRRP Configuration screen as shown next NN You can only configure VRRP on interfaces with unique VLAN IDs S indicated Routing domains with the same VLAN ID are not displayed in the table Figure 154 VRRP Configuration IP Interface OBST Status Index 1 Index Active Name 1 Yes Network 192 168 1 10 24 Active Name Network Virtual Router ID Adertisement Interval Preempt Mode Priority Uplink Gateway Primary Virtual IP Secondary Virtual IP Example 182 16 Network Authentication None v Apply Cancel r name 192 168 1 10 24 a Iv foo fa a foo d Add Cancel Clear VRID 8 1 10 24 1 Delete Cancel Primary VIP 192 168 1 1 Uplink Gateway Priority Delete 192 168 1 100 110 O The following table describes the labels in this screen GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 34 VRRP Table 106 VRRP Configuration IP Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an entry Network This field displays the IP address and number of subnet mask bit of an IP domain Authentication Select None to disable authentication This is the default setting Select Simple to use a simple password to authenticate VRRP packet exchanges on this interface Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field enter a password k
320. ick a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 27 on page 73 Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting Port Setup screen GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Table 6 Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber for the combo ports State If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 11 1 on page 109 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Clear Counter
321. id Sets the service provider VID of the specified port s 13 vlan trunking Enables VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the Switch 13 weight lt wtl gt lt wt2 gt lt wt8 gt A weight value of one to eight is given to each variable from wt 1 to wt 8 13 wrr Sets the port s to use Weighted Round Robin queuing 13 45 12 5 interface route domain Commands The following table lists the interface route domain commands in configuration mode Use these commands to configure the IP routing domains Table 141 interface route domain Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE interface route domain lt ip address gt lt mask bits gt Enables a routing domain for configuration 13 exit Exits from the interface routing domain command mode 13 ip dvmrp Enables this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch 13 igmp v1 v2 v3 Enables IGMP in this routing domain and specifies the version of the IGMP packets that the Switch should use 13 igmp robustness variable lt 2 255 gt Sets the igmp robustness variable on the Switch This variable specifies how susceptible the subnet is to lost packets 13 igmp query interval Sets the igmp que
322. ida deta sued durbic OEST E EEEREN 241 Figure 127 IGMP Version 1 EXIM PIG anssisccivecpeanaacdisssancaives batte EaR Etpa MIA E ERRARE dde vena 242 Figure 120 IGMF Vasrsion 2 EXSIIDIS xaiuseetiexuid dedo addendo d dc RR ao LR ERR dU Ras 242 Figure 129 IGMP Version 3 EXSIDES apaiieteseivetaibenecnasinit sitit eee scu textes ener leder Ee PR ARR EIN 243 Figure 130 IP err necpeic c 243 Foure 131 How DYMRP WORS airasia t ER breed EEEN EENAA ENEE LE p ERU FON ER EROS ARE SS EAM EE E Ead 246 Figure T2 VIP quidacisdsidipceibidie rat rta Hr PIRA ONE Cla eR RE rdPHhe PPM M HUI ERE 246 Figure 133 DY MRP IGMPIRIP Not Sel EMON 2 oido oen Un d dos d c en dod c v d a a 247 Figure 134 DVMRP Unable to Disable IGMP Error esee eene tn annua th nana nnn than 247 Figure 135 DVMREP Duplicate VID Error Message 2ccccecseree ttti oportet rotta po pd tan epe t tane oreet aa Eu uEde 247 2 Eod c aa 249 Figure 137 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field 1 uicrsiecessespevites basse vec eppure pc FREE PIER Eon e Uo quERr poU EAK Rn DUE 251 Figure 139 DINGerv NEIWOIK eee 252 Figure 139 TRTCM Color blind Mod 12i rarae nde Rn ana n tick Ra Ra XE ER A ERG IRR 253 Figure 140 TRTCM Coloreware Mode sissexasteniee se ee pud ee ukH aun Nan tpa d cet eua Ra bere eed oe Ei seen 253 Figure EE pu ITE T 254 Figure 142 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker
323. identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 151 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example OCTET OCTET OCTET Se TOE 192 168 1 2 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111114 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 152 Subnet Masks BINARY DECIMAL OCTET OCTET OCTET SUl OGEN 8 bitmask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bitmask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bitmask 11111111 11111111 11111141 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255
324. ieanccts 114 11 3 Spanning Tree ConTIgUEBIOD aduceuiaisdeccesesedo endure nez te tds etd ductu tod dd vn d added 115 11 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tres Protocol 2 serene rea t ennt i eas 116 11 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status uoce edet RR Phor attore ao EE RRPI CH FERE po Peek uaria cun 117 11 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol cceeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeceteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 119 11 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status sss 120 11 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol ausesssarirre cien bk E dea ehe re Noa F rre eoe kk E ded aE ER HA 122 11 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status assess erri SH REDI RE RR PER Eoo o ids 124 Chapter 12 rii d R rpr2 Hem TR 127 12 1 Bandwidti Caml Ls Aet 127 E el ects all PIR er e 127 12 2 Bandwidth Control Sep TT TO 127 Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control E 129 13 1 Broadcast Stormi Control Sebip sccsevsccsgaexsascccussssseencssnsvsanessvautiaciasssnsaouiameeesiagaanenadeda 129 Chapter 14 TAKE ONG P A A A E E E 131 14 T POr MCO SeU CE Um UU T T Em 131 Chapter 15 H k PRECIO ANGI ais T C I II M 133 15 1 LINK Aggregation OVERWEW Fe 133 12 2 Dee LIK POUSSE sinisen evi nesnnaservaaasseenanaanma sein RO EH REO UD SES 133 Tee ALAM POS aU Diet 134 15 3 LINK Aggregation SIRS serisidir dass etd suns iati docs Lk deus ERE 134 154 Link Aggregation Setting aues eda
325. ied port 13 hello time lt 1 10 gt maximum age 6 40 forward delay 4 30 Sets Hello Time Maximum Age and Forward Delay 13 help Displays help information 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE priority lt 0 61440 gt Sets the bridge priority of the Switch 13 ssh known hosts host ip 1024 ssh rsa ssh dsa key Adds a remote host to which the Switch can access using SSH service 13 storm control Enables broadcast storm control on the Switch 13 subnet based vlan Enables subnet based VLAN on the Switch 13 dhcp vlan override Sets the Switch to force the DHCP clients to obtain their IP addresses through the DHCP VLAN 13 name name source ip ip mask bits mask bits vlan vid priority 0 7 Specifies the name IP address subnet mask VLAN ID of the subnet based VLAN you want to configure along with the priority you want to assign to the outgoing frames for this VLAN 13 inactive Disables the subnet based VLAN 13 syslog Enables syslog logging 13 server lt ip address gt inactive Disables syslog logging to the specified syslog server 13 level 0 7 Sets the IP address of the syslog server and the seve
326. ified source s to specified destination s Broadcast Storm This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Control Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference Link Aggregation This link takes you to a screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link Port This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802 1x port Authentication authentication as well as MAC authentication for clients communicating via the Switch Port Security This link takes you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port Classifier This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to group packets based on the specified criteria Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to perform special treatment on the grouped packets Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with associated queue weights for each port VLAN Stacking This link takes you to a screen where you can configure VLAN stacking Multicast This link takes you to screens where you can configure various multicast features IGMP snooping and create multicast VLANs GS 4012F 4024 User s G
327. iguration 1 on the Switch System Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the Switch Note Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configuration on the Switch 35 2 Load Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Default to clear all Switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults 2 Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the factory defaults Figure 168 Load Factory Default Start Microsoft Internet Explorer E i 2 Are you sure you want to load factory default E Cancel 3 Inthe web configurator click the Save button to make the changes take effect If you want to access the Switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address 192 168 1 1 35 3 Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 1 on the Switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Alternatively click Save on the top right hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes to the current configuration BES Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently All unsav
328. igurea Statie VLAN M seid ccna idir inan iE a 95 9 5 4 Configure VLAN Porn Settings uxpecniateste siepe t a en ta nn ANIR 96 SO bien Based VANS eT 98 S 7 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN assu cci eitssea utr i dae dta nation ddnde rl ddp Ett de 99 ES POMDASE VLAN SEUD uenis EI pna El LEER bus FER RA kein pad ada Esta PEEL Ku Ka debe Lure DV Uhdeds 100 99 1 Conngure a TPort baspd VLAN cccisccidiadaannerteiaanass Foie nh Ebo Tena bue dana boi pe M ESI RR 101 Chapter 9 Static MAC Forward SeEUp iiois nonse kann RR A PARRERRERRA E RARE ORE Na ARSRaXRR AN Aa RSS KA E RASA RAS pA REP ACER n rA OK MR KNEE REA 105 BERI i er 105 9 2 Coniigurng Statie MAC Forwarding isebesdetebe va PREX AER Re PE rd uen A 105 Chapter 10 llt TREE UN IIT m 107 10 1 Comigure a Fillornng RUO esii 107 Chapter 11 Spann Tree PROLOG si sidsieiisscnidsisesdiveraiiviceivaacivacsidarasducssinsvasssntdiduansunvannssquitceadionccsiiansouies 109 Tel oS IF VERON ERO aces ea oe 109 VAAL STP TSIM nnn 109 TRE R SITR NOKE sascha ans Satie ait tial ute tier Galan ete ta eed tu LU ba E sia 110 TIT S PON SDNDBS qossticeiadetirbrbeden am m Hb bue eee ee eee 111 NELAUUUOdlrnig d 111 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 13 Table of Contents TETS NNTP e 112 11 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen Lu cesese peccet vesniendsesawesoensstsatanedssnatanneedenelaseid
329. ilable STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with STP other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network Loop Guard Use the loop guard feature to protect against network loops on the edge of your network IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Link Aggregation Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link Port Authentication and Security For security the Switch allows authentication using IEEE 802 1x with an external RADIUS server and port security that allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch Authentication and Accounting The Switch supports authentication and accounting services via RADIUS and TACACS AAA servers Device Management Use the web configurator or commands to easily configure the rich range of features on the Switch Port Cloning Use the port cloning feature to copy the settings you configure
330. ime x Active v Index Network Direction Version 1 172 23 19 95 24 Both RIP 1 2 192 168 1 1 24 Both RIP 1 Apply Cancel memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide System Status and Port Statistics This chapter describes the system status web configurator home page and port details screens 6 1 Overview The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details 6 2 Port Status Summary To view the port statistics click Status in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next Figure 26 Status Fort Status g Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s Up Time 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 a Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 I Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Ho ctm SE m RIP o P OI I LS a OO aE ES OE C E LS 8 Any cw FC za The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This identifies the Ethernet port Cl
331. imiting but also the most secure Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Check If this check box is selected for a port the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not include this port in its member set Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering PVID Enter a number between 1and 4094 as the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All Tag Only and Frame Type Untag Only Select All from the drop down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port All tagged frames will be dropped GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames be
332. in Timer to 300 milliseconds the Leave Timer to 800 milliseconds and the Leave All Timer to 11000 milliseconds sysname config garp join 300 leave 800 leaveall 11000 49 2 3 GVRP Timer Syntax show vlanlq gvrp This command shows the Switch s GVRP settings An example is shown next sysname show vlanlq gvrp GVRP Support gvrpEnable YES sysname 49 2 4 Enable GVRP Syntax vlanlq gvrp This command turns on GVRP in order to propagate VLAN information beyond the Switch 49 2 5 Disable GVRP Syntax no vlanlq gvrp This command turns off GVRP so that the Switch does not propagate VLAN information to other switches 49 3 Port VLAN Commands You must configure the Switch port VLAN settings in config interface mode 49 3 1 Set Port VID Syntax pvid lt VID gt where lt VID gt Specifies the VLAN number between 1 and 4094 This command sets the default VLAN ID on the port s GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 49 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands The following example sets the default VID to 200 on ports 1 to 5 sysname config interface port channel 1 5 sysname config interface pvid 200 49 3 2 Set Acceptable Frame Type Syntax frame type lt all tagged untagged gt where lt all tagged Specifies all Ethernet frames tagged and untagged only tagged untagged gt Ethernet frames or only untagged Ethernet frames This command sets the
333. ing database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator accounts The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for administrator accounts specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control gt Logins screen Select radius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the RADIUS Server Setup screen Select tacacs to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the TACACS Server Setup screen Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch Update Period This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch sends an update to the accounting server This is only valid if you select the start stop option for the Exec or Dot1x entries Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server s System Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events occur system boots up system shuts down system accounting is enabled system accounting is disabled Exec Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and logs out via the console port telnet or SSH
334. ion on RSTP Click RSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen Figure 52 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP OLE air Status Active Ei Bridge Priority 32768 Helio Time 2 Seconds MAX Age vo Seconds Forwarding Delay fi 5 Seconds Port Active Priority Path Cost E 1 iv 128 lt 2 Vv 128 4 3 Vv 128 4 4 Vv 128 5 E 128 4 6 DL 128 4 7 C 128 4 8 C 128 4 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen see Figure 53 on page 118 Active Select this check box to activate RSTP Clear this checkbox to disable RSTP Note You must also activate Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable RSTP on the Switch Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello
335. ion 2er rpan tret ber ba pes Reed aq ret orbe Ter ex o PEE Tex n 312 Chapter 40 j ieri c 315 aT MAC Table OVE NIME sarrias ATE Ue rp d da cede tt e pL ERUNT ERO pO LES d 315 LUPA b Burro AC T T 316 Chapter 41 i ec EM 317 ETT UP 2r 29 M 317 AIA Venna TOF TD eM 318 Chapter 42 ARP Fabl reet a 319 42 1 ARP Table OVES 319 Low NS E ira MN m T TT TM 319 42 2 U Bac pads 4 omm 219 Chapter 43 Roufng Table M 321 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table of Contents SCNES ID M RCT 321 232 2 Viewing INE Rouino PAIS 2ioccndasicciii a Garaan iania nidii niiina RR EATER EYE PLUME eaS 321 Chapter 44 lnjibpispi m haere 323 4451 COMMQUIS CONG M 323 Chapter 45 Introducing COMMANGS ciiesicsesicnissiccesiaccarcicartarcaraenavnnssentneraanacxaunessGnanssnanaacessenackantoniecansennes 325 AO Lei T es hye aan etre D D NR TI wer er nce tare 325 45 2 ACCESSING THE CLI rrenaren E A R A 325 25 2 1 Tho Console Pon aoaaa a A Ee HH et ER EHE NRA 325 293 9 Io LOI SOPORE aae resonat ese Ver tel x edt Mn RUIN ad FR ames 326 45 4 Command Syntax COMRVODBOFIS isccuuue emeret cid dme te inkassa anin akku d dana cii d dat Ead 326 45 5 Changing the
336. ion to activate one of the STP standards on the Switch 11 3 Spanning Tree Configuration Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen to activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Click Configuration in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 51 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration Spanning Tree Configuration g Status Rapid Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Mode C Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Spanning Tree Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Spanning Tree You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Mode Select Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree or Multiple Spanning Tree See Section 11 1 on page 109 for background information on STP Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 115 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Use this screen to configure RSTP settings see Section 11 1 on page 109 for more informat
337. is screen Table 85 OSPF Status LABEL DESCRIPTION OSPF This field displays whether OSPF is activated Running or not Down Interface The text box displays the OSPF status of the interface s on the Switch Neighbor The text box displays the status of the neighboring router participating in the OSPF network Link State The text box displays information in the link state database which contains data in the Database LSAs Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to end OSPF status polling The following table describes some common output fields Table 86 OSPF Status Common Output Fields FIELD DESCRIPTION Interface Internet Address This field displays the IP address and subnet bits of an IP routing domain Area This field displays the area ID Router ID This field displays the unique ID of the Switch Transmit Delay This field displays the transmission delay in seconds GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF Table 86 OSPF Status Common Output Fields continued FIELD DESCRIPTION State This field displays the state of the Switch backup or DR designated router Priority This field
338. ive O Port Active E 1 s 2 E 3 E 4 rj 5 C 6 El a 8 r Pt gm w cg se ai nc S Pug R I c afta iil Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 96 IP Application gt DiffServ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select Active to enable DiffServ on the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 32 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings Use this screen to configure TRTCM settings Click the 2 rate 3 Color Marker link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 32 Differentiated Services You cannot enable both TRTCM and Bandwidth Control at the same time
339. ive is too high 24 1 1 2 DHCP Snooping Database The Switch stores the binding table in volatile memory If the Switch restarts it loads static bindings from permanent memory but loses the dynamic bindings in which case the devices in the network have to send DHCP requests again As a result it is recommended you configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database maintains the dynamic bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection in a file on an external TFTP server If you set up the DHCP snooping database the Switch can reload the dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database after the Switch restarts You can configure the name and location of the file on the external TFTP server The file has the following format Figure 98 DHCP Snooping Database File Format lt initial checksum gt TYPE DHCP SNOOPING VERSION 1 BEGIN lt binding 1 gt lt checksum 1 gt lt binding 2 gt lt checksum 1 2 gt lt binding n gt lt checksum 1 2 n gt END The lt initial checksum gt helps distinguish between the bindings in the latest update and the bindings from previous updates Each binding consists of 72 bytes a space and another checksum that is used to validate the binding when it is read If the calculated checksum is not equal to the checksum in the file that binding and all others after it are ignored GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 1 1 3 DHCP Relay
340. ivery tree s DVMRP grafts attach a branch back onto the multicast delivery tree 30 3 Configuring DVMRP Configure DVMRP on the Switch when you wish it to act as a multicast router mrouter Click IP Application DVMRP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 132 DVMRP Mu Active O Threshold 255 Index Network VID Active 1 10 10 10 1 24 2 rH 2 192 168 1 1 24 1 O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 93 DVMRP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select Active to enable DVMRP on the Switch You should do this if you want the Switch to act as a multicast router Threshold Threshold is the maximum time to live TTL value TTL is used to limit the scope of multicasting You should reduce this value if you do not wish to flood Layer 3 devices many hops away with multicast traffic This applies only to multicast traffic this Switch sends out GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 30 DVMRP Table 93 DVMRP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Index Index is the DVMRP configuration for the IP routing domain defined under Network The maximum number of DVMRP configurations allowed is the maximum number of IP routing domains allowed on the Switch See Section 7 6 on page 83 for more information on IP routing domains Network This is the IP routing domain IP address and subnet mask you set up in IP Setup VID DVMRP cannot be enabl
341. ivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in an STP RSTP The CIST is the default MST instance MSTID 0 Any VLANS that are not members of an MST instance are members of the CIST In an MSTP enabled network there is only one CIST that runs between MST regions and single spanning tree devices A network may contain multiple MST regions and other network segments running RSTP Figure 49 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example Region 3 Region 2 Physical Connection RSTP on the Link 11 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen The Spanning Tree Protocol status screen changes depending on what standard you choose to implement on your network Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol to see the screen as shown GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 50 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second Forwarding Delay second 0 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 This screen differs depending on which STP mode RSTP MRSTP or MSTP you configure on the Switch This screen is described in detail in the section that follows the configuration section for each STP mode Click Configurat
342. k to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 22 STP Path Costs LINK RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED ALLOWED SPEED VALUE RANGE RANGE Path 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Cost Path 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Cost Path 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Cost Path 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Cost Path 1Gbps 4 3to 10 1 to 65535 Cost Path 10Gbps 2 1to5 1 to 65535 Cost On each bridge the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root It is the port on this switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN 11 1 2 How STP Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs
343. ld displays the starting IP address of the multicast group End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete Select Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox es in the table 22 8 1 MVR Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on the Switch belong to VLAN 1 In addition port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the News and Movie channels from the remote streaming media server S Computers A B and C in VLAN are able to receive the traffic GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 89 MVR Configuration Example gt wo News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 To configure the MVR settings on the Switch create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports Figure 90 MVR Configuration Example OLD Active Vv Premium 200 Name Multicast VLAN ID Mode Dynamic C Compatible Multicast Setting Group Configuration To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200
344. le user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority LANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the Switch Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your Switch that 1s easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Switch will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Switch unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the
345. le 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE default gateway lt ip gt Sets the default gateway s IP address for the out of band management port 13 name server ip Sets the IP address of a domain name server 13 route lt ip gt mask next hop ip Creates a static route 13 ip mask lt next hop ip gt metric lt metric gt lt name gt inactive name Sets the metric of a static route or deactivates a static route 13 source binding mac addr vlan lt vlan id gt ip Creates a static binding for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection 13 interface port channel lt interface id gt Specifies the port s for this static binding 13 lacp Enables Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP 13 system priority lt 1 65535 gt Sets the priority of an active port using LACP 13 logins username lt name gt password lt pwd gt Configures up to four read only login accounts 14 username lt name gt privilege 0 14 Assigns a privilege level to user accounts 14 logout Exits from the CLI loopguard Enables loopguard on the Switch mac authenticat ion Enables MAC authentication on the Switch 13 nameprefix name string Sets the prefix appended to the MAC address before it is sent to the RADIUS ser
346. le buffer Click Clearing log status table in the ARP Inspection Log Status screen to clear the log and reset this counter See Section 24 6 2 on page 213 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 215 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 77 ARP Inspection Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog rate Enter the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog server in one batch This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency is determined by the Log Interval You must configure the syslog server Chapter 38 on page 305 to use this Enter 0 if you do not want the Switch to send log messages generated by ARP packets to the syslog server The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval is illustrated in the following examples 4invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 1 the Switch sends 4 syslog messages every second 6 invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 2 the Switch sends 10 syslog messages every 2 seconds Log interval Enter how often 1 86400 seconds the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the syslog server Enter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages immediately See Syslog rate for an example of the relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or
347. les you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce the need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the Switch See Chapter 17 on page 147 for more information on port security Click Advanced Applications gt Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 43 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding Static MAC Forwarding Active O Name MAC Address VID Port Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 9 Static MAC Forward Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age out VID Enter the VLAN identification number Port Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatica
348. lex Auto GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Flow control on 3 1 3 SFP Slots The Switch comes with SFP Small Form factor Pluggable slots for mini GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver The Switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the SFP transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s INF 80741 specification Rev 1 0 for details SFP transceivers can be standalone interfaces or part of a dual personality interface Each dual personality interface has one 1000 Base T copper RJ 45 port and one Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP fiber slot for mini GBIC transceivers with one port active at a time The mini GBIC ports have priority over the Gigabit ports This means that if a mini GBIC port and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time the Gigabit port will be disabled You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic connectors Type SFP connection interface Connection speed 1 Gigabit per second Gbps gt To avoid possible eye injury do NOT look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors 3 1 3 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Insert the tr
349. lied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 447 Appendix D Legal Information 448 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support Required Information Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it Corporate Headquarters Worldwide Supp
350. lly forwarded Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering 10 1 Configure a Filtering Rule Filtering Filtering means sifting traffic going through the Switch based on the source and or destination MAC addresses and VLAN group ID
351. longing to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 6 Subnet Based VLANs Subnet based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you specify When a frame is received on a port the Switch checks if a tag is added already and the IP subnet it came from The untagged packets from the same IP subnet are then placed in the same subnet based VLAN One advantage of using subnet based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic from the same IP subnet For example an ISP Internet Services Provider may divide different types of services it provides to customers into different IP subnets Traffic for voice services is designated for IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 video for 192 168 1 0 24 and data for 10 1 1 0 24 The Switch can then be configured to group incoming traffic based on the source IP subnet of incoming frames You configure a subnet based VLAN with priority 6 and VID of 100 for traffic received from IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 voice services You also have a subnet based VLAN with priority 5 and VID of 200 for traffic received from IP subnet 192 168 1 0
352. loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 24 7 1 ARP Inspection Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on each untrusted port To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port Figure 110 ARP Inspection Port Configure Port UD 4 COD C 49 02 ND x nspection Trusted State Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted ort Configure Configure PP I SFO SSSR rom Eom A i CPU www Limit Rate pps Burst interval seconds TIT MIT 4 y t q Apply Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 ARP Inspection Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted The Switch does not discard ARP packets on tr
353. lticast traffic passing through your Switch Differentiated Services DiffServ With DiffServ the Switch marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Classifier and Policy You can create a policy to define actions to be performed on a traffic flow grouped by a classifier according to specific criteria such as the IP address port number or protocol type etc Queuing Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Three scheduling services are supported Strict Priority Queuing SPQ and Weighted Round Robin WRR This allows the Switch to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth Port Mirroring Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port the port you copy the traffic to without interference Static Route Static routes tell the Switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Table 148 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications
354. ly you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on This is referred to as fixed mode In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of any VLANs other than those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN 22 2 Multicast Status Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information See Section 22 1 on page 171 for more information on multicasting Figure 81 Advanced Application gt Multicast NWmcrERXIUE Multicast Setting Index VID Port Multicast Group The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number of the entry VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses 22 3 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown See Section 22 1 on page 171 for more information on multicasting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 82 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting Multicast Setting Multicast Status IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MYR Active ia Host Timeout 260 IGMP Snooping Usava Timsnut EN 802 1p Priority No Change x
355. m For example user A may have the right to create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot The Switch can authorize users based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number of users Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing The Switch can use an external server to track when users log in log out execute commands and so on Accounting can also record system related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch The external servers that perform authentication authorization and accounting functions are known as AAA servers The Switch supports RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service see Section 23 1 2 on page 186 and TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus see Section 23 1 2 on page 186 as external authentication authorization and accounting servers was Figure 93 AAA Server ES N UN T Client AAA Server 23 1 1 Local User Accounts By storing user profiles locally on the Switch your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize users without interacting with a network AAA server However there is a limit on the number of users you may authenticate in this way See Chapter 35 on page 279 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting 23 1 2 RADIUS and TACACS RADIUS and TACACS are security protocols used to authenticate users by means
356. main configured on the Switch Refer to Section 7 6 on page 83 for more information on configuring IP domains Version Select an IGMP version from the drop down list box Choices are IGMP v1 IGMP v2 IGMP v3 and None Generally if you want to enable IGMP on the Switch you should choose IGMP v3 as it is compatible with older versions Choose an earlier version of IGMP IGMP v2 or IGMP v1 if the multicast hosts on your network can not recognize IGMP version 3 or version 2 Query messages Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide DVMRP This chapter introduces DVMRP and tells you how to configure it 30 1 DVMRP Overview DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is a protocol used for routing multicast data within an autonomous system AS This DVMRP implementation is based on draft ietf idmr dvmrp v3 10 DVMRP provides multicast forwarding capability to a layer 3 switch that runs both the IPv4 protocol with IP Multicast support and the IGMP protocol The DVMRP metric is a hop count of 32 IGMP is a protocol used for joining or leaving a multicast group You must have IGMP enabled when y
357. managing through the data ports if you do one of the following 1 Delete the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 2 Delete all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the Switch 3 Filter all traffic to the CPU port 4 Disable all ports 5 Misconfigure the text configuration file GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 6 Forget the password and or IP address 7 Prevent all services from accessing the Switch 8 Change a service port number but forget it BS Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch If you do lock yourself out try using out of band management via the management port to configure the Switch 4 6 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others from the Switch or forget the administrator password you will need to reload the factory default configuration file or reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 4 6 1 Reload the Configuration File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 To upload the configuration file do the foll
358. mat of an IP address in dotted decimal notation that uniquely identifies an area An area ID of 0 0 0 0 indicates the backbone Authentication This field displays the authentication method used None Simple or MD5 Stub Network This field displays whether an area is a stub network Yes or not No Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 28 5 Configuring OSPF Interfaces To configure an OSPF interface first create an IP routing domain in the IP Setup screen see Section 7 6 on page 83 for more information Once you create an IP routing domain an OSPF interface entry is automatically created See Section 28 1 on page 229 for more information on OSPF GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF In the OSPF Configuration screen click Interface to display the OSPF Interface screen Figure 124 OSPF Interface OSs icc Configuration Network 192 168 1 1 24 Area ID 192 168 1 1 Authentication None Bs Key ID 1 Key Cost 15 Priority 1 Add Cancel Clear Index Network Area ID Authentication Key ID Cost Priority Delete 1 3192168 1 1 24 192 168 1 1 None 1 15 111 rH Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 OSPF Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Select an IP interface Area ID Select the area ID that uses the format of a
359. mber Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable a port The factory default for all ports is enabled A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port You can enter up to 64 alpha numerical characters Note Due to space limitation the port name may be truncated in some web configurator screens Type This field displays 10 100 1000M for Gigabit connections Speed Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port Choices are Auto 10M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex 100M Full Duplex and 1000M Full Duplex Selecting Auto auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned
360. mber upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap Note This username must match an existing account on the Switch configured in Management gt Access Control gt Logins screen User Information Use this section to configure users for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 Note Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this section to create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager Index This is a read only number identifying a login account on the Switch Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch Security Level Select whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption for SNMP communication from this user Choose noauth to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager This is equivalent to the Get Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c This is the lowest security level auth to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this user priv to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this user This is the highest security level Note The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or higher than the security level settings on the Switch Authentication Select an authentication algorithm MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm are has
361. meout lt 1 1000 gt Specifies the RADIUS accounting server timeout value 13 radius server host index ip Specifies the IP address of RADIUS server 1 or RADIUS server 2 index 1 or index 2 13 auth port lt socket number gt key lt key string gt Sets the port number and key of the external RADIUS server 13 timeout lt 1 1000 gt Specifies the RADIUS server timeout value 13 mode lt index priority round robin gt Specifies the mode for RADIUS server selection 13 remote management index start addr lt ip gt end addr ip service telnet ftp http icmp snmp gt Specifies a group of trusted computer s from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch 13 router dvmrp Enables and enters the DVMRP configuration mode 13 exit Leaves the DVMRP configuration mode 13 threshold ttl value gt Sets the DVMRP threshold value 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued virtual link lt router id gt authentication same as area same authentication method as the area COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE igmp Enables and enters the IGMP 13 configuration mode exit Leaves the IGMP configuration 13 mode non querie
362. ministrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands See Section 45 7 on page 328 for local authentication The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege level of administrators The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for access privilege level specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local authentication Select radius or tacacs to have the Switch check the access privilege via the external servers GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 62 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Login These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control gt Logins screen The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the correspond
363. mon Services GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2007 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interfe
364. mple the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list etc Offline the switch is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down 39 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch s web configurator home page This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Figure 192 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen ZyXEL MENU See Basic Setting GS 2024 G5 2024 Member Menu Status O Logout B Help Advanced Application Routing Protocol Basic Setting Advanced Applications Routing Protocol Management Management System Info VLAN Static Route Setup Diagnostic E General Setup Static MAC Forward MAC Table Switch Setup Spanning Tree Protocol ARP Table Maintenance IP Setup Bandwidth Control Port Status Diagnostic Port Setup Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Cluster Management MAC Table ARP Table Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Access Control 39 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the clust
365. n See Chapter 7 on page 77 You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 24 5 on page 208 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide E Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 6 ARP Inspection Status Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Figure 106 ARP Inspection Status OF Sn VLAN Status Log Status Configure IPS Total number of filters 0 index Mac Address VID Port Expiry sec Reason Delete t T Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 ARP Inspection Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Total number of filters This field displays the current number of MAC address filters that
366. n that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 20 Queuing Method 20 2 Configuring Queuing Click Advanced Application Queuing Method in the navigation panel Figure 78 Queuing Method Queuing WV Port Method spa C WRR spa C WRR spa C WRR SPQ C WRR SPQ C WRR SPQ C WRR SPA WRR SPA C WRR SPA C WRR SPA C WRR spa C WRR spa C WRR 1 10 11 12 dJduddHddssWud 107059017009050 d Weight Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 B R E EEE B R E R F BE E E 1E E E E o 5 3 4 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This label shows the port you are configuring Method Select SPQ Strict Priority Queuing or WRR Weighted Round Robin Strict Priority Queuing SPQ services queues based on priority only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q7 has the highest priority and QO the lowest Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Q0 Q7 Weight When you select W
367. n 128 hs 7 r 128 ha 8 r hog hg da Cancel 122 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MSTP Status screen see Figure 57 on page 125 Active Select this check box to activate MSTP on the Switch Clear this checkbox to disable MSTP on the Switch Note You must also activate Multiple Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MSTP on the Switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MaxAge This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All Switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must r
368. n IP address in dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface to that area Authentication Note OSPF Interface s must use the same authentication method within the same area Select an authentication method Choices are Same as Area None default Simple and MD5 To participate in an OSPF network you must set the authentication method and or password the same as the associated area Select Same as Area to use the same authentication method within the area and set the related fields when necessary Select None to disable authentication This is the default setting Select Simple and set the Key field to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using simple password authentication Select MD5 and set the Key ID and Key fields to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using MD5 authentication Key ID When you select MD5 in the Authentication field specify the identification number of the authentication you want to use Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field enter a password eight character long Characters after the eighth character will be ignored When you select MD5 in the Authentication field enter a password 16 character long Cost The interface cost is used for calculating the routing table Enter a number between 0 and 65535 The default interface cost is 15 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 237 Chapter 28 OSPF Table 90 OSPF Interface continued
369. n afresh 23 2 2 TACACS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your TACACS server settings See Section 23 1 2 on page 186 for more information on TACACS servers Click on the TACACS Server Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Figure 96 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup ORAS NENNNNP Authentication Server Auth and Acct Index Accounting Server Timeout Index Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete ag O 49 O Apply Cancel 30 seconds IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 49 rH ag O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Server Use this section to configure your TACACS authentication settings Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured TACACS server if the TACACS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second TACACS server Select round robin to alternate between the TACACS servers that it sends authen
370. n sends a group specific IGMP query to check if there are any members remaining in that group If the multicast router does not receive an IGMP report from any members it stops sending multicast traffic to that group This change helps shorten the leave convergence time In other words the amount of time that a multicast router believes that there are group members on a particular network This in turn helps reduce the amount of multicast traffic going through the multicast router Figure 128 IGMP Version 2 Example d Il 3 Leave GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 29 IGMP IGMP version 3 allows a multicast host to join a multicast group and specify from which source multicast server it wants to receive multicast packets Alternatively a multicast host can specify from which multicast servers it does not want to receive multicast packets In the following figure multicast server X IP address 10 1 1 1 and multicast server Z IP address 13 2 2 2 both send multicast traffic to the same multicast group identified by the multicast IP address 225 1 1 1 In IGMP version 3 multicast host A can join multicast group 225 1 1 1 and specify that it only wants to receive multicast packets from server X Figure 129 IGMP Version 3 Example X zz Group 225 1 1 1 es lllllIServer 10 1 1 1 ji Group 225 1 1 1 Server 13 2 2 2 Join 225 1 1 1 Include 10 1 1 1 29 2 Port based IGMP The Switch sen
371. n the member summary list below Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 32 printable characters spaces are allowed VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port based VLAN GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 313 Chapter 39 Cluster Management Table 130 Clustering Management Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clustering The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members Candidate List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list
372. n then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 251 Chapter 32 Differentiated Services 32 1 2 DiffServ Network Example The following figure depicts a DiffServ network consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ compliant network devices The boundary node A in Figure 138 in a DiffServ network classifies marks with a DSCP value the incoming packets into different traffic flows Platinum Gold Silver Bronze based on the configured marking rules A network administrator can then apply various traffic policies to the traffic flows An example traffic policy is to give higher drop precedence to one traffic flow over others In our example packets in the Bronze traffic flow are more likely to be dropped when congestion occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow as they move across the DiffServ network Figure 138 DiffServ Network A OOOO eme VL ae A SGF P Platinum G Gold B S Silver B B Bronze 32 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user defined criteria Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user defined criteria and identify it as either conforming exceeding or violating the criteria Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM defined in RFC 2698 is a type of traffic policing
373. n wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that second is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Changed Times Time Since Last This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Change GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MRSTP click MRSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 11 1 on page 109 for more information on MRSTP Figure 54 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP OLD SEE 111 Status Tree Active Bridge Priority Hello Time MAX Age Forwarding Delay 1 C 32768 ON seconds feo seconds 5 2 D 32768 v fe seconds feo seconds 5 3 C 32768 z e seconds jeo seconds hs 4 O 32768 e seconds fo seconds hs Port Active Priority Path Cost Tree x a i 1 UNE M E 2 128 hx 3 r ios NN fi z 4 n 128 EN fi zl
374. n you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 7 6 IP Setup Use the IP Setup screen to configure the default gateway device the default domain name server and add IP domains 7 6 1 IP Interfaces The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The factory default IP address is 192 168 1 1 The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 On the Switch as a layer 3 device an IP address is not bound to any physical ports Since each IP address on the Switch must be in a separate subnet the configured IP address is also known as IP interface or routing domain In addition this allows routing between subnets based on the IP address without additional routers You can configure multiple routing domains on the same VLAN as long as the IP address ranges for the domains do not overlap To change the IP address of the Switch in a routing domain simply add a new routing domain entry with a different IP address in the same subnet GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 31 Basic Setting gt IP Setup IP Interface IP Address IP Setup Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Default Management in band C Outofband Management IP Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 VID Add Cancel
375. nd Address Telnet FTP HTTP ICMP SNMP SSH HTTPS 1 Ww oo ooo wWWWwW WwW W RW BR FP 2 pn ao poe o o o o o GO 3 n oo poo o o n O n oO n 4 0 aoo foo OD o o o o oO mn Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 122 Access Control Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Address Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this End Address Switch The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Table 122 Access Control Remote Management continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Telnet FTP Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the specified trusted HTTP ICMP computers SNMP SSH HTTPS Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation
376. nds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information is hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the Switch and S Figure 85 MVR Network Example 22 6 1 Types of MVR Ports In MVR a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic Once configured the Switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast 22 6 2 MVR Modes You can set your Switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode In dynamic mode the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the Switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN 22 6 3 How MVR Works The following figure shows a multicast television example where
377. ndwidth optionally on a per feature Tiseo configuration basis ethernet remote loopback lt number of Performs a loopback test from the 13 oam test lt port gt packets gt lt packet specified port optionally specifies size how many and the size of packets sent in the loopback test exit Exits Enable or privileged mode 0 help Displays help information 0 history Displays a list of command s that you have previously executed igmp flush Removes all IGMP information 13 kick tcp Session ID Disconnects the specified TCP 13 session logout Exits Enable or privileged mode 0 mac flush Clears the MAC address table 13 lt port num gt Removes all learned MAC 13 address on the specified port s no arp Flushes the ARP table entries 13 arp inspection filter Specify the ARP inspection record 13 lt mac addr gt vlan you want to delete from the vlan id Switch The ARP inspection record is identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID pair interface lt port number gt Clears all counters on the 13 specified port logging Disables syslog logging 13 ping Sends Ping request to an Ethernet 0 IP host device name vlan vlan Sends Ping request to an Ethernet 13 idz zi device in the specified VLAN s reload config index Restarts the system and use the 13 specified configuration file renew dhcp Loads dynamic bindings from the 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands
378. nect to this Web site e m Figure 183 Security Certificate 2 Netscape x You have attempted to establish a connection with 192 168 1 1 However the security certificate presented belongs to ES 3148 00a0c5012345 It is possible though unlikely that someone may be trying to intercept your communication with this web site If you suspect the certificate shown does not belong to 192 168 1 1 please cancel the connection and notify the site administrator View Certificate Cancel Help 36 8 3 The Main Screen After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the Switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Figure 184 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection F Web Configurator Microsoft Internet Explorer Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help HBk gt OA A Qsearch ajravortes Gmeda A D S St S Address hitp 11192 168 0 1 rpSys html z 89 Links Googe S G Search 39 Shoboded check X Autolink C iautomil Options 9 Save Status Logout B Help System Up Time 0 53 43 tion Port Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KB s RxKB s Up Time E Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 z Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
379. nes the path a packet takes to a device 0 lt ip host name gt Determines the path a packet takes to a device ina vlan lt vlan id gt VLAN etl lt L 255 gt wait lt 1 60 gt queries lt 1 10 gt help Displays command help information 0 ssh lt 1 2 gt lt user dest ip gt Connects to an SSH server with the specified SSH 0 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands 45 12 2 Enable Mode The following table describes the commands available for Enable mode Table 138 Command Summary Enable Mode COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE baudrate Changes the console port speed 13 112131415 Choices are 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 and 5 115200 boot config index Restarts the system with the 13 specified configuration file clear arp inspection filter Delete all ARP inspection filters 13 from the Switch arp inspection log Delete all ARP inspection log 13 entries from the Switch arp inspection statistics Delete all statistics records of 13 ARP packets going through the Switch arp inspection statistics vlan Delete statistics records of ARP 13 lt vlan list gt packets going through the Switch for the specified VLAN s dhcp snooping statistics Delete all statistics records of 13 database DHCP requests going through the Switch loopguard Clears all loopguard counters 13 configure Accesses Configuration mode 13 Se
380. nfiguring VLAN Stacking Click Advanced Applications gt VLAN Stacking to display the screen as shown Figure 80 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking ONBuENERDSGDEEN Active O oxe100 itis Others Hex Port Role SPVID Priority Access Port dem o s 1 Access Port v n o 2 Access Port v fe j o 3 Access Port z ft o 4 Access Port z ox 5 Access Port z im o 6 Access Port DA o 7 Access Port o Access Por i y Ra NAP cag ee Ri al t ag Rd p ON an Ne a AEN P if m of I il lat N The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this checkbox to enable VLAN stacking on the Switch SP TPID SP TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information Choose 0x8100 or 0x9100 from the drop down list box or select Others and then enter a four digit hexadecimal number from 0x0000 to OxFFFF Ox denotes a hexadecimal number It does not have to be typed in the Others text field Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in
381. nitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port Figure 60 Advanced Application gt Mirroring Oi Active B Monitor Port fi Port Mirrored Direction m DULL ngress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress e NM OO fi win a HaHaHa HuHu Hua Ingress 7 Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 131 Chapter 14 Mirroring The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Advanced Application gt Mirroring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the Switch Clear this check box to disable the feature Monitor Port The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Enter the port number of the monitor port Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop down list box Choices are
382. nload Q Disable 9 Enable ia Q Prompt 3 Microsoft vM 5 Java permissions o Custom Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset cmd Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 52 Troubleshooting 52 2 1 3 1 JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for applet under Java Sun is selected 3 Click OK to close the window Figure 210 Java Sun General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings Use HTTP 1 1 O Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections gt Java Sun Use Java 2 v1 4 1 07 for applet requires restart 3 Microsoft VM Ld a console enabled requires restart BPH enabled ompiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing of gt Restore Defaults Cancel Apply 52 3 Problems with the Password Table 146 Troubleshooting the Password PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Switch password using the proper casing Cannot access the The password field is case sensi
383. nnot be managed from that port GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Table 19 Port Based VLAN Setup continued label Description Outgoing These are the egress ports an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Static MAC Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 9 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on your network 9 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address ru
384. ns 164 Figure 79 VLAN Slacking Eam lE ss srs ssa d wa die doce da an odd dados sce once a da at 166 Figure 80 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking sssee eene 168 Figure 81 Advanced Application gt BIUIISBE cciccrscsiceectercaiectesdicanscactaniauneanedanzuuccaueen aaan innan aaea 172 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide List of Figures Figure 82 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting 173 Figure 83 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN 175 Figure 84 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile 176 Figure 25 MYR NSW BXeIplg asisieniiieenines Sonat natant odin aimee 177 Figure oo MVR Multicast Television Example csssaicsiccssinsatccisteietcdertegacdamannaiacs N 178 Figure 87 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR eene 179 Figure 88 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration 181 Figure 09 MYR Configaptdm Example secrurcnsiinenan n Din ua RRG SNN n EUH Ebr qUnEQH 182 Figure BO MYR Coniguraton EXIIDIS aiccxoadiedtenirdadien ii dade Mode ete den M ad ERR 182 Figure 91 MVR Group Configuration Example eeeeeseseeeeeieeeeea nere nna nna ninth anna ninth ana nnn 182 Figure 92 MVR Group Configuration EXample uices cceti tier ttai oorr ttt oorr tue portau peo ad Ida pee prc
385. ns the Switch ignored bindings the last time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See Chapter 45 on page 325 Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vians This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore Last ignored time This field displays the last time the Switch ignored any bindings for any reason from the DHCP binding database Total ignored bindings counters This section displays the reasons the Switch has ignored bindings any time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See Chapter 45 on page 325 Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the
386. o continue Use the following steps to telnet into your Switch 1 For local management connect your computer to the RJ 45 management port labeled MGMT on the Switch 2 Make sure your computer IP address and the Switch IP address are on the same subnet In Windows click Start usually in the bottom left corner Run and then type telnet 192 168 0 1 the default management IP address and click OK 3 Alogin screen displays refer to Section 45 3 on page 326 45 3 The Login Screen After you have successfully established a connection to the Switch using a direct console connection or Telnet a login screen displays as shown below For your first login enter the default administrator login username admin and password 1234 Enter User Name admin Enter Password XXXX 45 4 Command Syntax Conventions The rules of the commands are listed next The command keywords are in courier new font GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands The required fields in a command are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt for instance ping lt ip gt means that you must specify an IP number for this command The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets for instance configure snmp server contact system contact gt location system location gt means that the contact and location fields are optional Command refers to a c
387. ocation Enter the geographic location of your Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Contact Person s Name Enter the name of the person in charge of this Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Use Time Server when Bootup Enter the time service protocol that your timeserver uses Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the Switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the Switch the time and date will be reset to 1970 1 1 0 0 Time Server IP Address Enter the IP address of your timeserver The Switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minut
388. of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS and TACACS authentication both allow you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS Table 59 RADIUS vs TACACS RADIUS TACACS Transport UDP User Datagram Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol Protocol Encryption Encrypts the password sent for All communication between the client the authentication Switch and the TACACS server is encrypted 23 2 Authentication and Accounting Screens To enable authentication accounting or both on the Switch First configure your authentication server settings RADIUS TACACS or both and then set up the authentication priority and accounting settings Click Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 94 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct OEUSSUDRSDEGDNEUDEUGTITLUDD EENN G RADIUS Server Setup Click Here TACACS Server Setup Click Here Auth and Acct Setup Click Here 23 2 1 RADIUS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings See Section 23 1 2 on page 186 for more information on RADIUS servers and Section 23 3 on page 194 for RADIUS attributes utilized by the authentication and accounting features on
389. of the site Yes No View Certificate GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control 36 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Website Certified by an Unknown Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click Examine Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected then click OK to continue in Netscape Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the Switch s certificate into the SSL client Figure 182 Security Certificate 1 Netscape x Unable to verify the identity of ES 3148 00a0c5012345 as a trusted site Possible reasons for this error Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate The site s certificate is incomplete due to a server misconfiguration You are connected to a site pretending to be ES 3148 00a0c5012345 possibly to obtain your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster about this problem Before accepting this certificate you should examine this site s certificate carefully Are you willing to to accept this certificate for the purpose of identifying the Web site E5 3148 00a0c5012345 Accept this certificate permanently Accept this certificate temporarily For this session Do not accept this certificate and do not con
390. off a port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 12 Basic Setting gt Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port The Switch uses IEEE802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode IEEE802 3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of packet collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it 802 1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority queue tag See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 10 on page 82 for more information BPDU Control Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port You must activate bridging control protocol transparency in the Swit
391. oin message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 10 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the next two fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The Switch has
392. ol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 124 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message siol oO BR Ww N o Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes 38 2 Syslog Setup Click Management and then Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server Use this screen to configure the device s system logging settings GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 38 Syslog Figure 188 Syslog Syslog Setup Syslog Server Setu
393. om the MVR configuration mode 13 group lt name str gt start address lt ip gt end address lt ip gt Sets the multicast group range for the MVR 13 inactive Disables MVR settings 13 mode lt dynamic compatible gt Sets the MVR mode dynamic or compatible 13 name lt name str gt Sets the MVR name for identification purposes 13 no group Disables all MVR group settings 13 group lt name str gt Disables the specified MVR group setting 13 inactive Enables MVR 13 receiver port lt port list gt Disables the receiver port s An MVR receiver port can only receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN 13 source port port list gt Disables the source port s An MVR source port can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN 13 tagged lt port list gt Sets the port s to untag VLAN tags 13 receiver port lt port list gt Sets the receiver port s An MVR receiver port can only receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN 13 source port lt port list gt Sets the source port s An MVR source port can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN 13 tagged port list Sets the port s to tag VLAN tags 13 8021p priority Sets the 802 1p priority for the packets belonging to this VLAN group 13 376 GS 4012F 4024 Use
394. ombinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 26 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 155 Subnet 1 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 156 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 157 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 128 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 Broadcast Address 192 168 1
395. ommand used in the command line interface CLI command The symbol means or The entry cr in the command lines refers to carriage return Press ENTER or carriage return after a command to execute the command Usethe up or down arrow key to scroll through the command history list You may enter a unique part of a command and press TAB to have the Switch automatically display the full command For example if you enter config and press TAB the full command of configure automatically displays Each interface refers to an Ethernet port on the Switch Commands configured after the interface command correspond to those ports Type multiple ports or port ranges separated by a comma Ranges of port numbers are typed separated by a dash 45 5 Changing the Password This command is used to change the password for Enable mode By default the same password is used to enter the command line interface CLI and Enable and Config modes of the CLI The password you change with this command is required to enter Enable and Config modes of the CLI Syntax password password where password password Specifies the new password up to 32 alphanumeric characters users have to type in to enter Enable and Config modes 45 6 Creating a New IP Interface Use the ip address command to create a new IP interface one suitable for your network for VLAN 1 After you create a new IP interface you can use this IP ad
396. on Set the BPDU control to tunnel to forward BPDUs received on ports one three four and five sysname config interface port channel 1 3 5 sysname config interface bpdu control tunnel sysname config interface 48 2 3 broadcast limit Syntax broadcast limit broadcast limit lt pkt s gt where broadcast limit Enables broadcast storm control limit on the Switch lt pkt s gt Limits how many broadcast packet the interface receives per second An example is shown next Enable port one for configuration Enable broadcast control Set how many broadband packets the interface receives per second sysname config interface port channel 1 sysname config interface broadcast limit sysname config interface broadcast limit 21 48 2 4 bandwidth limit The bandwidth limit command enables bandwidth control on the Switch Syntax bandwidth limit bandwidth limit pir lt Kbps gt bandwidth limit cir lt Kbps gt bandwidth limit egress lt Kbps gt GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 48 Interface Commands where pir lt Kbps gt Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic cir lt Kbps gt Sets the guaranteed bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic egress lt Kbps gt Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for outgoing traffic egress on the Switch An example is shown next Enable port one for configuration Enable bandwidth control Set the
397. on udp Displays IP UDP information 3 lacp Displays LACP Link Aggregation 3 Control Protocol settings logging Displays system logs 3 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 138 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE logins Displays login account information 3 loopguard Displays which ports have loopguard enabled as well as their status mac address table lt all mac vid port gt Displays MAC address table You can sort by MAC address VID or port address table count Displays the total number of MAC addresses in the MAC address table address table static Displays the static MAC address table address table vlan lt vlan id gt Displays the static MAC address table for the specified VLAN address table vlan lt vlan id gt lt sort gt Displays the static MAC address table for the specified VLAN Sorted by MAC Port or type address table port lt port list gt Displays the static MAC address table for the specified port s address table port lt port list gt lt sort gt Displays the static MAC address table for the specified port s Sorted by MAC Port or type mac aging time Displays MAC learning aging time mac authentication Displays MAC authentication settings for the Switch mac authentication
398. on the network the packets are delivered Structure An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 211 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 mt i at i i i M mmmh i I L L L I L I i I L I L I L 7 n mm m m m m m um m 9 How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask
399. on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source port number s Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s 802 1p This field displays the priority level Delete To delete a multicast VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 22 8 MVR Group Configuration All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group Configure MVR IP multicast group address es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 88 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration Multicast VLAN ID OETA ccc NN E MYR Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0
400. on the Switch to a VLAN based on IEEE 802 1x authentication The port VLAN settings are fixed and untagged This will also set the port s VID The following table describes the values you need to configure Note that the bolded values in the table are fixed values as defined in RFC 3580 Table 64 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE VLAN Assignment Tunnel Type VLAN 13 Tunnel Medium Type 802 6 Tunnel Private Group ID VLAN ID Note You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch 23 3 Supported RADIUS Attributes Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS attributes are data used to define specific authentication and accounting elements in a user profile which is stored on the RADIUS server This appendix lists the RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication Refer to RFC 2866 and RFC 2869 for RADIUS attributes used for accounting This appendix lists the attributes used by authentication and accounting functions on the Switch In cases where the attribute has a specific format associated with it the format is specified GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting 23 3 1 Attributes Used for Authentication The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 23 3 1 1 Attribu
401. on the side of the Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection Figure 6 Attaching the Mounting Brackets 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the Switch 3 Repeat steps and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch 4 You may now mount the Switch on a rack Proceed to the next section 2 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the Switch on one side of the rack lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack Figure 7 Mounting the Switch on a Rack p gt no o oo o Q Q 0 lt gt Bh O DO DODO DOOD oOoooooo Q Q oOoooooooog 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the MS flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack 3 Repeat steps and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Hardware Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Front Panel Connection The figure below shows the front panel of the Switch ee o e e E T AULA LAU aiii Figure 9 Front Panel GS 4012F x If EM
402. ons Table 154 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ALTERNATIVE LASTOCTET LAST OCTET SUBNET MASK NOTATION BINARY DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 154 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation continued suner non AURA T eene GENSAT 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 2 2 or 254 possible hosts The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 212 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting QUE EB EM EN M i i I I mi a Y 1 Internet t JU H Ol I li I li I lil I 0 I li y 192 168 1 0 24 a a LE E Amo m um um m um Um Um Em Em um um You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168
403. ontents Table of Contents About This Us rs Cue csi cscs atk cies 3 DO CUINEG RE Conventos Mee 4 Sary On i Caan ep merer re npr or Pepe merrell sapernnere anne for trrMer enter errs tenn ter ar rrrsricr nearer rn rere Tre 6 Contents COVEN WIG a teiactcs es venicntdxicescduscienscedici conser censaiezestasdsi nasiancdvetsonewensnnakiariedelecasanieriaiererniiid 9 Table of COn MSnase aia adaa akaa aaas a Fax RE rbd ER 11 stor ROWO Sonn a a 25 List of Tabes me 31 Part I Introduction and Hardware cessere 35 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your SWiIDoliueeniecieerun akon nana RRaXRRM ea raK SR EA 37 T1 DEOU ON aide eios eee se dod o Barn bere ertet aon ud odd Da cQ code tc 37 T T A BCRDOHECH DEDIEHUDEN siia aE AEE Ud epa M t ds t nner RPM DIMIEE 37 Uwe ioi e 38 1 1 3 High Perormance Switching Example 2i isse qeu tra ka ana utra ada Etpa nauta rana 38 1 14 IEEE 802 10 VLAN Application Examples i e srt tt Erb tI erra tbi aae a 39 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection eee eeieeeeeeeeee e eese eene n nnn n nnn n anna anna 41 FREI rimini sre TE 41 za Mou abe owl GI a RACE ausccstcimissetivblbskee in emir eee er rete ceren nt tre nnn tree cenattrr cr ne reat r er 42 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements sess 42
404. or IP multicasting An example is shown next Enable IGMP filtering on the Switch Create an IGMP filtering profile filter1 and specify the multicast IP addresses in the range 224 255 255 0 to 225 255 255 255 to belong to this profile sysname config igmp filtering sysname config igmp filtering profile filterl start address 224 255 255 0 end address 225 255 255 255 47 4 Enabling STP Use the spanning tree or the mrstp commands to enable and configure STP on the Switch The difference between the commands is that spanning tree only allows you to set up one spanning tree configuration and the mrstp command allows you to set up multiple ones Syntax spanning tree spanning tree priority lt 0 61440 gt spanning tree hello time lt 1 10 gt maximum age lt 6 40 gt forward delay lt 4 30 gt spanning tree lt port list gt path cost lt 1 65535 gt spanning tree lt port list gt priority 0 255 and mrstp lt treeIndex gt lt cr gt mrstp treeIndex priority lt 0 61440 gt mrstp treeIndex hello time 1 10 maximum age 6 40 forward delay 4 30 mrstp interface lt port list gt cr mrstp interface port list path cost lt 1 65535 gt mrstp interface lt port list gt priority 0 255 mrstp interface port list treeIndex 1 4 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 47 Configuration Mode Commands where spanning tree mrstp lt treeIndex gt priority
405. ority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first RADIUS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 60 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your chan
406. ort E mail support zyxel com tw Sales E mail sales zyxel com tw Telephone 886 3 578 3942 Fax 886 3 578 2439 Web Site www zyxel com www europe zyxel com FTP Site ftp zyxel com ftp europe zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Costa Rica Support E mail soporte zyxel co cr Sales E mail sales zyxel co cr Telephone 506 2017878 Fax 506 2015098 Web Site www zyxel co cr FTP Site ftp zyxel co cr Regular Mail ZyXEL Costa Rica Plaza Roble Escaz Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica Czech Republic E mail info cz zyxel com Telephone 420 241 091 350 Fax 420 241 091 359 Web Site www zyxel cz Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modransk 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Cesk Republika GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix E Customer Support Denmark Support E mail support zyxel dk Sales E mail sales zyxel dk Telephone 45 39 55 07 00 Fax 45 39 55 07 07 Web Site www zyxel dk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej 2860 Soeborg Denmark Finland Support E mail support zyxel fi Sales E mail sales zyxel fi Telephone 358 9 4780 8411 Fax 358 9 4780 8448 Web Site www zyxel fi Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Oy Malminkaari 10 00700 Helsinki Finland France E mail info zyxel fr Telephone 33 4 72 52 97 97 Fax 33 4 72 52 19 20 Web Site
407. osts still want to receive transmission from a multicast server In other words multicast routers check if any hosts on their network are still members of a specific multicast group GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 29 IGMP The Switch supports IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 version 2 IGMP v2 and IGMP version 3 IGMP v3 Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively At start up the Switch queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the Switch periodically updates this information 29 1 1 How IGMP Works This section describes how IGMP works and the changes it has gone through from version to version 3 IGMP version 1 defines how a multicast router checks to see if any multicast hosts are part of a multicast group It checks for group membership by sending out an IGMP Query packet Hosts that are members of a multicast group reply with an IGMP Report packet This is also referred to as a join group request The multicast router then keeps a list of all networks that have members of this multicast group and forwards multicast traffic to that network Figure 127 IGMP Version 1 Example Hmm m EX o es d qu It EN gt x The main difference in IGMP version 2 is that it provides a mechanism for a multicast group member to notify a multicast router that it is leaving a multicast group The multicast router the
408. ot work when FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen The IP address es in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Switch will disconnect the Telnet session immediately GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Access Control This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch 36 1 Access Control Overview A console port and FTP are allowed one session each Telnet and SSH share nine sessions up to five Web sessions five different usernames and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed Table 111 Access Control Overview Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP One session Share up to nine sessions One session Up to five accounts No limit A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi login is disabled See Section 45 12 2 on page 334 for more information on disabling multi login 36 2 The Access Control Main Screen Click Management Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown Figure 173 Access Control ORS ontro SNMP Logins Service Access Control Remote Management Click Here Click Here Click Here Click Here GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control 36 3 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an
409. oting and performing self diagnostic tests On The system is on and functioning properly Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On There is a hardware failure Off The system is functioning normally MGMT Port 10 Green On The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up Blinking The port is sending or receiving data at 10 Mbps Off The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is down 100 Amber On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Blinking The port is sending or receiving data at 100 Mbps Off The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is down GS 4024 Model Gigabit Ethernet Ports LNK ACT Green On The port has a successful 10 1000 Mbps connection Amber On The port has a successful 100 Mbps connection Blinking The port is sending or receiving data Off The port is disconnected or the link failed FDX Amber On The port is in full duplex mode Off The port is in half duplex mode or there is no connection Mini GBIC SFP Slots LNK Green On The port has a successful connection Off No Ethernet device is connected to this port ACT Green Blinking The port is sending or receiving data Off The port is not sending or receiving data or there is no connection GS 4012F Model Mini GBIC SFP Slots Standalone and Part of Dual Personality Interface LNK Green On The port has a successful connection Off No Ethernet device is connected to this port GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware
410. ou enable DVMRP otherwise you see the screen as in Figure 133 on page 247 30 2 How DVMRP Works DVMRP uses the Reverse Path Multicasting RPM algorithm to generate an IP Multicast delivery tree Multicast packets are forwarded along these multicast tree branches DVMRP dynamically learns host membership information using Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP The trees are updated dynamically to track the membership of individual groups 1 Initially an advertisement multicast packet is broadcast B in the following figure 2 DVMRP enabled Layer 3 devices that do not have any hosts in their networks that belong to this multicast group send back a prune message P 3 Ifhosts later join the multicast group a graft message G to undo the prune is sent to the parent 4 The final multicast M after pruning and grafting is shown in the next figure GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 30 DVMRP Figure 131 How DVMRP Works e Cd 30 2 1 DVMRP Terminology DVMRP probes are used to discover other DVMRP Neighbors on a network DVMRP reports are used to exchange DVMRP source routing information These packets are used to build the DVMRP multicast routing table that is used to build source trees and also perform Reverse Path Forwarding RPF checks on incoming multicast packets RPF checks prevent duplicate packets being filtered when loops exist in the network topology DVMRP prunes trim the multicast del
411. oup regardless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with the specified VID GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 8 5 1 Static VLAN Status See Section 8 1 on page 91 for more information on Static VLAN Click Advanced Application gt VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 35 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status Index 1 Change Pages D VLAN Status g The Number of VLAN 1 VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN Status Static VID Elapsed Time 1 3 49 44 Previous Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION The Number of VLAN This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch Index This is the VLAN index number Click on an index number to view more VLAN details VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status info
412. owing 1 2 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See Section 3 1 1 on page 46 for details Disconnect and reconnect the Switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the Switch s power you will see the initial screen When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds pressany keyt o enter debug mode Type at1c after the Enter Debug Mode message Wait for the Starting XMODI upload on your terminal EM upload message before activating XMODEM After a configuration file upload type atgo to restart the Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Figure 21 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port Bootbase Version V3 1 03 08 2007 18 36 17 RAM Size 64 Mbytes DRAM POST Testing 65536K OK DRAM Test SUCCESS FLASH Intel 64M 03 31 2007 20 43 39 nter debug mode within 3 seconds ZyNOS Version V3 80 TS 0 b4 Press any key to Enter Debug Mode GS 4024 atlc Starting XMODEM upload CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total 393216 bytes received Erasing CRC mode OK GS 4024 atgo The Switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out Thi
413. p Syslog Active M Logging type Active Facility System Vv localuse 0 Interface Vv local use 0 v Switch Vv local use 0 v ABA Iv local use 0 v IP Vv local use 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 125 Syslog LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog system logging and then configure the syslog setting Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 38 3 Syslog Server Setup Click Management and then Syslog in the navigation panel to display the Syslog Setup screen Click the Syslog Server Setup link to open the following screen Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 38 Syslog Figure 189 Syslog Server Setup
414. panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Diagnostic This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen 37 1 Diagnostic Click Management Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform port tests Figure 187 Diagnostic System Log IP Ping Ethernet Port Test Diagnostic d Resolving 192 168 1 23 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Ping Host Successful Display Clear IP Address Ping Port 1 Port Test The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 123 Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 37 Diagnostic GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Syslog This chapter explains the syslog screens 38 1 Syslog Overview The syslog protoc
415. pid Spanning Tree Protocol JEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees 11 1 STP RSTP Overview BS R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the network Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port states are Discarding Learning and Forwarding In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP 11 1 1 STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port The recommended cost is assigned according to the speed of the lin
416. ples that belong to the no group of commands The no group commands are commands which are preceded by keyword no This command negates the intended action of the command In most cases the no command disables resets or clears settings There are cases however where the no command can activate features This section shows some uses of these commands 47 5 1 Disable Commands Use the no command to disable features on the Switch Syntax no spanning tree no mirror port Disables STP on the Switch Disables port mirroring on the Switch 47 5 2 Resetting Commands Use the no command to reset Switch settings to their default values Syntax no https timeout Resets the https session timeout to default An example is shown next The session timeout is reset to 300 seconds sysname config no https timeout Cache timeout 300 47 5 3 Re enable commands The no command can also be used to re enable features which have been disabled Syntax no ip route ip mask inactive GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 387 Chapter 47 Configuration Mode Commands where ip mask inactive Re enables an ip route with the specified IP address and subnet mask An example is shown next Enable the IP route with the IP address of 192 168 11 1 and subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 This ip route must have already been created and made inactive prior to re enable command being applied sysname config no ip
417. port isolation Disables port isolation 13 vlan stacking Disables VLAN stacking 13 password password Changes the password for the 14 highest privilege level password password privilege 0 Changes the password for the 14 14 specified privilege GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE policy lt name gt classifier lt classifier list gt lt vlan lt vlan id gt egress port lt port num gt priority lt 0 7 gt dscp lt 0 63 gt tos lt 0 7 gt bandwidth lt bandwidth gt outgoing packet format lt tagged untagged gt out of profile dscp lt 0 63 gt forward action lt drop forward gt queue action Xprio set prio queue prio replace tos gt diffserv action diff set tos diff replace priority diff set dscp gt outgoing mirror outgoing eport outgoing non unicast eport outgoing set vlan metering out of profile action change dscp drop forwar d set drop precedence gt inactive Configures a policy A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network 13 port access authenticat or Enables 802 1x authentication on the Switch 13 lt port list gt Enables 802 1x a
418. port on the Switch Moreover the Switch eases supervision and maintenance by allowing network managers to centralize multiple servers at a single location Figure 2 Bridging Application N Internet gt oo oo Sales eem m m m m See eee eee m 1 1 3 High Performance Switching Example The Switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth In the following example use trunking to connect these two networks GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Switching to higher speed LANs such as ATM Asynchronous Transmission Mode is not feasible for most people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and adapter cards restructuring your network and complex maintenance The Switch can provide the same bandwidth as ATM at much lower cost while still being able to use existing adapters and switches Moreover the current LAN structure can be retained as all ports can freely communicate with each other Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application 1 1 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Examples A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one group A station can belong to more than one group With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless
419. pply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your TACACS accounting settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS accounting server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for accounting is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or lose
420. ption You can change the System Name in Basic Settings gt General Setup The following describes the DHCP relay information that the Switch sends to the DHCP server Table 102 Relay Agent Information FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION Slot ID 1 byte This value is always 0 for stand alone switches Port ID 1 byte This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to VLAN ID 2 bytes This is the VLAN that the port belongs to Information up to 32 bytes This optional read only field is set according to system name set in Basic Settings gt General Setup 33 4 2 Configuring DHCP Global Relay Configure global DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay screen Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown Figure 146 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global ED DHCP Relay eee Active Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Information Status z ooo 5 ooo 5 5 Option 82 DL 5 j Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 103 IP Applicati on gt DHCP gt Global LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable DHCP relay Remote Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation DHCP Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot n
421. r device from which you may restore at a later date Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen Figure 172 Backup Configuration OLATI Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current Switch configuration to your computer in this screen 1 Click Backup 2 Click Save to display the Save As screen 3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 35 Maintenance 35 8 FTP Command Line This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 35 8 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file also known as the romfile or ROM contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password Switch setup IP Setup and so on Once you have customized the Switch s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 110 Filename Conventions
422. r Sets the Switch to Non Querier 13 mode If a multicast router with a lower IP address it will stop sending Query messages on that network no non querier Disables non querier mode on 13 the Switch a multicast router always sends Query messages unknown Specifies the action the Switch 13 multicast frame Should perform when it receives drop flooding Unknown multicast frames ospf router id Enables and enters the OSPF 13 configuration mode area lt area id gt Enables and sets the area ID 13 area lt area id gt Enables simple authentication for 13 authentication the area area lt area id gt Enables MD5 authentication for 13 authentication the area message digest area lt area id gt Sets the cost to the area 13 default cost lt 0 16777214 gt area lt area id gt Sets a descriptive name for the 13 name lt name gt area for identification purposes area lt area id gt Enables and sets the area as a 13 stub stub area area lt area id gt Sets the stub area not to send 13 stub no summary any LSA Link State Advertisement area lt area id gt Sets the virtual link ID 13 virtual link information for the area router id area area id Enables simple authentication 13 virtual link and sets the authentication key router id for the specified virtual link in the authentication area key lt key gt area lt area id gt Sets the virtual link to use the 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chap
423. r s Guide User and Enable Mode Commands This chapter describes some commands which you can perform in the User and Enable modes 46 1 Overview The following command examples show how you can use User and Enable modes to diagnose and manage your Switch 46 2 show Commands These are the commonly used show commands 46 2 1 show system information Syntax show system information This command shows the general system information such as the firmware version and system up time An example is shown next Copyright c 1994 2007 ZyXEL Communications Corp sysname show sys System Name GS 4012F System Contact System Location E Ethernet Address 00 19 cb 00 00 02 ZyNOS F W Version V3 80 TS 0 b5 04 13 2007 RomRasSize 3187522 System up Time 6 17 27 228e9a ticks Bootbase Version V3 1 03 08 2007 ZyNOS CODE RAS Apr 12 2007 12 07 33 Product Model GS 4012F sysname GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 377 Chapter 46 User and Enable Mode Commands 46 2 2 show ip Syntax show ip This command displays the IP related information such as IP address and subnet mask on all Switch interfaces The following figure shows the default interface settings sysname gt show ip Management IP Address IP 192 168 0 1 Netmask 255 255 255 0 VID 0 IP Interface IP 192 168 1 1 Netmask 255 255 255 0 VID 1 sysname gt 46 2 3 show logging Syntax show log
424. rable trees IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol QoS IEEE 802 1p Eight priority queues per port Port based egress traffic shaping Rule based traffic mirroring Supports IGMP snooping VLAN Port based VLAN setting Tag based IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Number of VLAN 4K 1000 static maximum Supports GVRP Double tagging for VLAN stacking Protocol Based VLAN Subnet Based VLAN Port Aggregation Supports IEEE 802 3ad static and dynamic LACP port trunking Six groups up to 8 ports each Port mirroring All ports support port mirroring Support port mirroring per IP TCP UDP Bandwidth control Supports rate limiting at 64K increment GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Table 149 Feature Specifications continued Layer 3 Features IP Capability IPV4 support 64 IP routing domains 8K IP address table Wire speed IP forwarding Routing protocols Unicast RIP V1 V2 OSPF V2 Multicast DVMRP IGMP V1 V2 V3 Static Routing VRRP IP services DHCP relay VLAN based DHCP server relay DHCP Snooping Security IEEE 802 1x port based authentication Static MAC address filtering Limiting number of dynamic addresses per port The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the Switch Table 150 Standards Supported
425. rce ip lt ip gt Removes the specified subnet 13 mask bits from the subnet based VLAN mask bits configuration dhcp vlan Disables the DHCP VLAN 13 override override setting for subnet based VLAN s syslog Disables syslog logging 13 server lt ip Disables syslog logging to the 13 address gt specified syslog server server lt ip Enables syslog logging to the 13 address gt specified syslog server inactive type type Disables syslog logging for the 13 specified log type sys Link config error or report tacacs accounting index Disables TACACS accounting 13 on the specified server tacacs server index Disables TACACS 13 authentication on the specified server time daylight Disables daylight saving on the 13 saving time Switch timesync Disables timeserver settings 13 trtcm Disables the Two Rate Three 13 Color Marker feature on the Switch trunk lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Disables the specified trunk 13 T6 group GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 357 Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Removes ports from the 13 T6 gt interface specified trunk group lt port list gt lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Disables LACP in the specified 13 T6 lacp trunk group vlan lt vlan id gt Deletes the static VLAN entry 13 vlaniq gvrp Disables GVRP on the Switch 13
426. re Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 111 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure ARF Inspection YLA onfigure Configure VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Log Apply Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 217 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable ARP inspection on the VLAN Select No to disable ARP inspection on the VLAN Log Specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the VLAN None The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Deny The Switch generates log messages when it discard
427. rearennereaiy 56 Figure 20 Change Administrator Login PaASSwWOrd scccasssscccacevesdccansasssiessiaussesscatavdessdaasauasadsaneuesasscaensanseede 61 Figure 21 Resetting ihe Switch Via the Console Port cessdscceseessscneanresscensarersdnensaanessnnnaabedinnncennensdankaabenden 63 Figura Z2 Web Configurator Logout Screen ioo ci erre ssssuediasneiimdinanawmermnainin sends 63 Figure 23 Initial Setup Network Example IP Interface sssssssssssssssseeeneeneemeennene 65 Figure 24 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN sssssseeneneeeneeneeme rn nennen nnne sen nnns 67 Figure 25 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID 1 tpss cit pott En Pra Mort EIS rh tid bored tti 68 PUN S20 SOREN Wr mM TUS EE NT 71 Figure 27 Status gt Por Detalls Lacie peso cive patre vc ta bd tle d pend erede HE ie CELINE pet Api Lexi A a 73 Pigtite 2e syste Wile aE 78 Figure 29 Basic Set ng General SEDI uuusspiisi besser ite rn adesse R IU Ebo End cte oO VERRE REP A 79 Figure 30 Basic Setting gt Switch SOUP sussessecteenmsesexzkcekecsscv Gbebie obe anea Erb dErRI E DELI E pELdV 82 Figura J1 Basic Seming IP Sep uice erba Eee URL ERR X Ibi rn ok PAR e HU CB EEEN ra ARM RU REM EA Rp 84 Figure 22 Basic Sut ng Pon DOUP sssteliciiiebertanabebetu m bebo Ur pia nda ha ADor MEER Ec AM Sr PRU 86 xcu fcq mg Brio m 93 Figure 34 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type eseiiesi asses enn tha nant th a 44a aea RA A 44a ano MR A 4a nata a 44 93 Figure 35 Advanced
428. receives ARP packets on untrusted ports The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high 24 1 2 3 Syslog The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server Chapter 38 on page 305 when it forwards or discards ARP packets The Switch can consolidate log messages and send log messages in batches to make this mechanism more efficient 24 1 2 4 Configuring ARP Inspection Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Switch 1 Configure DHCP snooping See Section 24 1 1 4 on page 201 LES It is recommended you enable DHCP snooping at least one day before you enable ARP inspection so that the Switch has enough time to build the binding table 2 Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN 3 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of ARP packets that each port can receive per second GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 2 IP Source Guard Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Bindings are used by DHCP snooping and ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized packets in the network The Switch learns the bindings by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindin
429. rence received including interference that may cause undesired operations GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix D Legal Information FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning See iB AE FE allem TERHEBUIRSEDERINS ARERR Sila T ABS eA SH STR Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1 PROD
430. resses Example a A E B 192 168 1 33 ASD Internet a mmmmmmm Sa 192 168 1 33 eat Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Since a router connects different networks it must have interfaces using different network numbers For example if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet WAN the router s LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets In the following example the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks Figure 215 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example p WAN ANT ow COR NU 192 168 1 88 192 168 1 1 a Internet 3 oe ETETETT ummmmmmmm GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example the computer and the router s LAN port both use 192 168 1 1 as the IP address The computer cannot access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router s LAN port Figure 216 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example omm um um um um Um Zy t 1 a 192 168 1 1 LAN WAN E Mr a pi lt I E 3 AE a e qu 8 192 168 1 1 Internet i ua GS 4012F 4024 User s Guid
431. rien Petits emen enun etui paf m 377 46 2 1 Show Systeam MOMEN acccconcsexcecuccce toic ecere tomes eet eI dora kat pd denda assis a R AE 377 25052 BIBUNT aiaia aa BOO EU pr Pbi Opda Lcd ed URINE a aS KU tie Rt cb MN ULLUS 378 mona detis pM T 378 AO ZA show VPE CB inpol Ca m P OR dod doa p p odd iau 378 46 2 5 SHOW mac add ess Iable eiiis esatta ra dnd bd Rad da p RA KR a A d 379 LIE M 380 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 21 Table of Contents 2 AE TRONS M 380 JOS Copy iW ARDUS mee ee Tt 381 46 6 Configuration File Maillfenableg xiiiecesecsescet terret tt etra de ke bad duy ke T Ide perd dd ev y Ld td ada 381 46 6 1 Using a Different Configuration File sisirin 382 46 6 2 Resetting to the Factory Default sede skscse exe helbud ann bebed eu EP D AREE Eeleq qna bead aaa REA 382 Chapter 47 Configuration Mode Commands ee esses eee eeeseeseeesseeaasneeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeees 383 47 1 Change the Qut of Band Management IP Address i i eiie had eta et ehh agna 383 21 2 Enabling IGMP Snooping es sree rds ata adis ERR ee Ha dw ak saan ad pact c nt ba da np 383 47 3 Tesiimm siervgi e 384 27 3 Enabling STP iu oiensdite aate cete pote pete i rp Fa EA etta dla ete iL ados ec a ARP aped pod 385 ATS no Commend ExampoS 99 9 0 0 00 SOT 387 Arot Disable Commands Rete ec 387 4455 2 Resetting Commands usan es
432. rity level 13 type lt type gt facility local 1 ANA Sets the log type and the file location on the syslog server 13 tacacs accounting host lt index gt lt ip gt Specifies the IP address of TACACS accounting server 1 or TACACS accounting server 2 index 1 or index 2 13 acct port lt socket number gt key lt key string gt Sets the port number and key of the external TACACS accounting server 13 timeout lt 1 1000 gt Specifies the TACACS accounting server timeout value 13 tacacs server host index ip Specifies the IP address of TACACS server 1 or TACACS server 2 index 1 or index 2 13 auth port lt socket number gt key lt key string gt Sets the port number and key of the external TACACS server 13 timeout lt 1 1000 gt Specifies the TACACS server timeout value 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE mode lt index Specifies the mode for 13 priority round TACACS server selection robin time lt Hour Min Sec gt Sets the time in hour minute and 13 second format date lt month day Sets the date in year month and 13 year gt day format daylight saving Enable
433. rmation cannot be seen in one screen 8 5 2 Static VLAN Details Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group See Section 8 1 on page 91 for more information on static VLAN Click on an index number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details Figure 36 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail VID ED VLAN Deta aD c c 1m VLAN Status Port Number 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 9 11 T3 T3 es 19 21 23 Uu Uu Uu U Uu Uu Uu U U U U Uu U U Elapsed Time Status 2 12 57 Static Cicio CcCcoo C c mim GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR 8
434. rned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click this to clear the fields GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Table 55 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 22 5 IGMP Filtering Profile An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch are able to join A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be able to join Profiles are assigned to ports in the Multicast Setting screen Clients connected to those ports are then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile Each port can be assigned a single profile A profile can be assigned to multiple ports Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as
435. rol Figure 1 80 HTTPS Implementation WS HTTPS HTTP BES If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the Switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts 36 8 HTTPS Example If you haven t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch then in your browser enter https Switch IP Address as the web site address where Switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the Switch you wish to access 36 8 1 Interne t Explorer Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click View Certificate if you want to verify that the certificat e is from the Switch You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen if you select No then web configurator access is blocked Figure 181 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer amp o amp Security Alert xj Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or Q changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate Do you want to proceed The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority The security certificate date is valid The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name
436. route 192 168 11 1 255 255 255 0 inactive 47 5 4 Other Examples of no Commands In some cases the no command can disable a feature disable an option of a feature or disable a feature on a port by port basis 47 5 4 1 no trunk Syntax no trunk T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 no trunk T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 lacp no trunk T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 interface lt port list gt where T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Disables the trunk group T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 TO Disables LACP in the trunk group lacp lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 gt Removes ports from the trunk group interface lt port list gt An example is shown next Disable trunk one T1 Disable LAPC on trunk three T3 Remove ports one three four and five from trunk two T2 sysname config no trunk T1 sysname config no trunk T3 lacp sysname config no trunk T2 interface 1 3 5 47 5 4 2 no port access authenticator Syntax no port access authenticator no port access authenticator lt port list gt reauthenticate no port access authenticator lt port list gt 388 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 47 Configuration Mode Commands where Disables port authentication on the Switch lt port list gt reauthenticate Disables the re authentication mechanism on the listed port s lt port list gt Disables authentication on the listed ports An example is shown next Disable authentication on
437. router Select Same as Area to use the same authentication method within the area and set the related fields when necessary Select None to disable authentication This is the default setting Select Simple to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using a simple password Select MD5 to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using MD5 authentication Key ID When you select MD5 in the Authentication field specify the identification number of the authentication you want to use Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field enter a password eight character long When you select MD5 in the Authentication field enter a password 16 character long Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays an index number of an entry Name This field displays a descriptive name of a virtual link Peer Router ID This field displays the ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation of a peer border router Authentication This field displa
438. routing table Configure Clone This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port to other ports GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 3 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Management Access Control and then Logins to display the next screen Figure 20 Change Administrator Login Password ED Logins g Administrator Access Control Pid Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password w enever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm 1 2 AMEN NENNEN ENSEM NENNEN 4 Apply Cancel 4 4 Saving Your Configuration When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch s storage that remains even if the Switch s power is turned off BS Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session 4 5 Switch Lockout You could block yourself and all others from using in band management
439. rt of the RADIUS server from the default 1812 Specifies a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the RADIUS server and the Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 47 Configuration Mode Commands radius server timeout 1 Specifies the timeout period in seconds the 1000 Switch will wait for a response from a RADIUS server If2 RADIUS servers are configured this is the total time the Switch will wait for a response from either server mode lt priority round robin gt Specifies the way the Switch will process requests from the clients to the RADIUS server Only applicable with multiple RADIUS servers configured priority When a client sends an authentication request through the Switch to the RADIUS server The Switch will forward the request to the RADIUS server If no response within half the timeout period it will forward the request to the second RADIUS server round robin When a client sends an authentication request through the Switch to the RADIUS server The Switch will forward the request to the first RADIUS server If there is no response within the timeout period the request times out The client sends an authentication request again and the Switch forwards the request to the second RADIUS server See Section 47 9 2 on page 393 for an example 47 9 2 Port Authentication Settings Use the port access authenticator command to configure port security on th
440. rt s receives per second 370 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 140 interface port channel Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE name port name Sets a name for the port s Enter 13 string a descriptive name up to nine printable ASCII characters no arp inspection Disables this port from being a 13 trust trusted port for ARP inspection arp inspection Resets the ARP inspection rate to 13 limit the default 0 bandwidth limit Disables bandwidth limit on the 13 port s bandwidth limit Disables cir bandwidth limits on 13 cir the port s bandwidth limit Disables pir bandwidth limits on 13 pir the port s bandwidth limit Disables egress bandwidth limits 13 lt egress gt on the port s broadcast limit Disables broadcast storm control 13 limit on the port s dhcp snooping Disables this port from being a 13 trust trusted port for DHCP snooping dhcp snooping Resets the DHCP snooping rate 13 limit rate to the default 0 diffserv Disables DiffServ on the port s 13 dlf limit Disables destination lookup failure 13 DLF on the Switch egress set port Disables the egress port setting 13 list ethernet oam Disables Ethernet OAM on the 13 port s ethernet oam mode Resets Ethernet OAM mode to 13 the default setting active on the ports ethern
441. rts on a switch are connected with the same cable When a switch in loop state sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re broadcast again and again causing a broadcast storm If a switch not in loop state connects to a switch in loop state then it will be affected by the switch in loop state in the following way t will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state t will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back It will then re broadcast those messages again GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 25 Loop Guard The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B Switch B is in loop state When broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B they are sent back to port N on A as they are rebroadcast from B Figure 113 Switch in Loop State The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop state This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on the same port If this is the case the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in loop state The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch B Since switch B is in loop state the probe packet P returns to port N on A The Switch then shuts down port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by
442. ry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again 28 6 OSPF Virtual Links Configure and view virtual link settings in this screen See Section 28 1 on page 229 for more information on OSPF In the OSPF Configuration screen click Virtual Link to display the screen as shown next Figure 125 OSPF Virtual Link Name Area ID Peer Router ID Authentication c NeELDAUnSEESDD END Index Name Configuration name No Configured Areedd booo CS None sj kyo Ro Key a Add Cancel Clear Peer Router ID Authentication Key ID Delete Delete Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 91 OSPF Virtual Link LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Area ID Select the area ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface to that area Peer Router ID Enter the ID of a peer border router Authentication Note Virtual interface s must use the same authentication method within the same area Select an authentication method Choices are Same as Area None default Simple and MD5 To exchange OSPF packets with peer border router you must set the authentication method and or password the same as the peer border
443. ry interval on the Switch This variable specifies the amount of time in seconds between general query messages sent by the router 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 373 Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 141 interface route domain Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE igmp query max Sets the maximum time that the 13 response time 1 25 router waits for a response to an general query message igmp last member Sets the amount of time in 13 query interval 1 25 seconds that the router waits for a response to a group specific query message ospf authentication Enables OSPF authentication in 13 key k this routing domain ospf authentication Sets the same OSPF 13 same as area authentication settings in the routing domain as the associated area ospf cost lt 1 65535 gt Sets the OSPF cost in this 13 routing domain ospf message digest Sets the OSPF authentication 13 key k key in this routing domain ospf priority 0 255 Sets the OSPF priority for the 13 interface Setting this value to 0 means that this router will not participate in router elections rip direction Sets the RIP direction in this 13 Outgoing Incoming Bo routing domain as well as the th None version version number v1 v2b v2m vrrp authentication Sets the VRRP authentication 13 key k key in the routing domain no ip dvmrp Disables DVMRP in
444. s 35 1 The Maintenance Screen Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files Click Management Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 167 Maintenance OM ARSED Current Configuration 1 Firmware Upgrade Click Here Restore Configuration Click Here Backup Configuration Click Here Load Factory Default Click Here Save Configuration Config 1 Config 2 Reboot System Config 1 Config 2 i The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 109 Maintenance LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays which configuration Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 is currently operating on the Switch Firmware Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen Upgrade Restore Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen Configuration Backup Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen Configuration Load Factory Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the factory default settings Default GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 279 Chapter 35 Maintenance Table 109 Maintenance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Save Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 1 on the Configuration Switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Reboot Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Conf
445. s Internet Options PIR General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings f Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet RE zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing C Block pop up 3 Click Apply to save this setting 52 2 1 1 2 Enable pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 417 Chapter 52 Troubleshooting Figure 205 Internet Options Internet Options n General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings e Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet m zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable CJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable
446. s option System name is not appended to 13 option 82 information field for global dhcp settings dhcp snooping Disables DHCP Snooping on the 13 Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE vlan lt vlan list gt Specifies the VLAN IDs for VLANs you want to disable DHCP snooping on 13 vlan lt vlan list gt information Sets the Switch to not add the system name to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN 13 vlan lt vlan list gt option Sets the Switch to not add the slot number port number and VLAN ID to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN 13 database Removes the location of the DHCP snooping database 13 database timeout Resets how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up to the default value 300 13 database write delay Resets how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database the first time the current bindings change after an update to the default value 65535 13 dhcp dhcp vlan Disables DHCP VLAN on the Switch 13 diffserv Disables DiffServ on the Switch 13 ethernet oam Disables Ethern
447. s DC power supply input of 48 VDC to 60 VDC 1 5A Max no tolerance The GS 4012F AC model requires 100 240VAC 1 6A power With its built in web configurator managing and configuring the Switch is easy In addition the Switch can also be managed via Telnet any terminal emulator program on the console port or third party SNMP management See Appendix A on page 425 for a full list of software features available on the Switch 1 1 1 Backbone Application The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future The Switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users You can connect computers and servers directly to the Switch s port or connect other switches to the Switch In this example all computers can share high speed applications on the server To expand the network simply add more networking devices such as switches routers computers print servers etc GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Figure 1 Backbone Application 1 1 2 Bridging Example In this example application the Switch connects different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high speed department servers via the Switch You can provide a super fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC
448. s an ARP packet from the VLAN Permit The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the VLAN All The Switch generates log messages every time it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Loop Guard This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network 25 1 Loop Guard Overview Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on that port loop back to the Switch While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol STP to prevent loops in the core of your network STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your network Figure 112 Loop Guard vs STP Loop Guard mmm mmm mu Rm um I NN S p n m p m p m m D m Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network This can occur when a port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state Loop state occurs as a result of human error It happens when two po
449. s are ping or traceroute enable traps Disables sending all Switch type 13 switch traps to a manager enable traps Disables sending all Switch type 13 switch traps to a manager The options lt opt ions gt are stp mactable or rmon enable traps Disables sending all system type 13 system traps to a manager enable traps Disables sending all system type 13 system lt options gt traps to a manager The options are coldstart warmstart fanspeed temperature voltage reset timesync intrusionlock or Ioopguard GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE spanning tree Disables STP 13 lt port list gt Disables STP on listed ports 13 ssh key Disables the secure shell server 13 lt rsal rsa dsa gt encryption key Your Switch supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA and DSA authentication known hosts Removes the specified remote 13 lt host ip gt hosts from the list of all known hosts known hosts Removes remote known hosts 13 lt host ip gt with the specified public key 1024 ssh 1024 bit RSA1 RSA or DSA rsa ssh dsa storm control Disables broadcast storm 13 control subnet based vlan Disables subnet based VLAN on 13 the Switch sou
450. s daylight saving time 13 time end date week Sets the day and time when 13 day month Daylight Saving Time ends lt o clock help Displays help for the daylight 13 saving time command start date Sets the day and time when 13 week day Daylight Saving Time starts month o clock help Displays help information 13 timezone Selects the time difference 13 1200 1200 gt between UTC formerly known as GMT and your time zone timesync lt daytime time ntp gt Sets the time server protocol 13 server lt ip gt Sets the IP address of your time 13 server trtom Enables Two Rate Three Color 13 Marker on the Switch mode lt color Sets the mode for Two Rate 13 aware color blind Three Color Marker on the Switch trunk T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Activates a trunk group 13 gt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Enables LACP for a trunk group 13 gt lacp lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Adds a port s to the specified 13 gt interface lt port trunk group list gt interface lt port Defines the port number and 13 list timeout LACP timeout period lt lacp timeout gt vlan lt vlan id gt Enters the VLAN configuration 13 mode See Section 45 12 6 on page 375 for more information vlaniq gvrp Enables GVRP 13 port isolation Enables port isolation 13 vlan Enables VLAN stacking on the 13 stacking Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 367 Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary
451. s if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide OSPF This chapter describes the OSPF Open Shortest Path First routing protocol and shows you how to configure OSPF 28 1 OSPF Overview OSPF Open Shortest Path First is a link state protocol designed to distribute routing information within an autonomous system AS An autonomous system is a collection of networks using a common routing protocol to exchange routing information OSPF offers some advantages over traditional vector space routing protocols such as RIP The following table summarizes some of the major differences between OSPF and RIP Table 83 OSPF vs RIP OSPF RIP Network Size Large Small with up to 15 routers Metrics Bandwidth hop count throughput round Hop count trip time and reliability Convergence Fast Slow 28 1 1 OSPF Autonomous Systems and Areas An OSPF autonomous system can be divided into logical areas Each area represents a group of adjacent networks All areas are connected to a backbone also known as area 0 The backbone is the transit area to route packets between two areas A stub area at the edge of an AS is not a transit area since there is only one connection to the stub area The followin
452. s in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 22 on page 110 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 11 1 on page 109 for more information on RS
453. s is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons Figure 22 Web Configurator Logout Screen Thank you for using the Web Configurator Goodbye 4 8 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Initial Setup Example This chapter shows how to set up the Switch for an example network 5 1 Overview The following lists the configuration steps for the example network Configure an IP interface Configure DHCP server settings Createa VLAN Set port VLAN ID Enable RIP 5 1 1 Configuring an IP Interface On a layer 3 Switch an IP interface also known as an IP routing domain is not bound to a physical port The default IP address of the Switch is 192 168 1 1 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 In the example network since the RD network is already in the same IP interface as the Switch you don t need to create an IP interface for it However if you want to have the Sales network on a different routing domain you need to create a new IP interface This allows the Switch to route traffic between the RD and Sales networks Figure 23 Initial Setup Network Example IP Interface zo NE Y
454. s o RARE E 86 Table 13 IEEE COZ 1O VLAN MI psp S S S ka 92 Table 14 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status seeesesessseeeeeeeennenenennnn nnne nnne nns 94 Table 15 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail 95 Table 16 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN ccccecceceeeeeeeseeeeeeceeaeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeieees 96 Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting 97 Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup 99 Table 19 Port Based VLAN Setup cc2 cscrcecrssdscrsesscggaceendeeauveesersssuspaasanaiiuecestauaumedensncuadeeeedcauereetaneevenene 102 Table 20 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding cccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeccneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeas 106 Table 21 Advanced Application gt FIDenWit scacaacccessncsioiacacteianciagatatincccanseisqubdcasannniedaducioneeetayaboeseaaaamed 107 Table 22 STP Pat OSS ee 110 MMs 2 ores WG Sle cri relatos Te cR 111 Table 24 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration aeee 115 Table 25 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP e eeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteees 116 Table 26 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP ccccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 118 Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP 1 eee 119 Table 28 Advanc
455. s power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 2 3 Authentication and Accounting Setup Use this screen to configure authentication and accounting settings on the Switch Click on the Auth and Acct Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Figure 97 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup Authentication Type Privilege Enable Login Accounting Update Period e Auth andAcctSetup o minutes Type Active Broadcast Mode Method Privilege System O E radius gt Exec O 0 start stop v radius gt Dott B B nel recius Mi Commands C DL stop only tacacs o Auth and Acct Method 2 Method 3 F x Fs Method 1 local local Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate access privilege level for ad
456. s sizccor send to DHCP clients client ip pool Including default gateway IP 1 253 address and DNS server vdefaulbe information gateway ip addr primary dns lt ip addr gt secondary dns lt ip addr gt smart relay Enables DHCP relay for all 13 broadcast domains on the Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE helper address Sets the IP addresses of up to3 13 lt remote dhcp DHCP servers serverl gt xremote dhcp server2 lt remote dhcp server3 gt information Allows the Switch to add system 13 name to agent information option Allows the Switch to add DHCP 13 relay agent information dhcp snooping Enables DHCP Snooping on the 13 Switch database Specifies the location of the 13 lt tftp host DHCP snooping database The filename gt location should be expressed like this tftp domain name or IP address directory if applicable file name for example tftp 192 168 10 1 database txt database Specifies how long 10 65535 13 timeout seconds the Switch tries to seconds complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up database write Specifies how long 10 65535 13 delay seconds seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database the
457. scriptive name of the 13 string VRRP setting for identification purposes no inactive Activates this VRRP 13 no preempt Disables VRRP preemption 13 mode no primary Resets the network to use the 13 virtual ip default primary virtual gateway interface IP address no secondary Sets the network to use the 13 virtual ip default secondary virtual gateway 0 0 0 0 preempt Enables preemption mode 13 primary Sets the primary VRRP virtual 13 virtual ip lt ip gt gateway IP address GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued SNMP trap commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE priority 1 Sets the priority of the uplink 13 254 gateway secondary Sets the secondary VRRP virtual 13 virtual ip ip gateway IP address service ftp socket Allows FTP access on the 13 control number specified service port http socket Allows HTTP access on the 13 number timeout specified service port and defines the timeout period https socket Allows HTTPS access on the 13 number specified service port icmp Allows ICMP management 13 packets snmp Allows SNMP management 13 ssh lt socket Allows SSH access on the 13 number specified service port telnet lt socket Allows Telnet access on the 13 number specified service port snmp server
458. se changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range Delete To delete the profile s and all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 22 6 MVR Overview Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscriber VLANs connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management MVR only respo
459. selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 8 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port See Section 8 1 on page 91 for more information on static VLAN Click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Figure 38 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting OMELET J Subnet Based Vian VLAN Status GVRP m Port isolation C Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking r NEN a s r 1 1 r jars r 2 fs rs TE r r fs rsd r 4 a r TE 5 Ll n lw M 6 O h r far m 7 fs rsd r e M S AS Ne im Ally att flr t E flr flr flim El flim flim fin fn flim fm Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Port Isolation Port Isolation allows each port to communicate only with the CPU management port and the dual personality GbE interfaces but not communicate with each other This option is the most l
460. sing either the CLI Command Line Interface or web configurator the settings are saved as a series of commands in a configuration file on the Switch You can perform the following with a configuration file Back up Switch configuration once the Switch is set up to work in your network Restore Switch configuration Use the same configuration file to set all switches of the same model in your network to the same settings You may also edit a configuration file using a text editor Make sure you use valid commands The Switch rejects configuration files with invalid or incomplete commands Logging Out In User or Enable mode enter the exit or 1ogout command to log out of the CLI In Config mode entering exit takes you out of the Config mode and into Enable mode and entering logout logs you out of the CLI 45 12 Command Summary The following sections summarize the commands available in the Switch together with a brief description of each command Commands listed in the tables are in the same order as they are displayed in the CLI See the related section in the User s Guide for more background information GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands 45 12 1 User Mode The following table describes the commands available for User mode Table 137 Command Summary User Mode version COMMAND DESCRIPTION EE
461. splay the status screen as shown next See Section 11 1 5 on page 112 for more information on MSTP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol LES This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch Figure 57 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP CST Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 8000 000000000000 Hello Time second D 2 Max Age second 0 20 Forwarding Delay second 0 15 Cost to Bridge 0 0 Port ID 0x0000 0x0000 Configuration Name 001349000002 Revision Number 0 Configuration Digest A317523DB32DA2D62 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 Instance Instance VLAN 0 1 4093 MSTI 1 gt Bridge Regional Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 8001 000000000000 Internal Cost 0 0 Port ID 0x0000 0x0000 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MSTP to edit MSTP settings on the Switch CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge
462. ss mapping s GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 42 ARP Table Figure 199 ARP Table Puan Index IP Address MAC Address Type 1 VEZ 240 2 00 05 50 04 30 f71 dynamic Fi 172 21 3 16 00 05 1c 15 08 71 dynamic 3 172 21 3 18 00 0b cd 8c 6d ed dynamic 4 172 21 3 40 00 0c 76 07 41 0d dynamic 5 172 21 3 66 00 50 8d 47 73 4f dynamic 6 172 21 3 90 00 05 5d f4 49 20 dynamic 7 172 21 3 91 00 50 ba ad 55 7c dynamic 8 172 21 3 95 00 10 b5 ae 56 97 dynamic g 172 21 3 120 00 10 65 ae 62 32 dynamic 10 172 21 3 138 00 a0 5 b2 62 26 dynamic 11 172 21 4 99 00 0c 76 08 cf 88 dynamic 12 172 21 10 11 08 00 20 ad f6 88 dynamic 13 172 21 100 153 00 90 27 be a2 8c dynamic 14 172 21 207 247 00 0c 76 09 17 1a dynamic 15 192 168 1 1 00 a0 c5 3f 81 56 dynamic 16 182 168 1 5 00 85 a0 01 01 04 dynamic 17 192 168 1 10 00 a0 c5 5e dffg static 18 192 168 1 100 00 85 a0 01 01 00 dynamic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 133 ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the ARP Table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with corresponding MAC address below MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with corresponding IP address above Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Routing T
463. ss of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Address Switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 225 Chapter 26 Static Route Table 81 Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the above fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purpose only Destination This field
464. static bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Static bindings are uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only be in one static binding If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID as an existing static binding the new static binding replaces the original one To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Figure 101 IP Source Guard Static Binding ONSET EEE NEN IPSG MAC Address IP Address VLAN Port i Any Add Cancel Clear Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VLAN Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 IP Source Guard Static Binding LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding Port Specify the port s in the binding If this binding has one port select the first radio button and enter the port number in the field to the right If this binding applies to all ports select Any Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected static binding or i
465. such as Media on Demand MoD using multicast traffic across a network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management IP Multicast With IP multicast the Switch delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody In addition the Switch can send packets to Ethernet devices that are not VLAN aware by untagging removing the VLAN tags IP multicast packets RIP RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a routing device to exchange routing information with other routers OSPF OSPF Open Shortest Path First is a link state protocol designed to distribute routing information within an autonomous system AS An autonomous system is a collection of networks using a common routing protocol to exchange routing information OSPF is best suited for large networks DVMRP DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is a protocol used for routing multicast data within an autonomous system AS DVMRP provides multicast forwarding capability to a layer 3 switch that runs both the IPv4 protocol with IP Multicast support and the IGMP protocol VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP defined in RFC 2338 allows you to create redundant backup gateways to ensure that the default gateway of a host is always ava
466. such traffic first goes through a router For more information on VLANs refer to Chapter 8 on page 91 1 1 4 1 Tag based VLAN Example Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network performance through reduced broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server In the following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example ee ae rA lt gt z N mw Sa o mmm eee m mmm mm mmm mm GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Hardware Installation and Connection This chapter shows you how to install the hardware and make port connections ES Example graphics are shown 2 1 Freestanding Installation 1 Make sure the Switch is clean and dry 2 Setthe Switch on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and the connected cables Make sure there is a power outlet nearby 3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord 4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet 5
467. sword When the client provides the login credentials the Switch sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server The RADIUS server validates whether this client is allowed access to the port 2 Atthe time of writing IEEE 802 1x is not supported by all operating systems See your operating system documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication Figure 66 IEEE 802 1x Authentication Process BH NE E o New Connection N Login Info Request Login Credentials 4 Authentication Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 16 1 2 MAC Authentication MAC authentication works in a very similar way to IEEE 802 1x authentication The main difference is that the Switch does not prompt the client for login credentials The login credentials are based on the source MAC address of the client connecting to a port on the Switch along with a password configured specifically for MAC authentication on the Switch Figure 67 MAC Authentication Process b gt ILI cm m Q New Connection Authentication Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication 16 2 Port Authentication Configuration To enable port authentication first activate the port authentication
468. t ui oed et op er doa Le i d ed da i od ad e ao 301 TUS TGR aca dak Bd cad ET NN 303 Table 124 Syslog Severity Levels sccsicctuccenciscaietcesscquscaatezaninctassisenuedediaanwucgnsha conser REM VICE URS MEC TuS UE EU HE EDS 305 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 33 List of Tables TODI SV SIOE 306 WE 120 Sybo Sener SSIS TTE 307 Table 127 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications 0 cccccccccccceesssceneesennsceeeecceescecesecnneccceeeenense 309 Table 128 Cluster Management Staus iic e rer idea ot ne otio ae ACA EUR d b e RR ed Rd 311 Table 129 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example 1 erret naeh aoro ne rera nn aaron aa nnb i 312 Table 130 Clustering Management Configuration c iiie ieee enisinia 313 jr FEL wem TR 316 E WE CN I ainoan A 318 EF MTM EE 320 Table 134 Routing Table Status aise redeat bp abad i ped edu ebrei hdd dai Do d da bod a cde oho RR OD A intone 321 Table 135 Congue COn e 324 Table 136 Command Interpreter Mode Summary scienti hr nire i nnt tha 329 Tabs le Command Summary User Modo 2izscsdaciesssesee uri e Eee XEEEFRINDU ah ekrbeqUdE EFRON E 333 Table 138 Command Summary Enable Mode iucesiice idet brit dd eid tid e sonini 334 Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode sssseeeeeee nennen 343 Table 140 interface port channel Commands sssssssssssssese eene nnns n nnn nnne 368 Ta
469. t Format All Name VLAN Priority Ethernet Type Layer 2 Destination DSCP IP Protocol Layer 3 Source Destination MAC Address a macho 59 ps fa a mro C Any Port G E MAC Address shies owe I IF h ICF G Any bd Any c Any cio AI O others Hex G Any c 1 c all Establish Only C Others Dec IP Address 0000 E Address Prefix G Any Socket Number IP Address ooo C Address Prefix 250p G Any Socket Number Add Cancel Clear GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Policy Rule This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules 19 1 Policy Rules Overview A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria refer to Chapter 18 on page 151 for more information A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network 19 1 1 DiffServ DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every
470. t update or access of the DHCP snooping database none The Switch is not accessing the DHCP snooping database read The Switch is loading dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database write The Switch is updating the DHCP snooping database Delay timer expiry This field displays how much longer in seconds the Switch tries to complete the current update before it gives up It displays Not Running if the Switch is not updating the DHCP snooping database right now Abort timer expiry This field displays when in seconds the Switch is going to update the DHCP snooping database again It displays Not Running if the current bindings have not changed since the last update This section displays information about the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database Last succeeded time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database successfully Last failed time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully Last failed reason This field displays the reason the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully This section displays historical information about the number of times the Switch successfully or unsuccessfully read or updated the DHCP snooping database Total attempts This field displays the number of times the Switch has tried to access the DHCP snooping database for any reason
471. tassadaznes ha tty ada S Kk S Rt aS de 432 Figure 212 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting aeseeueeeeeennr renean trn tn nnn nth annua Eun 434 Figure 213 Subnetting Example After Subnetting 1 2 ecce satet eaa rae tke ehh da usb ba sau da uude 435 Figure 214 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example sss 439 Figure 215 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example sss 439 Figure 216 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example sss 440 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide List of Tables List of Tables TE TROM PINE zena ore res Serr ee re Terre enter te armen sree errr aay pa irene eres Cer Te 45 qs 2274 eS cate cia net here m tatiana 50 Table 3 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview ccccicssccessis ccssscccssteussacesagueccesnaswduesesracequecensncqnebedstiavmeeseiae 57 Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details 58 Tabs gt Hayigadon Patel LS ausdesosdtee s dadrre Ede boU M etate dU ES E UE FEN QUA ERA PUR U E RENE QUEK Noam 59 Ds dogcev dete oe TTE 71 Tabe 7 Status Pont DeilalsS m T T LL TT 73 D cic ee E E EEUU IET 78 Table 9 Basic Seling gt Genial Sep 12st tror bI YE RE RAE PRE UA EEUE Rb A TENERE HY SU RPM TSSEEPRP CANNE EHE dS 80 Table 10 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup Loss dicicur rad cti onset ea wad outa ci bala ote tob cud ERU eoo ph Pa doen EREKE ES 82 Table 17 Basic Setting i i 84 Taito 12 Basi Sating POR SOU aici is ma
472. tch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Otherwise select No Change to not replace the priority IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join Note If you enable IGMP filtering you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the ports that you want to allow to join multicast groups Unknown Multicast Frame Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide to all ports Chapter 22 Multicast Table 54 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reserved Multicast Group Multicast addresses 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 are reserved for the local scope For examples 224 0 0 1 is for all hosts in this subnet 224 0 0 2 is for all multicast routers in this subnet etc A router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range See the IANA web site for more information Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast address Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings
473. te and configure static routes on the Switch by using the ip route command Syntax ip route ip mask lt next hop ip gt ip route ip mask next hop ip metric lt metric gt name lt name gt inactive where ip Specifies the network IP address of the final destination mask Specifies the subnet mask of this destination next hop ip Specifies the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Switch metric lt metric gt The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number name lt name gt Specifies a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes inactive Deactivates a static route An example is shown next Create a static route with the destination IP address of 172 21 1 104 subnet mask of 255 255 0 0 and the gateway IP address of 192 168 1 2 Assigns a metric value of 2 to the static route Assigns the name route to the static route sysname config ip route 172 21 1 104 255 255 0 0 192 168
474. tely Press CTRL C to terminate the Ping process This command sends Ping packets to an Ethernet device The following example sends Ping requests to and displays the replies from an Ethernet device with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 sysname ping 192 168 1 100 sent rcvd rate rtt avg mdev max min reply from 1 1 100 0 0 0 0 O 192 168 1 100 2 2 100 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 100 3 3 100 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 100 sysname 46 4 traceroute Syntax traceroute ip host name in band out of band vlan lt vlan id gt ttl gt lt 1 255 gt wait lt 1 60 gt queries lt 1 10 gt where lt ip host name gt The IP address or host name of an Ethernet device Il in band out of Specifies the network interface or the VLAN ID to which the band vlan lt vlan Ethernet device belongs id ttl lt 1 255 gt Specifies the Time To Live TTL period wait lt 1 60 gt Specifies the time period to wait queries lt 1 10 gt Specifies how many tries the Switch performs the traceroute function GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 46 User and Enable Mode Commands This command displays information about the route to an Ethernet device The following example displays route information to an Ethernet device with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 sysname gt traceroute 192 168 1 100 traceroute to 192 168 1 100 30 hops max 40 byte packet 1 192 168 1 100 10 ms 10 ms 0 ms tr
475. tem name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click this to clear the fields above VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Type This field displays Server or Relay for the DHCP mode DHCP Status For DHCP server configuration this field displays the starting IP address and the size of the IP address pool For DHCP relay configuration this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 33 DHCP 33 5 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANs The following example displays two VLANs VIDs and 2 for a campus network Two DHCP servers are installed to serve each VLAN The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms VLAN 1 to the DHCP server with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 Requests from t
476. ter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE area lt area id gt Enables MD5 authentication and 13 virtual link sets the key ID and key for the lt router id gt virtual link in the area message digest key keyid md5 lt key gt area lt area id gt Sets a descriptive name for the 13 virtual link virtual link for identification router id purposes name name exit Leaves the router OSPF 13 configuration mode network ip Creates an OSPF area 13 addr bits gt area lt area id gt no area lt area Removes the specified area 13 id gt no area lt area Sets the area to use no 13 id gt authentication None authentication no area lt area Sets the area to use the default 13 id gt default cost 15 cost no area area Disables stub network settings in 13 id stub the area no area area Sets the area to send LSAs Link 13 id stub no State Advertisements summary no area area Resets the authentication 13 id virtual settings on this virtual link link router id authentication key no area area Resets the authentication 13 id virtual settings on this virtual link link router id message digest key no area area Resets the authentication 13 id virtual settings on this virtual area link router id authentication Same as area no area area Dele
477. tes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access User Name the format of the User Name attribute is enabZ where is the privilege level 1 14 User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 23 3 1 2 Attributes Used to Login Users User Name User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 23 3 1 3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802 1x Authentication User Name NAS Identifier NAS IP Address NAS Port NAS Port Type This value is set to Ethernet 15 on the Switch Calling Station Id Frame MTU EAP Message State Message Authenticator 23 3 2 Attributes Used for Accounting The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 23 3 2 1 Attributes Used for Accounting System Events NAS IP Address NAS Identifier Acct Status Type Acct Session ID The format of Acct Session Id is date time 8 digit sequential number for example 2007041917210300000001 date 2007 04 19 time 17 21 03 serial number 00000001 Acct Delay Time GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting 23 3 2 2 Attributes Used for Accounting Exec Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time that they are sent the difference between Console and Telnet SSH Exec events is that the Telnet SSH events utilize the Calling Station Id attribute Table 65 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIB
478. tes the virtual link from the 13 id virtual link router id area GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE no network lt ip Deletes the OSPF network 13 addr bits gt no redistribute Sets the Switch not to learn RIP 13 rip routing information no redistribute Sets the Switch not to learn static 13 static routing information redistribute Sets the Switch to learn RIP 13 rip metric type routing information which will use 1 2 metric lt 0 the specified metric information 65535 gt redistribute Sets the Switch to learn static 13 static metric routing information which will use type lt 1 2 gt the specified metric information metric 0 65535 passive iface Sets the interface to be passive 13 ip addr bits A passive interface does not send or receive OSPF traffic rip Enables and enters the RIP 13 configuration mode exit Leaves the RIP configuration 13 mode vrrp network ip Adds a new VRRP network nd 13 address mask enters the VRRP configuration bits vr id 1 7 mode uplink gateway ip exit Exits from the VRRP command 13 mode inactive Disables the VRRP settings 13 interval Sets the time interval in 13 1 255 seconds between Hello message transmissions name name Sets a de
479. test command View the results sysname config interface port channel 3 6 sysname config interface test 3 6 Testing internal loopback on port 3 Passed Ethernet Port 3 Test ok Testing internal loopbac Ethernet Port 4 Test ok k k k on port 4 Passed k Testing internal loopback k k k on port 5 Passed Ethernet Port 5 Test ok Testing internal loopbac Ethernet Port 6 Test ok on port 6 Passed 48 3 Interface no Command Examples Similar to the no commands in the Enable and Config modes the no commands for the Interface sub mode also disable certain features In this mode however this takes place on a port by port basis 48 3 1 no bandwidth limit You can disable bandwidth limit on port 1 simply by placing the no command in front of the bandwidth limit command GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 48 Interface Commands Syntax no bandwidth limit An example is shown next e Disable bandwidth limit on port sysname config interface port channel 1 sysname config interface no bandwidth limit GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN and associated commands 49 1 Configuring Tagged VLAN The following procedure shows you how to configure tagged VLAN 1 Use the IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN commands to configure tagged VLAN for the Switch Use the vlan lt vlan id
480. the Switch Disable re authentication on ports one three four and five Disable authentication on ports one six and seven Figure 202 no port access authenticator Command Example sysname config no port access authenticator sysname config no port access authenticator 1 3 5 reauthenticate sysname config no port access authenticator 1 6 7 47 5 4 3 no ssh Syntax no ssh key lt rsal rsa dsa gt no ssh known hosts lt host ip gt no ssh known hosts lt host ip gt 1024 ssh rsa ssh dsa where key lt rsal rsa dsa gt Disables the secure shell server encryption key Your Switch supports SSH versions and 2 using RSA and DSA authentication known hosts host ip Removes a specific remote host from the list of all known hosts known hosts host ip Removes remote known hosts with a specified public 1024 ssh rsa ssh dsa key type 1024 bit RSA1 RSA or DSA An example is shown next e Disable the secure shell RSA1 encryption key Remove the remote host with IP address 172 165 1 8 from the list of known hosts Remove the remote host with IP address 172 165 1 9 and with an SSH RSA encryption key from the list of known hosts sysname config no ssh key rsal sysname config no ssh known hosts 172 165 1 8 sysname config no ssh known hosts 172 165 1 9 ssh rsa GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 47 Configuration Mode Commands 47 6 Static Route Commands You can crea
481. the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Immed Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Max Group Num Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups any new IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port IGMP Filtering Profile Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group You can create IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile screen IGMP Querier Mode The Switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router or server The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP query port Select this when you connect an
482. ther ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping BES The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt Port GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Figure 104 DHCP Snooping Port Configure C E DHCP Snooping Port Configure Configure Port Server Trusted state Rate pps Untusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted TIT Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 DHCP Snooping Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Server Trusted state Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches and the Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers and the Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK
483. this routing 13 domain ip igmp Disables IP IGMP in this routing 13 domain ip ospf Disables OSPF authentication 13 authentication key key settings in this routing domain ip ospf Sets the routing domain not to 13 authentication sama use the same OSPF authentication settings as the area ip ospf cost Disables the OSPF cost in the 13 routing domain ip ospf message Sets the routing domain not to 13 digest key use a security key in OSPF ip ospf priority Resets the OSPF priority for the 13 interface ip vrrp Resets the VRRP authentication 13 authentication key settings 374 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands 45 12 6 config vlan Commands Table 142 Command Summary config vlan Commands The following table lists the vlan commands in configuration mode COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE vlan vlan id Creates a new VLAN group 13 exit Leaves the VLAN configuration mode 13 fixed lt port list gt Specifies the port s to be a permanent member of this VLAN group 13 forbidden port list Specifies the port s you want to prohibit from joining this VLAN group 13 help Displays a list of available VLAN commands 13 inactive Disables the specified VLAN 13 ip address Xip address mask Sets the IP address of the Switch in the VLAN 13 Xip address mask manageable
484. this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking Table 52 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Role Select Normal to have the Switch ignore frames received or transmitted on this port with VLAN stacking tags Anything you configure in SPVID and Priority are ignored Note The Normal option is only supported on the GS 4012F model Select Access Port to have the Switch add the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames received on this port Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network In order to support VLAN stacking on a port the port must be able to allow frames of 1526 Bytes 1522 Bytes 4 Bytes for the second tag to pass through it SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 8 on page 91 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority On the Switch configure priority level of inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power
485. thod should be used first second and third The methods can be local radius or tacacs 14 admin password lt pw string gt lt confirm string gt Changes the administrator password 14 arp inspection Enables ARP inspection on the Switch You still have to enable ARP inspection on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports 13 filter aging time lt 1 2147483647 gt Specifies how long 1 2147483647 seconds MAC address filters remain in the Switch after the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet The Switch automatically deletes the MAC address filter afterwards 13 none Specifies the MAC address filter to be permanent 13 log buffer entries 0 1024 Specifies the maximum number 1 1024 of log messages that can be generated by ARP packets and not sent to the Syslog server If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number the Switch stops recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were dropped due to unavailable buffer 13 logs lt 0 1024 gt interval 0 86400 Specifies the number of syslog messages that can be sent to the Syslog server in one batch and how often 1 86400 seconds the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the syslog server 13 vlan vlan list Enables ARP inspection on the specified VLAN s 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Gui
486. tication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the TACACS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two TACACS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two TACACS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first TACACS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for authentication is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 61 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click A
487. tion 13 multi login Enables multi login 14 mvr vlan id Enters the MVR Multicast VLAN Registration configuration mode Refer to Section 45 13 on page 376 for more information 13 no aaa accounting commands Disables accounting of command sessions on the Switch 13 dotix Disables accounting of IEEE 802 1x authentication sessions on the Switch 13 exec Disables accounting of administrative sessions via SSH Telnet or console on the Switch 13 system Disables accounting of system events on the Switch 13 update Resets the accounting update interval to the value 0 13 aaa authentication enable Disables authorization of executing commands on the Switch 13 login Disables authentication of administrative sessions on the Switch 13 arp inspection Disables ARP inspection on the Switch 13 filter aging time Resets how long 1 2147483647 seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch after the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet to the default value 300 seconds 13 log buffer entries Resets the maximum number 1 1024 of log messages that can be generated by ARP packets and not sent to the syslog server to the default value 3 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode
488. tion Lookup Failure DLF limit 13 lt pkt s gt Sets the interface DLF limit in packets per second pps 13 egress set port list Sets the outgoing traffic port list for a port based VLAN 13 ethernet oam Enables Ethernet OAM on the port s 13 mode lt active passive gt Specifies active or passive OAM mode on the ports Active mode allows the port to issue remote loopback and discovery commands Passive mode means that the port can only respond to Ethernet OAM commands 13 remote loopback supported Enable Ethernet OAM remote loopback capability on the port s 13 exit Exits from the interface port channel command mode 13 flow control Enables interface flow control Flow control regulates transmissions to match the bandwidth of the receiving port 13 frame type all tagged untag ged Choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 140 interface port channel Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE ge spq lt q0 ql q7 gt Enables strict priority queuing 13 starting with the specified queue and subsequent higher queues on the Gigabit ports gvrp Enables this function to permit 13 VLAN
489. tive Make sure that you enter the correct password The administrator username is admin The default administrator password is 1234 The username and password are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file This restores all of the factory defaults including the GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 52 Troubleshooting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide PART VI Appendices and Index Product Specifications 425 IP Addresses and Subnetting 431 Common Services 441 Legal Information 445 Customer Support 449 Index 453 Product Specifications The following tables summarize the Switch s hardware and firmware features Table 147 Hardware Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Dimensions Standard 19 rack mountable GS 4012F 438 mm W x 225 mm D x 44 45 mm H GS 4024 438 mm W x 300 mm D x 44 45 mm H Weight GS 4012F 3 1 Kg GS 4024 4 2 Kg Power Specification One Backup Power Supply BPS connector GS 4012F AC 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 5 A Max DC 48 VDC 60 VDC 1 6 A Max GS 4024 AC 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hzx 1 5 A Max DC 48 VDC 60 VDC 2 2 A Max Note There is no tolerance for the DC input voltage Interfaces GS 4012F 8 mini GBIC SFP slots GS 4024 20 10 100
490. to define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow refer to Chapter 19 on page 157 to configure policy rules 18 2 Configuring the Classifier Use the Classifier screen to define the classifiers After you define the classifier you can specify actions or policy to act upon the traffic that matches the rules To configure policy rules refer to Chapter 19 on page 157 Click Advanced Application gt Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 151 Chapter 18 Classifier Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Classifier Active Name Layer 2 Layer 3 amp Classifier r Packet Format Au VLAN ii of Priorit GUN rior e Au j Ethernet Type C Others Hex MAC Add alles ress E C mac Port OM c Destinat MAC Add doni ress estination owel h h h LL h DSCP SAN Cc iz JAI Establish Only IP Protocol C Others Dec IP Address 0 0 0 0 Address Prefix t Source C Any Socket Numb ocket Number Ps IP Address D 0 0 Address Prefix 1g Destination C Any Socket Numbe oc umber c Add Cancel Clear The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Advanced Application gt Classifier LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this rule Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes
491. tries to establish a connection with computer A Computer X is in the same broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A Then computer X does the following things It pretends to be computer A and responds to computer B It pretends to be computer B and sends a message to computer A As a result all the communication between computer A and computer B passes through computer X Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 1 2 1 ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet You can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters Chapter 10 on page 107 They are stored only in volatile memory They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use They appear only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands not in the MAC Address Filter screens and commands 24 1 2 2 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for DHCP snooping You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch
492. trusionlock IntrusionLockEventOn GS 4012F This trap is sent when intrusion lock 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 1 occurs on a port GS 4024 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 1 loopguard LoopguardEventOn GS 4012F This trap is sent when loopguard 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 1 shuts down a port GS 4024 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 1 288 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Table 114 SNMP InterfaceTraps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION linkup linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up LinkDownEventClear GS 4012F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 2 Ethernet link is up GS 4024 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 2 linkdown linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down LinkDownEventOn GS 4012F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 1 Ethernet link is down GS 4024 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 1 autonegotiation AutonegotiationFailedEventO GS 4012F This trap is sent when an n 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 1 Ethernet interface fails to auto GS 4024 negotiate with the peer Ethernet 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 1 interafce AutonegotiationFailedEventCl GS 4012F This trap is sent when an ear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 20 37 2 2 Ethernet interface auto GS 4024 negotiates with the peer 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 13 37 2 2 Ethernet interafce Table
493. ts 4 Ifafter looking at the SVLAN the Switch does not have any ports to which it will send the frame it won t check the port filter GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 407 Chapter 49 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 49 3 5 Delete VLAN ID Syntax no vlan lt vlan id gt where lt vlan id gt The VLAN ID 1 4094 This command deletes the specified VLAN ID entry from the static VLAN table The following example deletes entry 2 in the static VLAN table sysname config no vlan 2 49 4 Enable VLAN Syntax vlan lt vlan id gt This command enables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN Static VLAN table 49 5 Disable VLAN Syntax vlan lt vlan id gt inactive This command disables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN Static VLAN table 49 6 Show VLAN Setting Syntax show vlan This command shows the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged SVLAN Static VLAN table An example is shown next VID is the VLAN identification number Status shows whether the VLAN is static or active Elap Time is the time since the VLAN was created on the Switch 408 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 49 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands The TagCt1 section of the last column shows which ports are tagged and which are untagged sysnamet show vlan The Number of VLAN 3 Idx VID Status Elap Time TagCtl 1 i Static 02721323 Untagged 1 2 Tagged 1 100 Static 0 00 17 Untagged Tagged 1 4 1 200 Static
494. ts Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port The Switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this check box to disable the port security feature The Switch forwards all packets on this port Address Learning MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC address learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active with address learning enabled Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 16384 0 means this feature is disabled GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 17 Port Security Table 41 Advanced Application gt Port Security continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memor
495. ts as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 22 on page 110 for more information Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port should participate in Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 11 1 on page 109 for more information on MRSTP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the Switch
496. tting 248 error message 247 graft 246 how it works 245 implementation 245 probe 246 prune 246 report 246 setup 246 terminology 246 threshold 246 DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 245 dynamic link aggregation 133 E egress port 103 egress rate and bandwidth control 128 enable mode 328 examples 377 Ethernet broadcast address 319 Ethernet port test 303 Ethernet ports default settings 46 external authentication server 186 F fan speed 78 FCC interference statement 445 feature summary 58 file transfer using FTP command example 283 filename convention configuration configuration file names 283 filtering 107 rules 107 filtering database MAC table 315 firmware 78 upgrade 281 311 flow control 87 back pressure 87 IEEE802 3x 87 forwarding delay 123 frames tagged 97 untagged 97 front panel 45 FTP 283 file transfer procedure 283 restrictions over WAN 284 G GARP 92 GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 92 GARP terminology 92 GARP timer 82 92 general features 428 general setup 79 getting help 63 gigabit Ethernet ports 46 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 80 GVRP 92 97 and port assignment 97 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 92 398 H hardware installation 41 hardware monitor 78 hardware overview 45 hello time 123 help in command interpreter 329 history in command interpreter 331 hops 123 HTTPS 297 certificates 297 implementation 297
497. ttings of one port onto other ports 44 1 Configure Clone Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports Click Management Configure Clone to open the following screen Figure 201 Configure Clone E Configure Clone ng Source Destination Pot Port Features Active Name Speed Duplex BPDU Control Flow Control Intrusion Lock VLAN1q VLAN1q Member Bandwidth Control VLAN Stacking Port Security Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Port Authentication Queuing Method IGMP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Port based VLAN MAC Authentication Two rate three color marker Ethernet OAM Loop Guard ARP Inspection DHCP Snooping Apply Cancel Basic Setting Advanced Application wA DTA DTA DA ELI we EPI Dl GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 44 Configure Clone The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 135 Configure Clone LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Enter the source port under the Source label This port s attributes are copied Destination Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label These are the ports Port which are going to have the same attributes as the source port You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash Example 2 4 6 indicates that ports 2
498. u may use to access the Switch are listed here Active Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the Switch Service Port For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP or HTTPS services you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Timeout Type how many minutes a management session via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 36 10 Remote Management From the Access Control screen display the Remote Management screen as shown next You can specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control Screen Figure 186 Access Control Remote Management NIGUDIGRHLENEFDNIN NN Secured Client Setup Access Control Entry Active Start Address E
499. uide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION Auth and Acct This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication and accounting services via external servers The external servers can be either RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service or TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus IP Source Guard This link takes you to screens where you can configure filtering of unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Loop Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops that occur on the edge of your network IP Application Static Routing This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually RIP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the RIP Routing Information Protocol direction and versions OSPF This link takes you to screens where you can view the OSPF status and configure OSPF settings IGMP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IGMP settings DVMRP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol settings IP Multicast This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to remove VL
500. umber port Information number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup Screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 33 DHCP Table 103 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 33 4 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the VLANI and VLAN2 domains There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both domains Figure 147 Global DHCP Relay Network Example E f DHCP Server 192 168 1 100 eee Nene Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown Make sure you select the Option 82 check box to set the Switch to send additional information such as the VLAN ID together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID
501. urity 22 cr ertet rrt IE EF INR Fa va edu Eva eaa aniier avia 148 Table 47 Advanced Application gt CIBSSITIBI 43 555 cr enr ry Pr ert aep An rn bae det toe PY vaa dA eode 152 Table 43 Classilier Summary Table sisckensaau ERR M AE PII REEK EHE n E cH EIS ERENRPPEOUNRN KH nee coP P INERE XFRERSEREROS 154 Table 44 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number cesses esent ennt aane 154 Tobe do Common TE FONS aa ties sous vssda ans da dueEiEEE iea testa ETE aiaa momsoneasiond 155 Table 46 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule 1seiescteenr ratto aae Roe Eee Eoo HS Mr t o xS a aa a REA 159 Table 47 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Summary Table seeee 160 Tabla qo Queuing Mellibd denen patei epa a CS UBER nM epu ax Sanaa nda dets aa apu vane t inda 164 Table 40 VLAN Teg Formal 167 Table 50 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format eese nnne 167 Table ST 9 0 1G Fa acsuaueue ert terre NEM e ERE N HOME merrier nie error 167 Table 52 Advanced Application VLAN Stacking scien r etie t ee redd rho koh d Qn Ead d UE a a ek pa UE non 168 Tahoe S0 WIIG SHINS Lucius eo debiti reete aa ean dedi c ade E cael vpisa di E p pilota 172 Table 54 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting 173 Table 55 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN 175 Table 56 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multi
502. ust first enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit 802 1x authentication on this port You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Reauthentication Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Reauthentication Timer Specify how often a client has to re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 16 2 2 Activate MAC Authentication Use this screen to activate MAC authentication In the Port Authentication screen click MAC Authentication to display the configuration screen as shown GS 4012F 4024 User s Guid
503. usted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high You can specify the maximum rate at which ARP packets can arrive on untrusted ports Limit These settings have no effect on trusted ports Rate pps Specify the maximum rate 1 2048 packets per second at which the Switch receives ARP packets from each port The Switch discards any additional ARP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit Burst interval The burst interval is the length of time over which the rate of ARP packets seconds is monitored for each port For example if the Rate is 15 pps and the burst interval is 1 second then the Switch accepts a maximum of 15 ARP packets in every one second interval If the burst interval is 5 seconds then the Switch accepts a maximum of 75 ARP packets in every five second interval Enter the length 1 15 seconds of the burst interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 24 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configu
504. ustering in the 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE member mac Sets the cluster member 13 address password lt password str gt name lt cluster Sets a descriptive name for the 13 name gt cluster rcommand mac Logs into the CLI of the specified 13 address cluster member default in band out of Specifies through which traffic 13 management band flow the Switch is to send packets dhcp dhcp vlan vlan Specifies the VLAN ID for the 13 id DHCP VLAN dhcp relay vlan id helper address Enables DHCP relay on the 13 remote dhcp specified VLAN and sets the IP serverl address of 1 DHCP server helper address Enables DHCP relay on the 13 remote dhcp specified VLAN and sets the IP serverl address of up to 3 DHCP remote dhcp servers Optionally sets the Serv r2s Switch to add relay agent information and system name lt remote dhcp server3 gt option information server lt vlan id gt starting Enables DHCP server for the 13 address lt ip specified VLAN and specifies the addr gt lt subnet TCP IP configuration details to masks sise oi send to DHCP clients client ip pool lt 1 253 gt starting Enables DHCP server for the 13 address ip specified VLAN and specifies the addr subnet TCP IP configuration details to mask
505. ut Packets v v Acct Output Packets v v Acct Terminate Cause v Acct Input Gigawords v v Acct Output Gigawords v v GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network 24 1 IP Source Guard Overview IP source guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network A binding contains these key attributes MAC address VLAN ID IP address Port number When the Switch receives a DHCP or ARP packet it looks up the appropriate MAC address VLAN ID IP address and port number in the binding table If there is a binding the Switch forwards the packet If there is not a binding the Switch discards the packet The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings IP source guard consists of the following features Static bindings Use this to create static bindings in the binding table DHCP snooping Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically ARP inspection Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets typical implementation you have to en
506. uthentication on the specified port s 13 reauthenticate Sets a subscriber to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to a specified port 13 reauth period lt reauth period gt Specifies how often a client has to re enter the username and password to stay connected to the specified port s 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE porte security Enables port security on the device 13 lt port list gt Enables port security on the specified port s 13 learn inactive Disables MAC address learning on the specified port s 13 address limit lt number gt Limits the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port 13 MAC freeze Adds learned MAC addresses to the static MAC table and stops learning any more MAC addresses 13 queue priority lt 0 7 gt level lt 0 7 gt Sets the priority level to physical queue mapping 13 radius accounting host lt index gt lt ip gt Specifies the IP address of RADIUS accounting server 1 or RADIUS accounting server 2 index 71 or index 2 13 acct port lt socket number gt key lt key string gt Sets the port number and key of the external RADIUS accounting server 13 ti
507. ver for authentication 13 password lt name string Sets the password sent to the RADIUS server for clients using MAC authentication 13 timeout 1 3000 Specifies the amount of time before the Switch allows a client MAC address that fails authentication to try and authenticate again This settings is superseded by the mac aging time command 13 mac aging time 10 3000 Sets learned MAC aging time 13 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 45 Introducing Commands Table 139 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE mac filter name lt name gt mac Configures a static MAC address 13 lt mac addr gt vlan port filtering rule lt vlan id gt drop src dst both inactive Disables a static MAC address 13 port filtering rule mac forward name name mac Configures a static MAC address 13 mac addr vlan forwarding rule vlan id interface lt interface id gt inactive Disables a static MAC address 13 forwarding rule mirror port Enables port mirroring 13 lt port num gt Enables port mirroring ona 13 specified port mode zynos Changes the CLI mode to the 13 ZyNOS format mrstp lt tree index gt Activates the specified STP 13 configuration priority 0 Sets the priority for the specified 13 61440 gt tree hello time 1 Sets hello time maximum
508. vide descriptions for all of the configuration screens In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links Table 3 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT Basic Setting Advanced Application IP Application Management System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup Management VLAN Static MAC Forwarding Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast Auth and Acct IP Source Guard Loop Guard Basic Setting Advanced Application IP Application Management Static Routing RIP OSPF IGMP DVMRP IP Multicast DiffServ DHCP VRRP Maintenance Access Control Diagnostic Syslog Cluster Management MAC Table IP Table ARP Table Routing Table Configure Clone GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 57 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator The following table lists the various web configurator screens within the sub links Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details ADVANCED BASIC SETTING APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT System Info VLAN Static Routing Maintenance General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup VLAN Port Setting Subnet B
509. w Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 DHCP Snooping Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch You still have to enable DHCP snooping on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports DHCP Vlan Select a VLAN ID if you want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to DHCP servers on a specific VLAN Note You have to enable DHCP snooping on the DHCP VLAN too You can enable Option82 in the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen Section 24 5 2 on page 211 to help the DHCP servers distinguish between DHCP requests from different VLAN Select Disable if you do not want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to a specific VLAN GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 71 DHCP Snooping Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Database If Timeout interval is greater than Write delay interval it is possible that the next update is scheduled to occur before the current update has finished successfully or timed out In this case the Switch waits to start the next update until it completes the current one Agent URL Enter the location of the DHCP snooping database The location should be expressed like this tftp Homain name or IP address directory if applicable file name for example tftp
510. witch learn multicast group membership information of any VLANs automatically Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the VLAN s that you specify below In either auto or fixed mode the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs including up to three VLANs you configured in the MVR screen For example if you have configured one multicast VLAN in the MVR screen you can only specify up to 15 VLANs in this screen The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs Note You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast Setting screen first Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP snooping Name Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Note You cannot configure the same VLAN ID as in the MVR screen Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is tu
511. witch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802 1p mapping table The following table shows the default DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping Table 98 Default DSCP IEEE 802 1p Mapping DSCP VALUE 0 7 8 15 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 48 55 56 63 IEEE 802 1p O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 32 4 1 Configuring DSCP Settings To change the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 143 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting ojo v e 1 16 2 v 24 3 7 32 4 7 40 5 48 6 56 7 T DSCP to 802 1p Mapping Diffserv oz o a o gt a o gt 5 0 gt e 0 7 0 afi oft nha t2ft aha aha hie 17 2 19 2 gt t9 2 gt 20f2 aA kA 23 2 gt 25 3 gt A 27 3 28 3 23 3 bA abk aav sam cam 36f4 37 4 ce 4z afar niza eba o axo zT ssia c5 viz afez sofe v sem s ez sem safer sse sj z sez sez sez e v ez sr Apply Cancel GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 32 Differentiated Services The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 99 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION 0 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number To set the IEEE 802 1p priority mapping select the priority level from the drop down list box
512. word 295 loop guard 219 examples 220 port shut down 221 setup 221 vs STP 219 LSA Link State Advertisement 230 MAC Media Access Control 78 MAC address 78 319 maximum number per port 148 MAC address learning 82 99 105 148 specify limit 148 MAC authentication 141 aging time 145 example 142 setup 144 MAC filter and ARP inspection 202 MAC table 315 how it works 315 viewing 316 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Index maintanence configuration backup 282 firmware 281 restoring configuration 282 maintenance 279 current configuration 279 main screen 279 Management Information Base MIB 286 management port 103 managementmanagement interface See also CLI man in the middle attacks 201 max age 123 hops 123 metric 234 MIB and SNMP 286 supported MIBs 287 MIB Management Information Base 286 mini GBIC ports 47 connection speed 47 connector type 47 transceiver installation 47 transceiver removal 48 mirroring ports 131 modes and accounts 328 in command interpreter 328 monitor port 131 132 mounting brackets 42 MRSTP status 120 MSA MultiSource Agreement 47 MST ID 113 MST Instance See MSTI 113 MST region 113 MSTI 113 MSTP 109 112 bridge ID 125 126 configuration 122 configuration digest 126 forwarding delay 123 Hello Time 125 hello time 123 Max Age 125 max age 123 max hops 123 path cost 124 port priority 124 revision level 123 status 124 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 81 multicast 171 249 802 1 priority 1
513. write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Edit Logins You may configure passwords for up to four users These users have read only access You can give users higher privileges via the CLI For more information on assigning privileges see Chapter 45 on page 325 User Name Set a user name up to 32 ASCII characters long Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control 36 4 SSH Overview Unlike Telnet or FTP which transmit data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 178 SSH Communication Example SSH Server SSH Client 36 5 How SSH works The following table summarizes how a secure conn
514. ws the number of packets with VLAN tags transmitted Rx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received RX Packet This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets received Control This field shows the number of control packets received including those with CRC error but it does not include the 802 3x Pause packets TX Collision The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after 512 bits of the packets have already been transmitted Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error RX CRC
515. y Poland e e e E mail info pl zyxel com Telephone 48 22 333 8250 Fax 48 22 333 8251 Web Site www pl zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications ul Okrzei 1A 03 715 Warszawa Poland Russia e Support http zyxel ru support Sales E mail sales zyxel ru Telephone 7 095 542 89 29 Fax 7 095 542 89 25 Web Site www zyxel ru Regular Mail ZyXEL Russia Ostrovityanova 37a Str Moscow 117279 Russia Support E mail support zyxel es Sales E mail sales zyxel es Telephone 34 902 195 420 Fax 34 913 005 345 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Appendix E Customer Support Web Site www zyxel es Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Arte 21 5 planta 28033 Madrid Spain Sweden Support E mail support zyxel se Sales E mail sales zyxel se Telephone 46 31 744 7700 Fax 46 31 744 7701 Web Site www zyxel se e Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg Sweden Ukraine Support E mail support ua zyxel com Sales E mail sales ua zyxel com Telephone 380 44 247 69 78 Fax 380 44 494 49 32 Web Site www ua zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Ukraine 13 Pimonenko Str Kiev 04050 Ukraine United Kingdom Support E mail support zyxel co uk Sales E mail sales zyxel co uk Telephone 444 1344 303044 08707 555779 UK only Fax 44 1344 303034 Web Site www zyxel co uk FTP Site ftp zyxel co uk Regular Mail ZyX
516. y The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 17 Port Security GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Classifier This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the Switch 18 1 About the Classifier and QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming port number For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow Configure QoS on the Switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves two separate steps 1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows 2 Configure policy rules
517. y Virtual IP iv Example2 192 168 10 1 24 sl iv o 7221 1 100 fi92 168 1 21 0 0 0 0 After configuring and saving the VRRP configuration the VRRP Status screens for both switches are shown next Figure 165 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switch A ED VRRP Statu S Index Active Network VRID 1 2 Yes Yes 192 168 1 1 24 192 168 1 1 24 2 1 VR Status Backup Master Configuration Uplink Status Alive Alive Figure 166 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switch B c Aug S Index Active Network VRID 1 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 2 2 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 1 VR Status Master Backup Configuration Uplink Status Alive Alive GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 275 Chapter 34 VRRP 276 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide PART Management CLI Troubleshooting Maintenance 279 Diagnostic 303 Syslog 305 Cluster Management 309 MAC Table 315 IP Table 317 ARP Table 319 Routing Table 321 Configure Clone 323 Introducing Commands 325 User and Enable Mode Commands 377 ands 383 Configuration Mode Comm Interface Commands 395 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 403 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands 411 Routing Domain Command Examples 413 Troubleshooting 415 277 278 Maintenance This chapter explains how to configure the screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration file
518. y issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLANs groups beyond the local Switch Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802 1Q VLAN terminology Table 13 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process Heb ene Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members ontro Registration Forbidden Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the specified VLAN Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don t tag all outgoing frames transmitted VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received Acceptable Frame Type You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port Ingress filtering If set the Switch discards incoming fram
519. you specify here is the time the MAC address entry stays in the MAC address table until it is cleared If you specify 0 for the timeout value then this entry will not be deleted from the MAC address table Note If the Aging Time in the Switch Setup screen is set to a lower value then it supersedes this setting See Section 7 5 on page 81 Port This field displays the port number GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication Table 40 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit MAC authentication on this port You must first allow MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 17 1 About Port Security
520. ys the authentication method used Same as Area None Simple or MD5 Key ID When the Authentication field displays MD5 this field displays the identification number of the key used Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide IGMP This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch as a multicast router 29 1 IGMP Overview IP multicast is an IETF standard for distributing data to multiple recipients The following figure shows a multicast session and the relationship between a multicast server multicast routers and multicast hosts A multicast server transmits multicast packets and multicast routers forward multicast packets to multicast hosts Figure 126 IP Multicast Multicast Routers Hosts l _ Ww A host can decide to join or leave a multicast group at any time A host can also be a member of more than one multicast group Multicast groups are identified by IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 A multicast server sends packets addressed to a particular multicast group multicast IP address IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is used by multicast hosts to indicate their multicast group membership to multicast routers Multicast routers can also use IGMP to periodically check if multicast h

ZyXEL Communications GS-4012 Switch User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents